JP2020089755A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of reducing a processing load for displaying an image.SOLUTION: Pieces of image data are stored in a memory module 74. A VDP 76 reads the image data on the basis of a drawing instruction from a display CPU 72, then sets the read image data on a frame buffer 82 for creating drawing data, at the time, a ground color is displayed to a display region corresponding to a region where the image data is not set on the frame buffer 82. Then, according to a content of the image, setting of background data is not performed to the frame buffer 82.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory ( For example, see Patent Document 1).

The case in which an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

JP, 2007-7465, A

Here, the image displayed on the display screen is configured to be updated at a predetermined update cycle, and the drawing data is created and the signal is output to the display device in time for the update cycle. Needs to be done. In addition, when creating the drawing data, an operation for specifying the coordinates and sizes of the individual images simultaneously displayed on the display screen is performed, and the drawing data is created based on the operation result.

In the above configuration, the processing load increases as the number of individual images to be calculated increases at the same time. Then, when the processing load locally increases, there is a concern that a processing drop may occur.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load for displaying an image.

The present invention is
Display means having a display screen,
Display storage means for storing image data in advance,
Display control means for displaying an image on the display screen based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and updating the content of the image each time a predetermined update timing is reached,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
Display execution means for displaying a predetermined base image set to a single color image in a display area corresponding to a storage area in which the image data has not been set in the setting storage means; ,
According to the content of the image displayed on the display screen, by not setting the image data in the storage area of the setting storage means corresponding to the specific range of the image, the specific range A base display utilizing means for displaying the base image in
Equipped with
The display storage means stores specific image data used when a specific image is displayed as a specific type of individual image,
The specific range is included in the range in which the specific image is displayed,
The base display utilization means does not set the specific image data in the storage area of the setting storage means corresponding to the specific range according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. ,
The color of the base image is set to the same color as the base color of the specific image,
It is characterized in that the base display utilization means displays the base image on the entire display screen when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the present invention, the processing load for displaying an image can be reduced.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(j) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display device. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display device. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters used for a winning/winning lottery. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a hardware configuration of a memory module. The flowchart which shows the data transfer process performed by a controller. The timing chart which shows a mode of data transfer. The flowchart which shows the main process performed by a display CPU. 6 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process executed by the display CPU. The flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed by a display CPU. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a drawing list. The flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the range of the virtual two-dimensional plane used as a calculation object in a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the task process performed by a display CPU. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that each individual image becomes a control object. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the scrolling background data. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect|action by setting the overlapping area|region. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for scroll backgrounds performed by a display CPU. 6 is a flowchart showing a divided part data setting process executed by VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the background data for small unit groups. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for displacement backgrounds performed by a display CPU. (A)-(e) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the addition process of the effect image. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for the 1st effect production performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for 1st effect production performed by VDP. (A) The flowchart which shows the 1st effect addition processing, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the 1st effect addition processing. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure for performing partial addition, (b) The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the 2nd effect production performed by the display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for 2nd effect production performed by VDP. (A) A flowchart showing the second effect addition processing, and (b) an explanatory view for explaining the state of the second effect addition processing. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a multiple effect production performed by a display CPU. (A) A flowchart showing a setting process for multiple effect effects executed by VDP, and (b) an explanatory view for explaining a combined data area. (A)-(g) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating (alpha) data. The flowchart which shows the symbol calculation process performed by a display CPU. (A) The flowchart which shows the setting process of the symbol sprite data performed by VDP, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that a part of symbol is displayed. (A)-(h) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating 1st another form. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating 2nd another form, (b) The flowchart which shows the setting process of the symbol sprite data performed by VDP. (A) A flowchart showing a character transition process executed by VDP, and (b) to (f) explanatory views for explaining how character transition display is performed. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a)-(d) wipe switching production. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for wipe switching effects performed by a display CPU. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing list created when wipe switching production is performed. The flowchart which shows the setting process for wipe switching production performed by VDP. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a wipe switching production. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the sprite for smooth movement, (b), (c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the sprite data for displaying the sprite for smooth movement. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for smooth movements performed by a display CPU. (A) A flowchart showing a setting process for smooth movement executed by VDP, and (b) an explanatory view for explaining how the setting process for smooth movement is executed. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of resolution adjustment by a scaler. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for zoom-in production performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for zoom-in production performed by VDP. 6 is a flowchart showing an output process executed by the display circuit. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of zoom-in production. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of moving image data. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content by moving image data. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for moving images performed in a display CPU. (A) A flowchart showing a decoding process by a moving image decoder, and (b) a flowchart showing a moving image setting process executed by a VDP. The flowchart which shows the operation generation command response process. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a display mode background. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a drawing list. The flowchart which shows a writing process. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image of a display screen at the time of drawing a bottom image, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image of a display screen when not drawing a bottom image. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a hardware configuration of a memory module. The flowchart which shows the task process performed by a display CPU. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a drawing list. The flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by VDP. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a situation that drawing data is created with execution of drawing processing. The flowchart which shows the hidden surface process using the Z buffer performed by VDP. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for masks performed by a display CPU. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of 1st mask display. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of a 2nd mask display. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for masks performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the operation generation command response process performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the display mode background performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the symbol calculation process performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for backgrounds performed by VDP. 9 is a flowchart showing background drawing data creation processing executed by VDP. 7 is a timing chart showing the timing at which separate storage data for the first display mode and separate storage data for the second display mode are created. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) connection object. The flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the connection object performed by a display CPU. The flowchart which shows the setting process for connection object production performed by VDP. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a connection object production. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the calculation process for backgrounds performed by the display CPU in 4th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus in a 1st processing structure. The flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus in a 1st process structure. The flowchart which shows the game time control processing performed by MPU of a main control apparatus in a 1st processing structure. The flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus in a 1st process structure. The flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus in a 2nd process structure. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU of a main control apparatus in a 2nd process structure.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in a forward direction. .. The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

The inner frame of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions being the support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right side portions being a support side. A back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and is rotatable rearward with one of the left and right side portions being the support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating front end, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. In addition, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating opening 23, a lower operating opening 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a main display portion 33, and a accessory display portion 34 are provided in each opening. ing.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper working opening 23, and the lower working opening 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 20, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In addition, an outlet 27 is provided at the bottom of the game board 20, and game balls that have not entered various winning openings are discharged from the game area through the outlet 27. Further, on the game board 20, a large number of nails 28 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a wind turbine are provided.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharging from the game area after passing through the opening. The mode which is not performed is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the outlet 27, the game ball entering the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24 or the through gate 25. Is also referred to as a prize.

The upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are unitized as a working port device and installed on the game board 20. Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are open upward. Further, the two working ports 23, 24 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper working port 23 faces upward. The lower working port 24 is provided with an electric accessory 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 24a, the game ball cannot enter the lower working opening 24, and the electric working object 24a is in the open state (supported or guided state) so that the lower working opening is reached. It is possible to win 24 prizes.

The variable winning device 22 is provided with a big winning opening 22a that leads to the back side of the game board 20, and an opening/closing door 22b that opens and closes the big winning opening 22a. The opening/closing door 22b is normally in a closed state where the game balls cannot be won or is difficult to win, and when the game is transferred to the open/close execution mode (open/close execution state) in the internal lottery, the game balls can be easily won. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when the jackpot is won. The opening/closing execution mode will be described later in detail. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 22, the variable winning device 22 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is a mode.

The main display portion 33 and the accessory display portion 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. On the main display portion 33, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 as a trigger, and as a result of the stop of the variable display, the winning of the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery performed based on this is clearly displayed. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the winning of the upper working opening 23 and the winning of the lower working opening 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and the winning is performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24. The result of the extracted internal lottery is clearly shown on the main display section 33 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening/closing execution mode, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 33. After it is displayed and the variable display is stopped, the mode is changed to the open/close execution mode.

The main display unit 33 is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by another type of display device such as a CRT or a dot matrix. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed on the main display portion 33, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality of types are displayed. A configuration in which the colors of the seeds are switched and displayed can be considered.

On the accessory display unit 34, the variable display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the through-gate 25 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through-gate 25 is displayed as the stop result of the variable display. It is specified by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 25 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 34 and the variable display is displayed. After the power supply is stopped, the state changes to the electric power release state. In the electric role open state, the electric accessory 24a provided in the lower operation port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 which variably displays (or variably or switches) a symbol which is a kind of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 26 is provided with a center frame 32 so as to surround the symbol display device 31. An upper portion of the center frame 32 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game sphere is prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 31, and there is no inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is reduced due to the fall of the game sphere. ..

The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

In the symbol display device 31, variable display of symbols is started based on winning in the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24. That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display unit 33, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 31 accordingly. Then, for example, in the game times when the game result is a big hit result, the symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the activated line set in advance in the symbol display device 31.

The display contents of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing individually the symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

As shown in FIGS. 2(a) to 2(j), a design, which is a kind of design, is composed of nine types of main designs to which the numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and a shell-shaped design. It is composed of sub-patterns. More specifically, the numbers of "1" to "9" are respectively added to nine types of character designs such as octopus to form the main design.

As shown in FIG. 3(a), on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of upper, middle and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of the numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol column Z2, nine kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub-symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and configured by 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 3B, on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are stopped and displayed. It is like this. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same numeral on any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of Z3 is finished, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is equivalent to the "specific symbol", and if the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol The combination is stopped and displayed. Further, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are equivalent to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. It

Further, in the case of an explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result described later, the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends with a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination formed, and thereafter, An explicit video is displayed.

The manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the picture variably displayed on the picture display device 31 is not limited to the above-mentioned picture, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the picture.

Also, based on the winning of any one of the operation ports 23, 24, the variable display is started on the main display section 33 and the symbol display device 31, and a predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped. It is equivalent to one game.

In the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 32, a first holding light emitting portion (first holding lamp portion) 35 corresponding to the main display portion 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided. The maximum number of game balls that have won in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the first reserved light emitting unit 35.

A second holding light emitting portion (second holding lamp portion) 36 corresponding to the accessory display portion 34 is provided in the upper right portion of the center frame 32. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 25 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reservations is displayed by turning on the second reserved light emitting unit 36. The functions of the hold light emitting units 35 and 36 may be performed by the display in a partial area of the symbol display device 31.

A rail portion 37 is attached to the game board 20, the guide rail is configured by the rail portion 37, and the guide rail is launched from a game ball launching mechanism (not shown) mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. The game ball is designed to be guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball launching mechanism launches a game ball by operating the launch handle 41 provided on the front door frame 14.

A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 that allows the substantially entire game area to be viewed from the front. The window 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel (not shown) is fitted therein. The window panel is made of glass to be colorless and transparent, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent.

A light emitting means is provided around the window 42. A display light emitting section 44 is provided above the window section 42 as a part of the light emitting means. Further, speaker units 45 are provided on the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 44 to output a sound effect or the like according to the game state.

Below the window portion 42 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 which bulge toward the front side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 46a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging part 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls dispensed from a dispenser described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 47a has a function of storing the game balls that are excessive in the upper plate 46a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 46a and the lower plate 47a.

In the area of the upper bulging portion 46 that faces the front of the pachinko machine 10, a performance operation device 48 including an operation portion that is manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by the player in order to make the effect contents on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 and the like into predetermined effect contents.

A main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, as described above, the back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame, and the back pack unit includes a payout mechanism section including a payout device, a payout control device, a power supply and a firing control device. Is installed. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that controls the main game. In the main controller 50, a trace means for leaving a trace of the opening is provided to the substrate box that houses the main control substrate 51 or the like, or a trace structure for leaving the trace of the opening is provided. You can Examples of the trace means include a structure of a joint portion (a caulking portion) that requires a plurality of case bodies that form the substrate box to be inseparably joined and that requires a predetermined portion to be broken during the separation, or an adhesive layer that is peeled off to attach an adhesive layer. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace that it has been peeled off by being left behind is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. In addition, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to a boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the substrate box can be considered.

An MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

As the ROM 53, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading the control program or the fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control/calculation unit, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be included as separate chips. It may be configured to be mounted.

The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power supply and firing control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply and launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the operating power necessary for each is generated for the main control board 51, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as a payout control device 55 and a display control device 70 described later.

A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply/launch control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 executes the processing for a power failure. It becomes possible to do.

Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, a detection sensor provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the winning portion corresponding to the winning portion, such as the general winning opening 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper working opening 23, the lower working opening 24, and the through gate 25. This is included, and the MPU 52 makes a prize determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. In addition, the MPU 52 executes the jackpot occurrence lottery and the jackpot result type lottery based on the winning of the upper operation mouth 23 and the lower operation mouth 24, and also executes the reach occurrence lottery for each game time and the determination lottery of the display continuation period.

Here, a configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 52 will be described.

The MPU 52 uses various counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 33, symbol display setting of the symbol display device 31, display setting of the accessory display unit 34, and the like. As shown in FIG. 5, specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for jackpot occurrence lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, and a symbol. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the display device 31 fluctuates and deviates, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and fluctuations in the main display portion 33 and the symbol display device 31. The fluctuation type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 24a of the lower operation port 24 is in the power open state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54. Of these, in the lottery counter buffer 54a, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is obtained information storage when a winning is generated in the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b as a means.

The reserve ball storage area 54b includes a reserve area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and according to the winning history of the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24. Numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a are stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the winnings to the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24 occur successively a plurality of times, the first holding area RE1→the second holding area RE1. Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2→third holding area RE3→fourth holding area RE4. Since the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 are provided in this way, the winning history of the game balls to the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. Further, the holding area RE is provided with a holding number storage area NA, and in order to specify the holding number storage area NA, the number of the winning history stored in the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24 is held and stored. Information is stored.

The number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more, or may be a single number.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the main display portion 33, and at the start of one game time. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, the judgment of win/fail is made.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 599, for example, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24.

The value of the random number for the jackpot is stored as a win/loss table (win/win information group) in the win/win table storage area as the win/win information group storage means in the ROM 53. As the win/loss table, a win/loss table for low probability mode (low probability win/loss information group) and a win/loss table for high probability mode (high probability win/loss information group) are set. That is, the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-probability mode (low-probability state) and the high-probability mode (high-probability state) as the lottery modes in the win/loss lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that is a big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the high probability mode win/loss table is referred to in the above-mentioned lottery, the number of random numbers to be a big win is 20. If the winning probability in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results are (1) a mode of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode, and (3) a bottom after the opening/closing execution mode. A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the operation port 24.

As an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening/closing execution mode, the high frequency is set so that the frequency of winning the variable winning device 22 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed 15 times (high-frequency use number) from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 seconds (high-frequency time). ) Has elapsed or until the number of winnings to the special winning opening 22a reaches 10 (high frequency number). On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed twice (the number of times of low frequency use) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Is continued or until the number of winnings to the special winning opening 22a becomes 6 (the number of low-frequency winnings).

In this pachinko machine 10, when the firing handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 58 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 sec. .. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning opening 22a is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the special winning opening 22a once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

The number of times the special winning opening 22a is opened/closed in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time (or opening limit period) for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are the same as those of the high frequency winning mode. The value is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of winning the variable winning device 22 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher than that of the low frequency winning mode. It is optional. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the variable winning device 22 does not substantially occur. It is good to have a configuration. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the product of the game cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set to be shorter than the opening time limit for one opening, while in the low frequency winning mode, the one time opening is performed. The product of the game cycle of the game ball and the release limit number may be set to be longer than the release limit time. Also, even if the interval between shooting game balls and the opening time of one big winning opening 22a is not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which substantially no prize is won in the variable winning device 22.

As a support mode of the lower working port 24 in the electric accessory 24a, when compared in a situation where the game balls are continuously emitted in a similar manner to the game area, the electric working object 24a in the lower working port 24 is Low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability that the electric role open state wins in the electric role open lottery using the electric role open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 24a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than in the low frequency support mode, and one more opening is performed. The time is set long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric power open state is won, and the electric accessory 24a is opened a plurality of times, it is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode is shorter than the low-frequency support mode in that the minimum secured time required for the next electric accessory release lottery after one electric accessory release lottery is performed is shorter. Is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be awarded to the lower working opening 24 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the upper working opening 23 is higher than in the lower working opening 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the winning in the lower working opening 24 is higher than that in the upper working opening 23. The probability of winning a prize increases. Then, when a prize is given to the lower working opening 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he holds. be able to.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high frequency support mode being in the electric role open state per unit time is higher than that of the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-mentioned one. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning the electric role open state in is increased. In addition, a securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (for example, in the accessory display unit 34 based on the winning of the through gate 25). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the high-frequency support mode is set so that a shorter securing time is easier to select or the average securing time is shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It may have been done. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is increased, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed (that is, , Shortening one time variable display time on the accessory display 34), shortening the average time of the securing time and increasing the winning probability, any one condition or a condition of any combination is applied. Therefore, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 53. And as such a distribution destination, a normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result), an explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result (explicit high probability corresponding game result or a result that suddenly changes into a certain probability), and 15R certainty variation jackpot result (high probability) Corresponding special game result) is set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result of shifting the game state to the normal jackpot state (low probability corresponding special game state).

The explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. .. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning/winning lottery becomes the big hit state win, and the big hit state shifts accordingly. In other words, the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result is a jackpot result of shifting the gaming state to the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

The 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the winning/winning lottery becomes the big hit state win, and the big hit state shifts accordingly. In other words, the 15R certainty variation jackpot result is a jackpot result of shifting the gaming state to the 15R certainty variation jackpot state (high probability corresponding special gaming state).

The normal game state in relation to each of the above-mentioned game states means a state in which the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” correspond to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” correspond to the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result. "15-29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the manner of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing two types of probability variation jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result is the highest in the high-frequency winning mode in the opening/closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode. In the support mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, the high-frequency support mode is the high-frequency support mode. As a result, the monotony of the game can be suppressed, and the attention of the game can be increased.

As a kind of probability variation jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/loss lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode is maintained to the previous mode. The non-explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result (the result of the non-explicit high probability corresponding game result or the latent probability variation state) may be included. In this case, the probability variation jackpot result is further diversified.

Furthermore, as a kind of the miss result in the win/win lottery, a special miss result which does not occur in the win/win lottery mode and the support mode after the transition to the opening/closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode may be included. .. In the configuration in which both the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special outlying result are set as described above, the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained to the previous mode. It is common to be done, but because the transition mode of the win/loss lottery mode is different, for example, when one of the implicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result or special outlier result occurs in the normal gaming state, It is possible to make the player predict which result actually corresponds to.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 31. The expected effect is provided with a symbol display device 31 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (patterns), and variable display at the game time when the open/close execution mode of the variable winning device 22 is the high frequency winning mode. In the gaming machine in which the subsequent stop display result is the special display result, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (pattern) on the symbol display device 31 is started, and then the stop display result is derived and displayed. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state in which a special display result is likely to occur.

Two types of expected display are set: the reach display and a notice display for expecting the reach display or the special display result in a stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, the symbols are stopped and displayed for a part of the symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 31, so that a combination of the jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode can be obtained. It includes a display state in which reach symbol combinations that may be established are displayed, and variable display of symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, while displaying the combination of reach symbols as described above, while performing variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and displaying the predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image, the reach effect is performed. , Which includes reducing or displaying a combination of reach symbols and displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen to perform a reach effect.

Regarding the reach display related to the variable display of the symbols, specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of the symbols, on the preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 31, the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode is generated. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the reach symbol combination in which the corresponding jackpot symbol combination may be established, and the variable display of the symbol is displayed by the final stop symbol row in the situation where the reach line is formed. Is to do.

Explaining the display contents of FIG. 3 in detail, first, the variable display of symbols is finished in the upper symbol row Z1, and the variable display of symbols is finished in the lower symbol row Z3. Reach lines are formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach lines are formed, variable display of symbols is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display will be given. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of symbols is ended.

The notice display is a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the variable display of the symbols is started on the display screen of the symbol display device 31, or a part of the symbol columns. In a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol columns, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is included. Further, a background image having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes and a pattern on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 having a predetermined mode different from the previous modes are also included. Such advance notice display can occur in both game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the reach display is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with a probability.

The reach display is executed irrespective of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game game in which the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Further, in the game time that does not shift to the open/close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53. Is executed if On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made not by the main controller 50 but by the sound emission controller 60.

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used in determining the fluctuation display time (display continuation period) on the main display section 33 and the fluctuation display time (display continuation period) of the symbol on the symbol display device 31 in the MPU 52. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation display is started on the main display portion 33 and the fluctuation pattern is determined by the symbol display device 31 at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area (variable display time information storage means) of the ROM 53 is referred to.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured so that, for example, it is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed on whether or not the electric accessory 24a is controlled to the open state by the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

On the output side of the MPU 52, a payout control device 55 is connected, and a power supply and firing control device 57 is connected. To the payout control device 55, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted based on the result of the prize determination to the prize-corresponding ball portion. The payout control device 55 causes the payout device 56 to perform payout control of prize balls and loan balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. A firing permission command is transmitted to the power supply and firing control device 57 based on the operation of the firing handle 41. The power supply and launch control device 57 drives the game ball launching mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 50.

Further, the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the display control of the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, at each game time, the display control of the main display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 52. Further, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 24a is to be opened is specified, the display control of the accessory display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 52.

Further, the output side of the MPU 52 is connected to a variable winning a prize driving unit that opens and closes the opening/closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22, and an electric auditors product driving unit that opens and closes the electric auditors product 24a of the lower working port 24. .. That is, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 52 executes the drive control of the variable winning drive unit so that the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed. When the electric accessory 24a is in the open state, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the electric accessory driving unit so that the electric accessory 24a is opened and closed.

Further, an audio emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various production commands are transmitted to the audio emission control device 60.

Here, the processing executed by the MPU 52 will be briefly described.

The MPU 52 repeatedly executes a predetermined game progression process after the power is turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, as the game progression process, a normal process that is repeatedly executed in a first cycle and a second cycle that is shorter than the first cycle are activated, and the normal process is interrupted and executed. Although the timer interrupt processing to be set is set, the specific processing configuration is arbitrary as long as the progress of the game can be controlled.

As a part of the game progressing process, a process of acquiring pending information, a game number control process, a game state transition process, and a demo display process are set. In the process of obtaining the holding information, when the winning number to the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24 is detected in the situation where the holding upper limit number of holding information is not held and stored in the holding ball storage area 54b, the lottery is performed at that time. A process of storing the combination of the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2, and the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the counter buffer 54a as holding information in the holding ball storage area 54b is executed. It It should be noted that the hold information is stored in the first hold area RE1 to the fourth hold area RE4 in time series, as described above.

In the game time control process, the data shift process of the reserved ball storage area 54b is performed, provided that the reserved information is reserved and stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b, neither during the execution of the game cycle nor in the opening/closing execution mode. Is executed. Specifically, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. After that, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. In addition, when the data shift process is executed, the winning/winning lottery process, the type determination process, and the game number starting process are executed.

In the winning/winning lottery process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won by referring to the numerical information relating to the jackpot random number counter C1 in the holding information shifted to the execution area AE and the winning/losing table corresponding to the current winning/winning lottery mode. judge. When the jackpot is won, the type determination process is further executed. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified by referring to the numerical information relating to the jackpot type counter C2 of the pending information shifted to the execution area AE and the distribution table.

In the game time start process, whether or not the reach occurs even if the jackpot is not won by referring to the reach information and the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 in the holding information shifted to the execution area AE To judge. Further, in the process for starting the game times, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of the big hit, the type of big hit, and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence is read from the ROM 53, and the read variable display time table and the variation type counter CS at the timing are read. The variable display time of the current game is determined from the numerical information. Then, in the game time start process, the variable display of the pattern corresponding to the determined variable display time is started on the main display unit 33, and the command for variation including the information of the variable display time, the presence/absence of a jackpot win, and A type command including the jackpot type information is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

By the way, since the variable display time is determined by reading the variable display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of a big hit, the type of big hit, and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, the variation command includes the information about the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. Can be said. Further, as will be described later, since the voice emission control device 60 determines the type of reach display according to the variation display time, it can be said that the variation command includes reach type information.

Further, in the game time control process, the variation display process is executed during execution of the game number, and when the variation display time determined in the process for variation start has passed, the main display section 33 displays the game number. The variable display of the pattern is terminated in a state in which the presence or absence of the jackpot win and the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type are displayed. Further, the end command for instructing the end of the game game is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

In the game state transition processing, when the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning have been completed, the transition processing to the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and the opening/closing processing of the special winning opening 22a in the variable winning device 22 is started. It should be noted that various commands for the open/close execution mode are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 when the open/close execution mode is started, during the open/close execution mode, and when the open/close execution mode is ended. In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the shift of the win/loss lottery mode or the shift of the support mode is executed in correspondence with the jackpot type related to the game times that triggered the start of the mode.

In the demo display process, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) for demonstrating without a new game time being started after the game time is ended in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress The determination process of whether or not it is performed is executed. In addition, since the power supply to the MPU 52 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for starting the demo is elapsed without the game time being newly started. The determination process of whether or not it is performed is executed. When it is determined that the time has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

The demo display means a start waiting effect displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 when a predetermined start waiting period has elapsed. In the demo image, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are performing a predetermined operation is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbol performs a predetermined operation. After the image is displayed, or instead of it, a maker name, a model name, or a moving image of a predetermined character may be displayed. Further, in the configuration in which the demo display is performed by the animation of the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the immediately previous game may be used as the symbol. In this case, the demo display can be diversified.

<Voice emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

The sound emission control device 60, as shown in FIG. 4, includes a sound emission control board 61 on which an MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data are stored, and a memory for temporarily storing various data in executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built in.

As the ROM 63, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and that does not require external power supply for storage is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control/calculation unit, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip. It may be configured to be mounted.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The operation device 48 for production and the main control device 50 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and the various light emitting parts 35, 36, 44, the speaker part 45 and the display control device 70 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. There is.

The MPU 62 receives the variation command transmitted from the main control device 50, recognizes that it is necessary to start the game game effect, and executes the game game effect start process. Further, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to end the game use effect, and executes the game use effect ending process. Further, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that the jackpot effect needs to be started or progressed, and the jackpot effect processing is executed. Further, by receiving the demo display command transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to start the demo display, and executes the demo display process.

Note that receiving a command from the main control device 50 in the MPU 62 is not limited to a configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 50, and includes a configuration in which a command relayed to the relay board is received.

In the game time production start process, based on both the variation command and the type command, the variation display time grasping process for grasping the variation display time (display continuation period) of the corresponding game time and the presence/absence of the reach display are grasped. Reach display grasping process, grasping process of jackpot result occurrence that grasps presence or absence of jackpot result, and jackpot type grasping process that grasps jackpot type when jackpot result occurs. Also, based on the grasping result in the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, a display effect for determining the type of display effect performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 in this game time. While performing the grasping process, the symbol type grasping process for determining the type of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 in the present game time is executed. Then, based on the result of each of these grasping process, a variation pattern command including information of the variable display time and information of the type of display effect, and a symbol designating command including information of the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed, the display control device. 70.

Further, in the game reproduction effect starting process, in addition to the above-described grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for performing a notice display is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type of lottery for the notice display is also executed. Then, if the advance notice display has been generated, the advance notice command including the information of the type of the advance notice display is transmitted to the display control device 70.

Further, in the game turn effect start process, the display light emitting table for game turn and the voice table for game turn are read from the ROM 63 based on the processing result of each of the above processes. The display light emission table for game times defines the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 in the course of progress of the corresponding game time. In addition, the voice table for game times defines the output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the progress process of the corresponding game times.

In the game game effect ending process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the voice output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game time are ended. Further, in the game turning effect ending process, an end command including information for ending the game turning effect is transmitted to the display control device 70.

In the jackpot performance process, based on the received various commands for jackpot performance, grasp the production mode at the time of opening, each round, between each round, and ending, and perform the jackpot performance corresponding to the grasped result. Is transmitted to the display control device 70. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for the big hit effect and the sound table for the big hit effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the big hit effect. Stipulate.

In the demo display process, the presentation mode of the demo display is grasped based on the received demo display command, and the demo display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 70. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for demonstration display and the voice table for demo display are read out from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emission unit 44 and the voice output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the demo display. Stipulate.

The processing executed by the MPU 62 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 is not limited to the above processing, but includes processing for controlling the light emission of the first holding light emitting unit 35 and the second holding light emitting unit 36. included.

Further, the MPU 62 recognizes that the effect operation device 48 has been operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the effect operation device 48 based on the operation unit of the effect operation device 48 being operated. Then, the operation corresponding process is executed. Further, even when the operated state is released, it is recognized by the fall of the operation signal and the operation handling process is executed.

Here, as a part of the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48, an effect such that the image displayed on the symbol display device 31 is shifted to a different position on the two-dimensional plane is executed. A plurality of positions, specifically, two positions are set as the shiftable positions. Correspondingly, the operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is provided as, for example, a cross key or an operation lever rotatable in a plurality of directions so that the plurality of positions can be individually designated. An operation signal corresponding to each operation is transmitted from the device 48. In the operation handling process, the operation mode is specified according to the type of the operation signal, and the operation generation command including the information that the effect operation device 48 has been operated and the operation mode information is transmitted to the display control device 70. Further, in the operation handling process, when the operation of the operation unit is released, the operation release command is transmitted to the display control device 70. Further, in the operation handling process, in addition to the above command transmission, the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of the sound from the speaker unit 45 are specified so as to correspond to the operation of the performance operation device 48. ..

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 4, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. ..

The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads (fetches), interprets (decodes), and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to an input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 via the input port 77. To be done. Note that receiving a command from the voice light emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the voice light emission control device 60, and includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay substrate is received. Be done.

The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74, and the VRAM 75 via a bus, and based on the command received from the voice light emission control device 60, various data stored in the memory module 74 is stored in the work RAM 73 or the VRAM 75. Send a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60, issues a drawing instruction to cause the symbol display device 31 to output an image signal. The memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described below.

The memory module 74 stores control data (control information) including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and also sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 31, background data, and moving images. It is a storage unit that stores in advance various image data (image information) including image data and the like. The memory module 74 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage and retention. Specifically, a NAND flash memory is used as the semiconductor memory. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is well executed. Further, the memory module 74 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outer shape or pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referenced when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is. Further, the background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state in which still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described later in detail.

The work RAM 73 is a storage unit for temporarily storing the control data read from the memory module 74 and transferred, and also temporarily storing a flag and the like. The work RAM 73 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is well executed. The work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. In this case, the control data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the display CPU 72 corresponding to the control data. Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

By the way, as the work RAM 73, one having a read speed (transfer speed) higher than that of the NAND flash memory 102 to be described later is used when the data of the same capacity is read and compared. In other words, as the work RAM 73, when the data of the same capacity is read and compared, the work RAM 73 has a shorter period required for the read than the NAND flash memory 102.

The VRAM 75 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 75 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM, or dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is well executed. Further, the VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 75 includes a development buffer 81, and image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the development buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the VDP 76 using the image data. Further, the VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76.

By the way, as the VRAM 75, a VRAM 75 having a read speed (transfer speed) higher than that of a NAND flash memory 102 to be described later is used when the data of the same capacity is read and compared. In other words, as the VRAM 75, when the data of the same capacity is read and compared, the VRAM 75 is used such that the period required for the read is shorter than that of the NAND flash memory 102. The VRAM 75 may be incorporated in the VDP 76.

The VDP 76 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 81 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 31b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 31a in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 76 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance of the VDP 76 should be called a microcomputer chip having a firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving picture decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and also connected to the I/F 95 for the display CPU 72 and the I/F 96 for the VRAM 75.

In the VDP 76, the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 is stored in the register 92. By storing the drawing list in the register 92, the control unit 91 activates a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. It should be noted that all of the control programs for operating the control unit 91 may be provided by the drawing list, and a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the control unit 91, and the control program and the contents of the drawing list are stored. The control unit 91 may execute a predetermined process according to the above. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 74.

As the above processing, the control unit 91 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 using (or by processing) the image data expanded in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The drawing data for one frame is the data necessary for displaying the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say that.

Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame area 82a and a second frame area 82b are provided. Each of these frame areas 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas (unit setting areas) corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a (that is, the display screen G) at a predetermined magnification. ing. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and it is possible to set 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

The storage capacity is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 82 is provided with the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b, in the situation where drawing is executed on the symbol display device 31 using drawing data created in one frame area. The drawing data to be used in the future is created for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer system is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b, and the image signal is displayed in the display circuit 94. It is output to the symbol display device 31 via the connected output port 78. Further, the display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal. The display circuit 94 is provided with a scaler 97 and an image signal output unit 98 in order to generate and output the image signal. The scaler 97 and the image signal output unit 98 will be described in detail later.

Further, the moving image decoder 93 executes decoding of the moving image data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Details of the processing will be described later.

<Specific configuration of memory module 74>
Next, a specific configuration of the memory module 74 will be described.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram for explaining the hardware configuration of the memory module 74. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory module 74 is configured by packaging the controller 101 and the NAND flash memory 102 into one package. A memory cell array is provided in the NAND flash memory 102, and in order to display an image on the area 103 for the control program in which the control program data of the display CPU 72 is stored in the memory cell array and the symbol display device 31. An image data area 104 in which used image data is stored is provided.

The controller 101 has a main body side I/F 111 that transmits and receives data to and from the display CPU 72 that is a transfer instruction source and the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75 that is a data transfer destination, and a storage side I that transmits and receives data to and from the NAND flash memory 102. /F112, a controller CPU113, a control ROM114 and a control RAM115, which are control units that perform data control processing in the controller 101 and physical block management processing of the NAND flash memory 102, and a NAND flash based on a transfer instruction from the controller CPU113. A transfer execution circuit 116 that executes data read from the memory 102, a cache memory 117 that temporarily stores the data read by the transfer execution circuit 116, and a data read from the NAND flash memory 102. And an error correction circuit 118 that performs error detection and correction of the detected error.

Generally, the NAND flash memory 102 is used while avoiding a block including a defect in the memory cell array. The presence/absence of this defective block and the site thereof differ depending on the individual. Therefore, the logical address transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74 needs to be associated with each page of the physical block in the NAND flash memory 102, and the association is performed by the controller CPU 113.

Specifically, the control ROM 114 stores in advance an address management table (address management information group) that associates a logical address with the address of each page of the physical block. The addressing command received from the display CPU 72 is temporarily stored in the addressing buffer of the control RAM 115. When the address designation command is stored in the control RAM 115, the controller CPU 113 reads the address management table from the control ROM 114 and grasps the address of the page of the physical block corresponding to the designated logical address. Then, a transfer instruction is issued from the controller CPU 113 to the transfer execution circuit 116, and data is transferred in the transfer execution circuit 116 so that the data of the physical address related to the transfer instruction is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the cache memory 117. The process is executed. The data transferred to the cache memory 117 is transferred to the work RAM 73 or VRAM 75.

By the way, as the control ROM 114, a memory such as a mask ROM or a NOR flash memory that can read data by random access is used. Further, as the cache memory 117, one having a read speed (transfer speed) higher than that of the NAND flash memory 102 is used when the data of the same capacity is read and compared. In other words, the cache memory 117 has a shorter read period than the NAND flash memory 102 when the data of the same capacity is read and compared. Specifically, it has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing data, and in particular, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used.

The memory module 74 is provided with a boot memory 119 in which boot data for initial activation in the display CPU 72 is stored in advance. A mask ROM is used as the boot memory 119 so that random access is possible, and when the data read of the same capacity is compared, the read speed (transfer speed) is faster than the NAND flash memory 102. It is used. In other words, as the boot memory 119, when the data of the same capacity is read and compared, the read memory requires a shorter period than the NAND flash memory 102.

The boot memory 119 is not limited to the mask ROM, and may be a NOR flash memory as long as the data read speed is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 102, and an internal power supply such as a battery. It may be a DRAM unit or an SRAM unit equipped with.

The storage capacity of the boot memory 119 is set smaller than that of the NAND flash memory 102. Specifically, the storage capacity is the same, substantially the same, or similar to the storage capacity for one page in the NAND flash memory 102. Boot data for initial startup is stored in advance in the boot memory 119, and when the processing at the time of initial startup is executed in the display CPU 72, the data is read from the boot memory 119, not from the NAND flash memory 102. Is read. As the boot data for the initial activation, an instruction code for initializing the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76, and an instruction code for transferring the data stored in the NAND flash memory 102 to the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75 are set.

The data transfer process executed by the controller 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The data transfer process is activated when an unprocessed address designation command is stored in the control RAM 115.

First, in step S101, it is determined whether or not the addressing this time relates to access to the boot memory 119. Here, the display CPU 72 is provided with an initial transmission circuit so as to transmit an addressing command related to access to the boot memory 119 to the controller 101 when supply of operating power is started. Specifically, the initial transmission circuit is configured to transmit an addressing command in which all bits are “1” via a bus that electrically connects the display CPU 72 and the memory module 74. .. The addressing command in which all the bits are “1” corresponds to the access to the boot memory 119, and the controller 101 relates to the access to the boot memory 119 when the command is received. Judge that there is.

The address designation command for accessing the boot memory 119 does not have to have the above data structure, and may be a command in which all bits are “0”, for example. Further, as the electric wiring for electrically connecting the display CPU 72 and the memory module 74, a dedicated electric wiring is provided in addition to the electric wiring for transmitting the other address designation command, and the electric power for operating the display CPU 72 is supplied. When the supply is started, the signal output to the dedicated electric wiring may be started. In this case, in the controller 101, when the signal output from the dedicated electric wiring is started, it is considered that the controller 101 has received the transfer instruction of the data stored in the boot memory 119 and starts the transfer of the data. Good.

If the access is to the boot memory 119, the process of transferring the boot data of the boot memory 119 to the display CPU 72 is executed in step S102, and then this data transfer process is ended. This causes the display CPU 72 to read the boot data.

On the other hand, if it is not related to access to the boot memory 119 (step S101: NO), that is, if it is related to access to the NAND flash memory 102, the process proceeds to step S103. Incidentally, as will be described in detail later, the execution timing of the transfer instruction in this case is a timing before the timing when the program data and the image data stored in the NAND flash memory 102 are necessary in the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76. And the transfer to the VRAM 75 are completed.

In step S103, it is determined whether or not the target address is for predictive transfer. The target address of the predictive transfer means a physical address corresponding to a logical address for one page continuous to the logical address when the logical address for one page is designated by the display CPU 72.

If it is not the target address of the predictive transfer (step S103: NO), the physical address corresponding to the logical address to be designated this time is grasped using the address management table in step S104. By this processing, even in the configuration using the NAND flash memory 102 in which a defective block is likely to occur at the time of writing data, it is possible to favorably associate the physical address with the logical address.

In subsequent step S105, the transfer instruction is issued from the controller CPU 113 to the transfer execution circuit 116 so that the data stored in the grasped physical address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the cache memory 117. As a result, the transfer of the data to the cache memory 117 is started.

In a succeeding step S106, it is determined whether or not the transfer to the cache memory 117 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. When the transfer to the cache memory 117 is completed, a data transfer instruction related to the target address of the predictive transfer is executed in step S107. As a result, in the transfer execution circuit 116, the transfer of the data stored in the cache memory 117 at the physical address corresponding to the logical address consecutive to the logical address of the data that has just been transferred is started.

In this case, the cache memory 117 has a storage capacity capable of simultaneously storing data for a plurality of pages, specifically, two pages. Then, in the transfer execution circuit 116, when the data related to the target address of the predictive transfer is transferred to the cache memory 117, the data of the immediately preceding address which triggered the prediction and which has already been transferred to the cache memory 117 is transferred. The data related to the target address of the predictive transfer is transferred so as not to be erased, that is, to an area different from the area in which the data is stored. As a result, it is possible to prevent the data being transferred from the cache memory 117 to the work RAM 73 or the VRAM 75 from being erased when the data related to the target address of the predictive transfer is transferred.

In a succeeding step S108, a process of transferring the data, which has been determined to be transferred to the cache memory 117 in the step S106, to the side of the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75 which is set as the transfer destination target is executed. In this case, when transmitting the address designation command, the display CPU 72 transmits the RAM of the data transfer destination and the information of the transfer destination address in addition to the address designation command or as another command. Therefore, in step S108, the data is transferred to the transfer destination address in the designated transfer destination RAM.

Then, in step S109, it is determined whether or not the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the transfer destination target is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. Note that the data transfer request may not be accepted during this period. When the data transfer to the transfer destination target is completed (step S109: YES), this data transfer process is ended.

If it is determined in step S103 that the current address designation is related to the target address of the predictive transfer, the process proceeds to step S106 without executing the processes of steps S104 and S105. Then, when the transfer of the data related to the address designation to the cache memory 117 is completed (step S106: YES), the processes of steps S107 to S109 are executed, and the data transfer process is ended.

The state of data transfer will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

8A shows how data is transferred from the boot memory 119, FIG. 8A shows a read request from the display CPU 72, and FIG. 8B shows data read from the boot memory 119. It is a state of data transfer. 8B shows how data in the NAND flash memory 102 is transferred, FIG. 8C shows a read request from the display CPU 72, and FIG. 8D shows cache data. FIG. 8E shows how data is transferred to the memory 117, and FIG. 8E shows how data is transferred from the cache memory 117.

First, a case where data is transferred from the boot memory 119 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the display CPU 72 transmits an addressing command at the timing of t1, and the controller CPU 113 recognizes the reception of the addressing command at the timing of t2.

After that, at the timing of t3, the controller CPU 113 recognizes that the boot data of the boot memory 119 is designated as the read target, and the data transfer from the boot memory 119 is started. In this case, the period from the recognition of the read request from the display CPU 72 in the controller CPU 113 to the start of the data transfer is T1. After that, the data transfer is completed at the timing of t4.

Next, a case where data is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8B, the display CPU 72 transmits an addressing command at the timing of t5, and the controller CPU 113 recognizes the reception of the addressing command at the timing of t6.

After that, at the timing of t7, the controller CPU 113 recognizes that the data of the NAND flash memory 102 is designated as the read target, and also the physical address corresponding to the designated logical address. In the transfer execution circuit 116, pages corresponding to the physical address are sequentially recognized, and data transfer to the cache memory 117 is started. In this case, the recognition of the physical address corresponding to the logical address and the sequential recognition rather than the random access are performed, so that the period T2 from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7 is from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3. It is longer than the period T1.

Then, at the timing of t8, the data transfer to the cache memory 117 is completed, so that the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the transfer destination RAM is started. In this case, the period from the recognition of the read request from the display CPU 72 in the controller CPU 113 to the start of the data transfer to the transfer destination RAM is T3, and the data transfer from the boot memory 119 is not performed. It is longer than the period T1 required until the start.

Then, at the timing of t9 which is in the middle of data transfer to the RAM, the transfer of the data corresponding to the target address of the predictive transfer to the cache memory 117 is started. In this case, in the controller CPU 113, the physical addresses corresponding to the consecutive logical addresses may be designated by the transfer execution circuit 116, so that the address of the defective block may be present between the physical addresses corresponding to the consecutive logical addresses. Even if there is a problem, by associating those continuities in advance, the time required for recognizing the physical address can be shortened as compared with the case of recognizing the physical address from the address designation command. An image data group for executing a predetermined effect such as super reach display is stored over a plurality of physical blocks.

Then, at timing t10, the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the transfer destination RAM is completed. Then, a new address designation command is transmitted from the display CPU 72. By the way, the NOR flash memory is provided with an address terminal and a data input/output terminal separately, but the memory module 74 having the NAND flash memory 102 has, as its specifications, an address terminal and a data input/output terminal. Are not provided separately. Therefore, after the data is transferred from the cache memory 117, the display CPU 72 sends the addressing command.

After that, at the timing of t11, the transfer of the data related to the predictive transfer to the cache memory 117 is completed, and at the timing of t12, the controller CPU 113 recognizes the reception of the new addressing command from the display CPU 72. Since the logical address designated by the address designating command corresponds to the logical address of the data targeted for the predictive transfer, at the subsequent timing t13, the cache memory for the data targeted for the predictive transfer. The transfer from 117 to the transfer destination RAM is started.

In this case, the period from the recognition of the read request from the display CPU 72 in the controller CPU 113 to the start of the data transfer is T4. As described above, the data related to the predictive transfer is started during the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the RAM, and its start timing is before the read request from the display CPU 72 is made. It has become the timing of. Therefore, the period T4 is shorter than the period T3 required until the data transfer is started when the data is read from the NAND flash memory 102 without performing the predictive transfer. Incidentally, although the period T4 is shorter than the period T1 required until the data transfer from the boot memory 119 is started, the period T4 is not limited to this and may be longer than the period T1. Thereafter, at timing t14, the transfer of the data related to the predictive transfer is completed.

When the data transfer related to the predictive transfer continues, the transfer mode in which the period required until the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the RAM is started in response to the read request from the display CPU 72 is T4 Will be continuous. On the other hand, when the logical address of the data related to the predictive transfer and the logical address related to the read request from the display CPU 72 do not match, the period required until the data transfer from the cache memory 117 to the RAM is started is T3. Data is transferred in the following manner.

As described above, since the NAND flash memory 102 is used as a memory for storing the control program data and the image data in advance, the capacity can be increased while suppressing the manufacturing cost as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. You can Further, by using the NAND flash memory 102, rewriting can be repeatedly performed in the development stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the development cost can be suppressed. Also, recycling is possible. In particular, the transfer path with the display CPU 72 is made compact by storing both the control program data and the image data in a single memory module 74 instead of storing them in separate memories. You can

However, the NAND flash memory 102 has a lower data transfer rate than the NOR flash memory due to its specifications. On the other hand, the boot data for initial startup is stored in advance in the boot memory 119, which requires a faster reading speed than the NAND flash memory 102, so that the supply of operating power to the display CPU 72 is started. In this case, or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the display CPU 72 can quickly start the process for initial activation. Therefore, the control in the display CPU 72 can be smoothly started as compared with the configuration in which the program data for initial activation is stored in the NAND flash memory 102.

Further, the data whose logical addresses are continuous with respect to the data designated as the transfer target by the display CPU 72 is set as the data related to the predictive transfer, and one page of data is transferred from the cache memory 117 to the transfer target RAM. Data related to the predicted transfer is pre-transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the cache memory 117 using the period. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time required for data transfer of pages having consecutive logical addresses. Then, the display CPU 72 reads out the program data transferred in advance to the work RAM 73 and executes the processing, and the VDP 76 reads out the image data transferred in advance to the VRAM 75 and executes the processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the data transfer waiting time from occurring, and the respective processes can be smoothly advanced.

The NAND flash memory 102 and the boot memory 119 are packaged as a memory module 74 in one package, and the controller CPU 113 manages data reading from the memories 103 and 119. As a result, the display CPU 72 may send an addressing command to the controller CPU 113 regardless of whether the data transfer is performed from the NAND flash memory 102 or the boot memory 119. This simplifies the configuration of the signal path related to the transmission of the command. Further, in the memory module 74, the portions that receive the commands from the display CPU 72 are concentrated in the I/F 111, so that the configuration of the signal path can be simplified also from this point.

Incidentally, the NAND flash memory 102 needs to input a write command signal to the WE terminal when reading data, but the controller 101 pulls up the HWE (HOST WRITE ENABLE) terminal to which the write command signal is input from the outside. However, since the FWE (FLASH WRITE ENABLE) terminal of the controller 101 is connected to the WE terminal of the NAND flash memory 102, it is possible to prevent a substantial write command signal from being input from the outside of the controller 101, and A pseudo write command signal is input to the flash memory 102. Therefore, it is possible to favorably read the data from the NAND flash memory 102, while preventing unauthorized modification of the data of the NAND flash memory 102.

<Development Buffer 81 of Work RAM 73 and VRAM 75>
Next, the expansion buffer 81 of the work RAM 73 and the VRAM 75 to which data is transferred in advance from the memory module 74 will be described.

First, the work RAM 73 will be described.

In the work RAM 73, as shown in FIG. 4, the data to be transferred to the work RAM 73 is supplied to the work RAM 73 while the situation in which the transferred data may be used even after the use is continued. A regular area 73a for storing and holding while the supply is continued, and a changing area 73b to be overwritten when transferring other data after use are provided.

Program data necessary for advancing main processing, V interruption processing, command interruption processing, and the like, which will be described later, are written in the regular area 73a. By providing the common area 73a, it is possible to smoothly start the main process, the V interrupt process, the command interrupt process, and the like that are repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals.

When it becomes necessary to temporarily store data that exceeds the storage capacity of the changing area 73b, all or part of the data in the regular area 73a is stored within a range that does not hinder the smooth execution of processing in the display CPU 72. It may be configured to be temporarily erased. In this case, it is necessary for the data to be returned to the common area 73a by the start of the corresponding process.

Program data necessary for executing a subroutine activated as needed in each of these processes is written in the change area 73b. Further, program data necessary for a subroutine to be executed next may be transferred to the changing area 73b while the predetermined subroutine is being executed. It is done so as not to erase. By providing the changing area 73b as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the work RAM 73 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 74.

Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main controller 50, the work RAM 73 is not supplied with backup power. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the work RAM 73 is erased or destroyed.

Next, the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 will be described.

To the expansion buffer 81, concretely, the power supply to itself is continued while the transferred image data may be used even after being used once. During use, a regular area 81a for storing and holding and a changing area 81b that is overwritten when other image data is transferred after use are provided.

In the regular area 81a, background data and symbol sprite data used when starting variable display of symbols on the symbol display device 31 are written, and an abnormality notification image is displayed when a predetermined fraud or abnormality is detected. Abnormality notification data used when displaying is written. By providing the common area 81a, even if a drawing instruction is suddenly issued from the display CPU 72, the VDP 76 can perform good drawing of an image corresponding to the drawing instruction by accessing the common area 81a. it can.

When it becomes necessary to temporarily store image data that exceeds the storage capacity of the change area 81b, the entire or one area of the regular area 81a may be included within a range that does not hinder the smooth image display on the symbol display device 31. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the data of the copy is temporarily erased. In this case, the restoration of the image data to the common area 81a needs to be performed by the drawing timing of the corresponding image.

In the change area 81b, effect sprite data such as effect characters and moving image data are written. Further, the image data necessary for the next effect may be transferred to the change area 81b while the predetermined effect is being executed, but the transfer erases the image data necessary for the effect being executed. Not done. By providing the changing area 81b as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in the configuration in which the storage capacity of the expansion buffer 81 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 74.

Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main controller 50, backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 75. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the VRAM 75 until then is erased or destroyed.

<Basic processing in display CPU 72>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 72 will be described.

<Main processing>
First, the main processing that is started when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 72 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the main processing.

In the main process, first, in step S201, an initial setting process is executed. In the initial setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 10, first, in step S301, a boot data transfer request is issued to the memory module 74. Here, although the processing is performed by the operation of the initial transmission circuit of the display CPU 72 as described above, it is shown in the processing flow for convenience of description. An address indicating the boot memory 119 may be written in an area first referred to in the address map of the display CPU 72, and an address designation command may be transmitted to the memory module 74 based on the information.

Then, in step S302, it is determined whether or not the reading of the boot data is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the reading is completed. When the reading of the boot data is completed, the initialization process is executed in step S303. As the initialization process, the registers of the display CPU 72, the register 92 of the VDP 76, the work RAM 73, and the VRAM 75 are initialized.

In subsequent step S304, a transfer of the latter half data for initial setting is requested. In other words, the program data for initial setting consists of the data for initial startup that constitutes the first half of the data, and the data for the latter half that follows it, and the data for initial startup is set in the boot data. There is. Then, in the data for initial activation, a read instruction of the latter half data is set. In this way, by storing only the data from the beginning to the middle of the initial setting program data as boot data in the boot memory 119 in advance, it is possible to suppress the amount of data to be stored in the boot memory 119. Accordingly, the storage capacity of the boot memory 119 can be suppressed.

By the way, if the entire initial setting program data is regarded as boot data, the data stored in advance in the boot memory 119 can be regarded as initial program data, and the latter half data is referred to as second program data. I can see it.

In a succeeding step S305, an initial adjustment process of the scaler 97 is executed. In the initial adjustment processing, when the image signal is output based on the drawing data created in each of the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75, the image signal is output corresponding to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a. As described above, the resolution initial adjustment command (resolution initial adjustment information) is transmitted to the VDP 76. This initial adjustment value is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is included in the boot data as a resolution initial adjustment command.

By transmitting the command for initial resolution adjustment to the VDP 76, numerical information corresponding to the initial adjustment value is stored in the area for resolution adjustment of the scaler 97 in the register 92 of the VDP 76. Thereby, when the image signal is output from the VDP 76 to the symbol display device 31, the image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output in a state adjusted to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a.

In a succeeding step S306, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the latter half data to the change area 73b of the work RAM 73 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. It should be noted that the transfer instruction timing and the data capacity of the latter half of the data are set so that the standby time in step S306 becomes as short as possible or substantially not occur. When the transfer of the latter half data is completed, the process proceeds to step S307.

Incidentally, step S301 is executed on the circuit of the display CPU 72 as described above, the processing of steps S302 to S306 is executed based on the boot data prestored in the boot memory 119, and the processing of steps S307 to S314 is executed. Is executed based on the data in the latter half.

In step S307, a transfer request for initial image data is issued to the memory module 74. Here, the initial image data is the minimum image data for displaying an image related to the system test on the symbol display device 31, and performs variable display of symbols on the display screen G before a predetermined background image. The data capacity is set smaller than the image data necessary for displaying the demo image and the image data necessary for displaying the demo image.

Further, the image related to the system test is an image for confirming that the symbol display device 31 is normal at a manufacturing factory of the pachinko machine 10 or a game hall, for example, an image of a solid red color on the entire surface of the display screen G. Is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an image in which a plurality of colors are classified and displayed, or an image in which the manufacturer name and model name of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. The memory module 74 receives the addressing command corresponding to the initial image data from the display CPU 72, and thereby starts the transfer of the initial image data to the change area 81b in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

In the following step S308, the display mode is initialized. Although a detailed description will be given later, the present pachinko machine is set with a plurality of display modes (specifically, two types) having background images having different basic colors, and a predetermined one of the plurality of display modes is set. Performs the process of initializing the display mode.

In a succeeding step S309, a ground color initial adjustment process is executed. In the initial adjustment process, the ground color initial adjustment command (ground color initial adjustment) is applied to the VDP so that the numerical information set as the initial value in the unit area of each frame area 82a, 82b of the VRAM 75 becomes the initial numerical information. Information). This initial numerical value information is adjusted in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is included in the latter half data as a ground color initial adjustment command.

When the ground color initial adjustment command is transmitted to the VDP 76, the initial numerical value information is stored in the ground color adjustment area in the register 92 of the VDP 76. As a result, the background color is displayed at the dots corresponding to the unit areas for which the initial numerical value information was not updated when the drawing data was created. The initial background color is set to blue in the pachinko machine 10. As described above, 256 colors can be set for blue, and the ground color is set to the lighter color. This makes it easier for the administrator to find missing dots.

Note that the color is not limited to light blue, and may be set to dark blue. Further, the ground color is not limited to blue, but may be any color, and may be white, for example, whose RGB values are all set to the bright side. Even in this case, dot drop can be easily confirmed.

Then, in step S310, a background color display process, which is a process for displaying the background color on the display screen G, is executed. The process will be described later.

In a succeeding step S311, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the initial image data to the VRAM 75 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. Even if the transfer of the initial image data is completed, the background color display process is repeatedly executed over the predetermined period so that the background color is displayed over the predetermined period. May be When the transfer of the initial image data is completed, the process proceeds to step S312.

In step S312, a transfer request for the regular program data is issued to the memory module 74. As described above, the regular program data includes the program data necessary for advancing the processing after step S201 and various interrupt processing in the main processing. The memory module 74 receives the addressing command corresponding to the regular program data from the display CPU 72 to start the transfer of the regular program data to the regular area 73a of the work RAM 73.

In a succeeding step S313, a task process for the initial image is executed. In the task process, a process of grasping various parameters necessary for instructing the VDP 76 to display the initial image is executed. As various parameters, specifically, the address information of the area to which the initial image data is transferred in the VRAM 75, the information of the frame regions 82a and 82b of the target for which the drawing data is to be created using the initial image data, the frame region of the target of creation. 82a and 82b include information on coordinates when writing the initial image data, information on scale when writing the initial image data, and information on uniform α value (semitransparent value) when writing the initial image data. There is.

In a succeeding step S314, a drawing list is created as drawing instruction information including information corresponding to the processing result of the task processing in the step S313, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. The VDP 76 creates drawing data corresponding to the initial image in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b according to the drawing list, and further outputs an image signal to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data. As a result, the display of the initial image is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. The display of the initial image is continued until a new drawing list is transmitted from the display CPU 72 and the image is updated by the VDP 76. By displaying the initial image in this manner, the display of the image on the display screen G is started at an earlier timing than the configuration in which no image is displayed on the display screen G until the display of the game image is started. can do.

In a succeeding step S315, it is determined whether or not the transfer of the regular program data to the work RAM 73 is completed, and the determination process is repeated until the transfer is completed. The transfer instruction timing and the data capacity of the regular program data are set so that the standby time in step S315 is as short as possible or substantially not generated. When the transfer of the regular program data is completed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S316, a transfer request for the regular image data is issued to the memory module 74. After that, the initial setting process ends. As described above, the regular image data includes background data and symbol sprite data used when starting variable display of symbols on the symbol display device 31. Further, it includes abnormality notification data used when an abnormality notification image is displayed when a predetermined fraud or abnormality is detected. The memory module 74 receives the addressing command corresponding to the regular image data from the display CPU 72, and thereby starts the transfer of the regular image data to the regular area 81a of the expansion buffer 81.

Here, when the main process is started in the display CPU 72 by executing the initial setting process as described above, (1) boot program data including the boot data and the latter half data, ( The 2) initial image data, (3) regular program data, and (4) regular image data are transferred from the memory module 74. In this case, the data is transferred in the order of (1)→(2)→(3)→(4). Further, the processing of step S302, step S306, step S311 and step S315 is executed, so that the transfer timing of each data does not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to favorably transfer the above-mentioned respective data.

Returning to the explanation of the main processing (FIG. 9), after executing the initial setting processing in step S201, various interrupts are permitted in step S202. This allows the display CPU 72 to execute command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. After that, in the main process, the process of step S202 is repeated.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process will be described.

The command interruption process is a process that is activated with the highest priority when a strobe signal is received from the sound emission control device 60, whatever the process is being executed at that time. In the command interrupt processing, the command received at the input port 77 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the change area 73b of the work RAM 73, and a flag indicating that a command has been newly received is transferred to the corresponding area. set. After that, the command interrupt process is terminated, and the process before the activation of the command interrupt process is restored.

Note that the process of confirming a command is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, instead of confirming whether or not a strobe signal is received, the input port 77 is regularly monitored, and the command reception is performed as the monitoring result. When it is confirmed, the configuration may be such that it is transferred to the command buffer.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly activated in a predetermined cycle, specifically, a 20 msec cycle.

When outputting the image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 31, the VDP 76 starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner portion of the display screen G, and on the horizontal line including the dot at one end. The image signals are sequentially output to the aligned dots, and the image signals are sequentially output to the dots from left to right for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display screen G. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, and causes the display CPU 72 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started.

In the V interrupt process, first, in step S401, a command analysis process is executed. Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 73 are analyzed. In a succeeding step S402, it is determined whether or not a new command is received based on the analysis result of the step S401. If a new command has been received, command corresponding processing is executed in step S403.

In the command handling process, the data table for executing the program corresponding to the received command is grasped. The data table is defined as the processing required to display one frame of image at each image update timing when displaying a moving image corresponding to the received command on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. It is an information group.

Here, as the commands that the display CPU 72 receives from the sound emission control device 60, there are a fluctuation pattern command, a symbol designating command, and a notice command, as already described. When these commands are received, the data table necessary for executing the game rendition corresponding to each command on the symbol display device 31 is grasped. Further, there is an end command as the command to be received, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for finally stopping the currently playing game rendition effect is grasped. In addition, as the command to be received, there are various commands for jackpot performance, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for executing the jackpot performance is grasped. Further, as the command to be received, there is a command for demo display, and when the command is received, the data table necessary for executing the demo display is grasped. Further, other program data necessary for executing the processing based on the data table that is grasped as necessary is grasped.

Of the data tables necessary for executing the game reproducible effect, the data table necessary for starting the game reproducible effect has already been transferred to the regular area 73a of the work RAM 73 as the regular program data. In addition, the data table necessary to stop the game reproductive effect finally, the data table necessary to start the jackpot effect, and the data table necessary to execute the demo display are also regularly used in the work RAM 73 as regular program data. It has already been transferred to area 73a. Further, other program data necessary for executing the processing based on those data tables has already been transferred to the regular area 73a of the work RAM 73 as regular program data.

After executing the command handling process in step S403, it is determined in step S404 whether or not the pre-transfer of the program data is necessary. The data determined to be necessary here is necessary to execute the processing based on the data table not included in the regular program data among the data tables determined to be necessary in step S403. Other program data.

If it is necessary to transfer the program data in advance, in step S405, the memory module 74 is requested to transfer the necessary program data. The memory module 74 starts the transfer of the program data to the change area 73b of the work RAM 73 by receiving the address designation command corresponding to the program data from the display CPU 72.

That is, when a new command is received, the display CPU 72 determines whether or not new program data needs to be transferred at the timing when the command is analyzed, and if necessary, makes a program data transfer request. Thereby, the pre-transfer of the program data can be started at the earliest possible timing. Incidentally, in this transfer request, not only the logical address in which the program data to be transferred is stored, but also the transfer destination address is specified. In addition, since the data table and program data including the processing of the first timing in executing the processing corresponding to the command are transferred as the normal program data at the time of initial startup, the processing corresponding to that after receiving the command There is no waiting time until it starts.

When a negative determination is made in step S402, a negative determination is made in step S404, or after the processing of step S405 is executed, the process proceeds to step S406. In step S406, pointer update processing is executed. In the pointer update processing, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. As a result, it becomes possible for the display CPU 72 to understand the processing required to display the image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing.

In the following step S407, task processing is executed. In the task processing, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time, the parameters necessary for instructing the VDP 76 to draw are calculated. Details of the task processing will be described later.

In a succeeding step S408, a drawing list output process is executed. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 76 creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to this drawing list. The processing in the VDP 76 will be described in detail later.

In a succeeding step S409, it is determined whether or not program data is being transferred. If the program data is being transferred, this V interrupt processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the program data is not being transferred, it is determined in step S410 whether or not the image data needs to be transferred by referring to the information set as the update timing after the current state in the currently set data table. To determine.

Of the various image data, the image data used when drawing an instruction based on the regular program data is set as regular image data. In other words, as the regular image data, the image data required to start the game reproducible effect, the image data required to start the jackpot effect, and the image data required to execute the demo display are set. .. These image data transfer requests have already been made to the memory module 74 in the initial setting process (FIG. 10), and when the display CPU 72 receives a command, the transfer has been completed.

The configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that at least the processing in step S406 and the subsequent steps are not executed until the transfer of the regular image data is completed. In this case, after the main process (FIG. 9) is started in the display CPU 72 and the initial image is displayed on the symbol display device 31, the initial image is continuously displayed until the transfer of the common image data is completed. Becomes In addition, when transferring the initial image data, the simple pattern data having a data capacity smaller than the total data capacity of the image data necessary for variable display of the pattern is also transferred at the same time, and the transfer of the common image data group is completed. In a situation where the variation pattern command is not received, the variation display may be performed using simple symbols.

The image data that is determined to need to be transferred in step S410 is the image data that is required at the update timing after the current state in the currently set data table, and is not included in the regular image data. Is. If the transfer of the image data is not necessary, this V interrupt processing is ended as it is. If it is necessary to transfer the image data, in step S411, the transfer request of the necessary image data is issued to the memory module 74, and then the V interrupt process is ended. The memory module 74 receives the address designation command corresponding to the image data from the display CPU 72, and thereby starts the transfer of the image data to the change area 81b of the expansion buffer 81.

That is, the display CPU 72 refers to the currently set data table to determine whether or not new image data needs to be transferred, and if necessary, makes a transfer request for the image data, and creates drawing data in the VDP 76. Make sure that the image data has been transferred in advance by the time required for the operation. This allows the VDP 76 to smoothly create drawing data. Incidentally, at the time of this transfer request, not only the logical address where the transfer request target image data is stored, but also the transfer destination address is specified. Further, since the common image data is transferred at the time of initial activation, there is no waiting time from the reception of the command to the start of the display of the corresponding image.

Here, by executing the process of step S409, the transfer of the program data is prioritized over the transfer of the image data. Further, even if the transfer of the program data is prioritized in this way, since the necessity of the transfer of the image data is determined by referring to the data table, even if the transfer is once avoided in step S409. In the subsequent V interrupt processing, the necessity of transfer is determined and the transfer request is executed. As a result, the transfer timings of the program data and the image data can be prevented from overlapping, and the transfer of the program data can be prioritized.

<Basic processing in VDP76>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

In the VDP 76, a process of setting the value of the register 92 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 72, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72, And the process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I/F 95 for the display CPU 72. The process of creating drawing data is repeatedly activated by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). Further, the processing of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the processing, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. 12A to 12C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of the target buffer, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b is to be created, is set for the image of one frame related to the drawing list. There is. Further, in the header information, the presence or absence of decoding designation and the information of the address to which the moving image data to be decoded is transferred are set. Further, various designation information is set in the header information. The contents of various designation information will be described later.

In the drawing list, in addition to the header information described above, a plurality of types of image data used to display an image for one frame are set. Furthermore, information on the drawing order of each image data and each image data Parameter information and is set. Specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be serial number information, and the information of the image data to be used is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each number information. Also, parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of each image data.

The drawing order is set such that the individual image to be displayed is positioned so as to be positioned on the back side of the display screen G in the image for one frame, and then the drawing target is set. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as design sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 12A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written into the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b, and then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and the sprite data B is further written. In the image for one frame, the individual images are displayed in the order of the background image, the effect image, and the pattern so as to be on the front side.

Plural kinds of parameters are set in the parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3),.... Regarding the parameter P(1) of the background data, specifically, as shown in FIG. 12B, information on the address of the area where the background data is transferred in the VRAM 75 and the two-dimensional plane when the background data is written Of the frame area 82a, 82b with respect to the coordinate information indicating the position, the rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the two-dimensional plane when the background data is written, and the size set as the initial state of the background data. Information of the scale when writing to, the information of the uniform α value that indicates the overall transparency information (or transparency information) when writing the background data, and whether the α data is applied or not Information and are set. The types of the above parameters are the same for the sprite data A as shown in FIG.

Here, the coordinate information is not set individually for all the pixels that make up the image data, but one coordinate information is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is designated. The VDP 76 can recognize that the information of the designated coordinate is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when the image data is arranged, the one pixel at the center is on the designated coordinate. .. As a result, the information capacity of the coordinate information to be designated for one image data in the display CPU 72 can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to be able to recognize the coordinates of all pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to the central one pixel, and may be a pixel having a corner angle such as an upper left corner or an upper right corner. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as rectangular shapes, it becomes easy for the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to recognize the reference pixel by setting the corner pixel as the reference pixel.

Further, the uniform α value is transparency information applied to all dots of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparency information applied in pixel units of background data and sprite data, and is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance as image data. The α data can have different transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

In the situation where the uniform α value and α data are set as described above, the transparency of the background data and the sprite data may be controlled uniformly for all pixels instead of being finely controlled in pixel units. It is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to deal with uniform α values, and it is also possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying α data.

Drawing processing in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data instructed by the already received drawing list is completed. If the drawing data has been created, it is determined in step S502 whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72. If a new drawing list has been received, in step S503 a corresponding process at the time of reception is executed.

In the response processing at the time of reception, it is grasped from the information of the target buffer included in the drawing list in which frame area 82a, 82b the image for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is to be grasped and grasped. The specified frame area is set as the drawing data creation target. Also, the presence/absence of the decode designation is grasped, and if the decode designation is present, the address to which the moving picture data to be decoded is transferred is grasped, and the moving picture decoder is operated so as to decode the moving picture data. .. Details of this decoding will be described later.

In a succeeding step S504, a content grasping process is executed. In the content grasping process, the type of the image data initially set as the drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameters of the image data are grasped. In the case of sprite data, color palette data is applied to each dot of the bitmap image. In a succeeding step S505, a writing process is executed. In the writing process, based on the grasping result of the contents grasping process in step S504, the image data of the drawing target this time is written in the frame regions 82a and 82b set as the generation targets.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that the drawing data instructed in the already received drawing list is being created, the drawing list counter is updated in step S506. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the image data in the next drawing order. Then, the processing of steps S504 and S505 is performed on the switched image data. That is, the drawing data is created a plurality of times to create the drawing data of the image for one frame designated by one drawing list.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of image data is processed in one drawing process is also possible. It is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each of the processing times, and a configuration in which a different number of image data is processed in each of the processing times of the drawing processing may be used.

When a negative determination is made in step S502 or after the processing of step S505 is executed, it is determined in step S507 whether or not the image signal output for one frame is completed in the display circuit 94. If it is not completed, the main drawing process is ended as it is, and if it is completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72, and then the main drawing process is ended.

The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec cycle. Further, the image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data, but since the double buffer method is adopted as already described, the output of the image signal is the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data for one frame after that frame. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame regions 82a and 82b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the control unit 91 is switched by the selector circuit. In the above, the frame areas 82a and 82b which are the drawing targets of the drawing data are regulated so as not to be the output targets for outputting the image signal.

<Task processing in display CPU 72>
Next, the task processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described.

As described above, the task process is executed in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11) of the display CPU 72 in order to grasp the information necessary for creating the drawing list. In this case, in the task processing, not only the individual image included in the range of the image for one frame, but also the individual image not included in the range of the image for one frame are controlled.

With reference to FIG. 14, the range of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 that is the calculation target in the display CPU 72 will be described. In FIG. 14, the range defined by the alternate long and short dash line is the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, and the range defined by the alternate long and two short dashes line is the drawing range PL2 for one frame defined in each of the frame regions 82a and 82b. Further, the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 and the drawing range PL2 shown in FIG. 14 schematically show the data configuration for the calculation in the display CPU 72.

As shown in FIG. 14, the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 and the drawing range PL2 for one frame are both defined as a rectangular shape, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is defined such that the virtual area defined is larger than the drawing range PL2 for one frame, and the range is defined to include the entire drawing range PL2 for one frame. Has been done. This size is set to a size that allows a plurality of drawing ranges PL2 for one frame to be arranged in both the vertical and horizontal directions.

In the display CPU 72, the individual image is calculated with the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 as the calculation target range, and the reference coordinates are set as the position reference in the calculation. The reference coordinate is arbitrary as long as it is defined as one dot among the dots included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, but in the pachinko machine 10, the drawing range PL2 for one frame is arranged at the initial setting position. In this state, the dots are defined as dots in the upper left corner of the drawing range PL2. The initial setting position is a position where the drawing range PL2 for one frame is arranged at the center of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1.

Since the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set as described above, the display CPU 72 does not include the image for one frame, but the individual image is included in the image for one frame at the subsequent update timing. It is possible to start the calculation in advance for. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, by using the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, it is possible to execute an effect in which the viewpoint is switched based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 by the player. That is, the position of the drawing range PL2 for one frame can be displaced from the initial setting position in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. The calculation for performing this effect is executed by the task processing of the display CPU 72.

Hereinafter, the task processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not it is a viewpoint switchable period. The viewpoint switchable period is set, for example, as a period from the start of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 31 to the stop of variable display of symbols in the first symbol row Z1 or the next symbol row Z2. May be set as the period during which the notice display is being displayed on the symbol display device 31, or may be set as the period during which the reach display is being performed on the symbol display device 31, the symbol display device 31 may be set as a period during which a specific reach effect is being performed, or may be set as a period during which the jackpot effect is being performed at the symbol display device 31. In addition, information on whether or not the viewpoint can be switched is set in the data table.

If it is the viewpoint switchable period, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the viewpoint is in the switchable state. The viewpoint switching state refers to a state in which the drawing range PL2 for one frame is set to a position different from the initial setting position, and the viewpoint switching flag is set in the work RAM 73 when the viewpoint is switched. As a result, the viewpoint switching state is set, and when the drawing range PL2 returns to the initial setting position, the flag is erased and the viewpoint switching state is released.

If it is not in the viewpoint switching state, it is determined in step S603 whether or not there is a viewpoint switching instruction. Presence/absence of the viewpoint switching instruction is determined by determining whether or not an operation generation command has been received from the voice emission control device 60.

Here, as described above, the operation generation command is transmitted based on the operation of the operation device 48 for effect, and further, in correspondence with the setting of a plurality of positions at which viewpoint switching is possible, The operation generation command includes information on the position of the switching target. Whether or not the operation generation command is received is determined in step S402 of the V interrupt process (FIG. 11). If the operation generation command is received, it is determined in step S403 that the operation generation command is received. The flag shown is set in the work RAM 73, and information corresponding to the type of operation generation command is set in the work RAM 73.

If there is a viewpoint switching instruction, a coordinate changing process of the drawing range PL2 is executed in step S604. In the coordinate changing process, it is determined which coordinate the information included in the operation generation command corresponding to the current switching instruction is the instruction to change, and the drawing range PL2 is moved to the coordinate corresponding to the instruction. The coordinate information of the drawing range PL2 is updated so that In addition, the viewpoint switching state is set in the coordinate changing process.

On the other hand, if the viewpoint has already been switched (step S602: NO), it is determined in step S605 whether the cancellation condition is satisfied. Whether or not the release condition is satisfied is determined by determining whether or not the operation release command is received from the voice emission control device 60. The specific processing configuration for determining whether or not the operation release command has been received is the same as that for the operation generation command.

If the cancellation condition is satisfied, then in step S606, a drawing range restoration process is executed. In the return processing, the coordinate information of the drawing range PL2 is updated so that the drawing range PL2 returns to the initial setting position. Further, the viewpoint switching state is canceled in the return processing. In addition, also when it determines with it not being a viewpoint switchable period (step S601: NO), the process of step S606 is performed. However, when the drawing range PL2 has already returned to the initial setting position, the process of step S606 may be skipped.

If a negative determination is made in step S603, the process of step S604 is executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S605, or after the process of step S606 is executed, the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not the individual image to be controlled is present. The individual image to be controlled is shown in the currently set data table, and is set in association with the positions of the plural types of drawing ranges PL2 during the viewpoint switching period. Further, the individual images to be controlled are not all the individual images that can be arranged on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, but the currently set drawing range PL2 and the specified number of dots vertically and horizontally from the drawing range PL2. Individual images included in the outer range and not yet set as control targets are extracted.

When the control start target individual image exists, it is determined in step S608 whether there are a plurality of control start target individual images. If a plurality of individual images do not exist, the single individual image is recognized as the control start target, and the process proceeds to step S612 without executing the processes of steps S609 to S611.

When there are a plurality of images (step S608: YES), in step S609, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image of the control start target that is included in the currently set drawing range PL2. To determine. That is, in the configuration in which the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 is set in the display CPU 72 as described above, and individual images outside the currently set drawing range PL2 can also be set as control targets, individual control start targets can be set. Since the image includes not only the image within the drawing range PL2 but also the image outside the drawing range PL2, it is determined in step S609 which one the image corresponds to. By the way, the coordinates of the control start position of the individual image included in the control start target are set in the currently set data table, and the coordinates of this control start position and the currently set coordinates of the drawing range PL2 are set. By referring to, the relative position of the individual image included in the control start target with respect to the drawing range PL2 is grasped.

When there is a control start target individual image at least a part of which is included in the drawing range PL2, the individual image is grasped as the current control start target in step S610. In this case, when a plurality of individual images to be controlled start are included in the drawing range PL2, all of them are grasped as controlled start targets. However, the configuration is not limited to this configuration, and the individual image is outside the drawing range PL2 so that a situation in which there are a plurality of individual images to be controlled within the drawing range PL2 in one processing of the task processing does not occur. It may be configured to be set as a control start target in a processing cycle in which the processing load is low and the processing load is low.

On the other hand, when the individual image of the control start target is not included in the drawing range PL2, it means that there are a plurality of control start targets outside the drawing range PL2. In this case, in step S611, among the individual images outside the drawing range PL2, the individual image closer to the currently set drawing range PL2 is grasped as the control start target.

Incidentally, as a result of the processing in step S610 or step S611, the individual image whose control start timing has been postponed is grasped as the control start target in the subsequent processing times. In this case, when the individual image displayed as if moving in the predetermined direction at each image update timing is postponed, the control start time parameter of the individual image including the control start position corresponds to one update timing. It is updated on the data table so that it is in the advanced state. As a result, even if the control start timing is postponed, the individual image is displayed at a predetermined position and state at a predetermined timing.

When a negative determination is made in step S608, or after the processing of either step S610 or step S611 is executed, the control start processing of steps S612 to S614 is executed. In the control start process, first, in step S612, the work RAM 73 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and a pair of the individual images grasped as the control start targets are searched. A free buffer area is secured so that 1 corresponds.

In the following step S613, the initialization process is executed for all the empty buffer areas secured in step S612. In a succeeding step S614, a parameter for starting control according to an individual image is set in the empty buffer area initialized in step S613. The parameters for starting the control include the position, rotation angle, and size of the target individual image on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1. When there are a plurality of individual images that are grasped as the control start target, the control start parameter is set individually for each free buffer area corresponding to each individual image.

When the negative determination is made in step S607 or after the processing of step S614 is executed, the control update processing of steps S615 to S618 is executed. In the control update processing, first, in step S615, background calculation processing is executed. In the background arithmetic processing, the control update target of this time is grasped from the still image for the backmost that constitutes the background image and the background sprite. Further, with respect to the grasped control update target, various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates on the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data designation are calculated and derived. Then, the various parameters thus derived are written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with each individual image, thereby updating the control information.

In a succeeding step S616, effect calculation processing is executed. In the production calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped among the production sprites that form the images of the productions to be displayed in various productions such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot production. Further, the various parameters described above are derived with respect to the grasped control update target. Then, the various parameters thus derived are written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with each individual image, thereby updating the control information.

In a succeeding step S617, symbol calculation processing is executed. In the symbol calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped among the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner at each game time. Further, the various parameters described above are derived with respect to the grasped control update target. Then, the various parameters thus derived are written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with each individual image, thereby updating the control information.

By the way, in each processing of steps S615 to S617, animation data set to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time the image update timing is reached is used. This animation data is defined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance and is transferred in advance to the work RAM 73 by the time the display CPU 72 needs to read the data.

After that, in step S618, the process of grasping the drawing instruction target is executed, and then this task process is ended. In the process of recognizing the drawing instruction target, among the individual images that have been subject to the control update by the processes of steps S615 to S617, the individual image included in the image for one frame related to the current drawing data creation instruction is displayed. Perform the process of grasping.

The grasping is performed by referring to the information of the currently set drawing range PL2 and the information of the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale of various individual images, and executing a predetermined calculation. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. As described above, the individual images specified in the drawing list are not all the individual images for which control has been started, but only the individual images to be displayed, so that it is necessary to select the individual images to be displayed in the VDP 76. There is no need to uselessly perform drawing processing for individual images that are not display targets even if they are not sorted. As a result, the processing load on the VDP 76 can be reduced.

As described above, for the individual image that is the control start target, “search for empty buffer area” in step S612, “initialize reserved buffer area” in step S613, and “set parameter for starting control” in step S614. And any of the "variable parameter update procedure" of steps S615 to S617 is executed, while for the individual images only for control update, any of "various parameter updates" of steps S615 to S617. Only the renewal procedure is executed. Therefore, the processing load of the individual image that is the control start target is larger than that of the individual image that is the control update target only. The process of step S614 may not be executed, and the process for replacing the individual image for which control is started may be executed in any of steps S615 to S617.

Here, as described above, it is necessary to update the image at a cycle of 20 msec, and this image update is performed by transmitting the drawing list created based on the processing result of the task processing to the VDP 76. Then, the task process takes 20 msec to create a drawing list and receive it by the VDP 76, and to create drawing data corresponding to one frame image based on the drawing list. Must be completed in a shorter period than the period minus. Under such circumstances, the processing for control start has a larger processing load than the processing for control update as described above. Therefore, if a large number of individual images to be controlled start exist in one processing, the completion of the task processing will not be completed. There is a possibility that processing will be missed in time. On the other hand, since the processing of steps S608 to S611 is executed and the control start timings are distributed so that a large number of individual images to be controlled do not exist in one processing, the above-mentioned processing omission occurs. It does not occur.

Although detailed description is omitted, the individual image once controlled is not displayed within a predetermined number of frames such as a position outside the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1. Is excluded from the control target. When it becomes necessary to control the individual image again, the control starting process is executed again.

Next, how each individual image becomes a control target in the task processing will be described with reference to FIG. 16(a) and 16(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a state in which each individual image is a control target, and FIG. 16(a) shows a case where viewpoint switching is not performed, and FIG. ) Indicates a case where viewpoint switching is performed.

When the viewpoint switching is not performed, the drawing range PL2 is fixed as shown in FIG. In this case, since the individual images PC1 to PC3 included in the drawing range PL2 are subject to control start at a timing before the timing shown in FIG. 16A, only the control update processing is executed.

On the other hand, since the individual image PC4 and the individual image PC5 which are outside the drawing range PL2 but are included in the control target range PL3 are not yet control targets, these individual image PC4 and individual image PC5 are included in the control start target. Will be done. However, if the processing load increases when the control start processing is performed on both individual images PC4 and PC5, the control start processing is preferentially performed on the individual image PC4 close to the drawing range PL2, The control start processing for the image PC 5 is performed in the next task processing. The individual image PC6 and the individual image PC7, which are included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 but outside the control target range PL3, are not included in the control start target, and the control start process is not executed.

When there are a plurality of individual targets outside the drawing range PL2 as control start targets, the control start process is executed with priority from the side closer to the drawing range PL2. As a result, in the configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed, the frequency at which the control start processing is executed at the timing when at least a part of the drawing range PL2 is included is reduced.

When viewpoint switching is performed, as shown in FIG. 16B, in the previous task processing, the drawing range PL2 was at the first position divided by the alternate long and two short dashes line, whereas in this task By the processing, the drawing range PL2 is displaced to the second position defined by the solid line. In this case, a part of the drawing range PL2 at the second position is included in the drawing range PL2 at the first position, and accordingly, the individual image PC8 becomes the first at the time of the previous task processing. Since at least a part of the drawing range PL2 at the position of is included, it is already controlled. Therefore, in this task processing, it is not necessary to execute the control start processing for the individual image PC8.

On the other hand, since the individual image PC9 and the individual image PC10 are newly included in the drawing range PL2 displaced to the second position, the control start process is given priority over both the individual image PC9 and the individual image PC10. Is executed and is controlled. In this case, the individual image PC11 is newly included in the control target range with respect to the drawing range PL2 at the second position, but the control start process is executed with priority for each of the individual images PC9 and PC10. , This time, it is excluded from the control start target.

Even if the control start timing is distributed, when the control start processing needs to be executed for the individual images included in the drawing range PL2, that is, included in the image for one frame, the control start processing is It is prioritized and never delayed. As a result, the inconvenience that an individual image that should originally be included in the image for one frame is not included does not occur.

In particular, in a configuration in which an effect is switched such that the viewpoint is switched when the player operates the operation device 48 for effect, an individual image that has not been an object of control until then may suddenly become an object of control. It can happen. On the other hand, as described above, the control start processing is executed with priority for the individual image included in the image for one frame, so that the viewpoint switching effect can be produced without causing the above inconvenience. Can perform well.

The configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed as described above may be applied to the configuration in which all the individual images included in the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 are subject to control start in the display CPU 72. In this case, the individual images included in the drawing range are given the highest priority as the control start target, and the individual images in the entire range are set as the control start target while giving priority to the side closer to the drawing range next. Thus, it is possible to start the control in advance for individual images in a wider range than that of the above configuration while satisfactorily distributing the control start timing.

However, in this configuration, the number of individual images to be controlled and updated in the display CPU 72 is greater than that in the above-described configuration, and thus the processing load of the processing for control and updating at each processing time is increased. In order to reduce the processing load of the processing for control updating, it is preferable that a part of the virtual two-dimensional plane PL1 be set as a control start target as in the above-described configuration.

Moreover, the switching destination of the drawing range may be predetermined. In this configuration, the control start processing of the individual image to be included in the drawing range of the switching destination may be performed in advance at a timing before the switching becomes possible or at a timing before that. .. As a result, even if the drawing range is switched at an arbitrary timing, it can be dealt with.

Further, the configuration in which the control start timing is dispersed as described above may be applied to the configuration in which the drawing range is not switched. In this case, the presence/absence of the control start target may be determined based on the fixed drawing range, so that the processing configuration for performing the confirmation can be simplified. In the present configuration, as the individual image to be the control start target at the timing of being displayed on the display screen G, for example, an individual image displayed so as to move in the depth direction of the display screen G can be considered.

Further, the configuration in which the control start timings are dispersed as described above may be applied to a configuration in which the display mode of the background image, the design, etc. is changed based on the operation of the operation device for production 48 or the like. Even in this case, it is possible to favorably disperse the control start timing.

<Structure for displaying scroll background image>
Next, a configuration for displaying the scroll background image will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10, a scroll background image is set as a kind of background image. The scroll background image is a background image displayed so as to scroll and change in a predetermined direction, specifically, a horizontal direction with the passage of time. The scroll background image is set to have a background image for a plurality of frames in the scroll direction. Further, the scroll background image has a start point portion and an end point portion, but is set so that the image of the start point portion has continuity with the image of the end point portion. When the scroll background image reaches the end point portion as a result of the scroll display, the start point portion is displayed continuously to the end point portion. That is, the scroll background image is repeatedly displayed in a circular manner.

Background data PD1 for scroll is set as image data for displaying a scroll background image. The scroll background data PD1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the scroll background data PD1.

The scroll background data PD1 is still image data. As shown in FIG. 17A, the vertical size is set to one frame or larger, and the horizontal size, which is the scroll direction, is set. , Are set so as to correspond to a plurality of frames. The scroll background data PD1 is not set as one image data but set as an aggregate of a plurality of divided part data PD2 to PD10. The divided part data PD2 to PD10 are set so as to divide the scroll background data PD1 in the scroll direction, and the scroll background data PD1 is configured by arranging the scroll background data PD1 in the scroll direction.

The contents of the images set in the divided part data PD2 to PD10 are different from each other. However, the divided part data adjacent in the scroll direction is set so that the content of the image has continuity in the scroll direction.

The divided part data PD2 to PD10 are set so that the sizes in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction are the same. In this case, the size in the horizontal direction is set to be smaller than one frame, and in order to form a background image for one frame, it is a part of the divided part data PD2 to PD10, and a plurality of divided part data are set side by side. There is a need to. Specifically, in the case of setting the divided part data with the default size, it is possible to form a background image for one frame by arranging two or three divided part data in the horizontal direction. The size is set. The background image for one frame may be formed by always arranging three divided part data or by arranging four or more divided part data. It may have a configuration capable of forming an image.

Further, the divided part data adjacent in the scroll direction are set so as to overlap each other at the boundary portion. The divided part data PD5 and PD6 adjacent in the scroll direction will be described as an example.

As shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C, each pixel that constitutes one line in the direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the scroll direction at the end point of the divided part data PD5 on the scroll destination side and the pixels on the rear side of the scroll. Coordinates in the scroll direction are set to be the same as those of pixels forming one line in the direction (vertical direction) orthogonal to the scroll direction at the start point portion of the divided part data PD6 when drawing in the frame regions 82a and 82b. The same data is set in each line. When both divided part data PD5 and PD6 are drawn, the lines overlap each other. That is, the overlapping area PA1 is set at the boundary between the divided part data PD5 and PD6 that are adjacent in the scroll direction.

The effect of setting the overlapping area PA1 will be described with reference to FIG. 18A-1 and 18A-2 show divided part data PD5 and PD6 in which the overlapping area PA1 is set, and in FIGS. 18B-1 and 18B-2, the overlapping area PA1 is set. The divided part data PD5 and PD6 that have not been created are shown.

As shown in FIG. 18(b-1), in the case of divided part data in which the overlapping area PA1 is not set, when both divided part data are enlarged from the default size and drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b, FIG. As shown in b-2), a gap may occur at the boundary between the two divided part data. For example, depending on how to expand the divided part data and how to set the expanded frame areas 82a and 82b, if the overlapping area PA1 is not set, dots for which data is not set between the adjacent divided part data may appear. It is possible that it will exist. In this case, the background color is set to the dot, and the boundary portion is visually noticeable, which is not preferable.

Further, for example, when enlarging the divided part data, the above-mentioned phenomenon occurs due to the content of the linear interpolation executed when each pixel of the enlarged divided part data is associated with each dot of the frame areas 82a and 82b. .. Then, the data of the edge portion of the divided part data is enlarged and set to the dots in the gap portion as described above. This is not preferable because the boundary portion is visually noticeable.

On the other hand, in the divided part data PD5 and PD6 in which the overlapping area PA1 is set as shown in FIG. 18(a-1), both divided part data PD5 and PD6 are enlarged at the same magnification from the default size. Even if the drawing is performed in the frame areas 82a and 82b, as shown in FIG. 18A-2, there is no gap because the overlapping area PA1 exists at the boundary between the divided part data PD5 and PD6. As a result, it is possible to display an image using the divided part data PD5 and PD6 without causing the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Incidentally, as described above, the effect of not creating a gap due to the existence of the overlapping area PA1 is to draw the divided part data PD5 and PD6 in the frame areas 82a and 82b by reducing the size from the default size by the same magnification. The same applies to the case. Further, in order to more surely prevent the inconvenience that a gap is generated due to the presence of the data of the edge portion after the enlargement, the divided parts data PD5 and PD6 forming the overlapping area PA1 are arranged on the front side. In order to prevent the data of the edge part of the divided part data (part of the data after expansion of the overlapping area PA1) from being reflected in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the edge part is made completely transparent by using, for example, α data. The data of a portion overlapping the edge portion in the divided part data on the back side may be set to the corresponding dot in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

Further, a portion forming one overlapping area PA1 is a pixel for one line in each of the divided part data PD5 and PD6. As a result, the data capacity allocated to provide the overlapping area PA1 can be suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, the same data is set in the parts forming one overlapping area PA1 in each of the divided part data PD5 and PD6. As a result, when the divided part data PD5 and PD6 are individually enlarged and set in the frame areas 82a and 82b, even if the overlapping parts of the two parts are slightly deviated, the deviated parts are within the same data range. A shift will occur, and even in this case, a good display mode can be obtained.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying the scroll background image will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for the scroll background executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for the scroll background is executed by the background calculation processing in step S615 in the task processing (FIG. 15). Further, the calculation processing for the scroll background is started when information about the scroll background is set in the currently set data table.

First, in step S701, the scroll position information is updated. The scroll position information is information for specifying which area in the scroll background image is displayed on the display screen G. The scroll position information is determined by the numerical information of the scroll counter provided in the work RAM 73. A large number of frame portions included in the scroll background image have a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical value of the scroll position information. In step S701, the numerical information of the scroll counter is updated so that 1 is added.

In the following step S702, the scale of the background image this time is grasped. In subsequent step S703, the divided part data included in the display range is grasped by referring to the scroll position information updated in step S701 and the scale grasped in step S702. In this case, at least two pieces of divided part data are grasped. By the way, the process for starting control for these divided parts data has already been completed.

In the following step S704, the coordinate of the divided part data on the scroll destination side of the divided part data grasped in step S703 is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived coordinate is corresponded to the divided part data in the work RAM 73. Then, the control information is updated by writing in the secured area.

In a succeeding step S705, as coordinates of the next divided part data, coordinates for generating an overlapping area with respect to the adjacent divided part data on the scroll destination side are calculated and derived, and information of the derived coordinates is stored in the work RAM 73. In, the information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the divided part data.

In a succeeding step S706, it is determined whether or not the coordinates are grasped for all the divided part data grasped in the step S703. If there is unidentified divided part data, the process of step S705 is executed for the divided part data. If there is no unrecognized divided part data, the process proceeds to step S707.

In step S707, the parameter information other than the size and coordinates is updated for the divided part data acquired in step S703. After that, in step S708, the scroll background designating information is stored, and then the present arithmetic processing ends.

When the above process is executed, the divided part data grasped in step S703 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408). Also, scroll background designation information is set in this drawing list.

Next, the divided part data setting process executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process of the divided part data is executed by the content grasping process of step S504 in the drawing process (FIG. 13). The divided part data setting process is started when the scroll background designation is set in the drawing list.

First, in step S801, the type of the divided part data to be drawn and the address to which the divided part data are transferred are grasped in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. After that, the scale of each divided part data is grasped in step S802, the coordinates of each divided part data are grasped in step S803, and other parameters are grasped in step S804, and then this setting process is ended.

By executing the setting process of the divided part data, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), each of the divided part data is applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn with the above parameters applied. Is drawn. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, so that a background image using each of the divided part data is displayed on the display screen G.

Here, a part of the drawn divided part data is out of the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. For example, as shown in FIG. 17A, in the case where three pieces of divided part data PD2 to PD4 are drawn in a region PL4 for one frame divided by a two-dot chain line, in each divided part data PD2 to PD4. There is a portion protruding from the area PL4 for one frame. In the VDP 76, when drawing image data in the frame areas 82a and 82b, it is not possible to extract only some pixels and draw them. Therefore, although the protruding portion is not written in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the same processing as the processing executed when drawing the protruding portion in the frame areas 82a and 82b is executed for the pixels of the protruding portion. It

As described above, the scroll background data including data for a plurality of frames is stored in advance as a plurality of divided part data, so that the size that can be stored as a single image data in the NAND flash memory 102 is set excessively large. There is no need to do it. Also, if the background data for scrolling is transferred as a single image data, the transfer time will be lengthened, but since it can be transferred in units of divided parts data, the timing of data transfer can be adjusted. It will be easy.

Further, the VDP 76 also executes the drawing process for the portions protruding from the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b in the same manner as for the portions not protruding, but if the scroll background data is used as a single image data, it protrudes. Since there are many places, the processing load increases. On the other hand, by using only the divided part data including at least a part of the frame areas 82a and 82b, the protruding portion can be suppressed and the processing load can be reduced. Further, the display CPU 72 does not derive the parameter information for the divided part data that is not the display target. This reduces the processing load on the display CPU 72.

Further, by setting the divided part data to be small and increasing the amount of divided part data used in each frame, it is possible to suppress the portion protruding from the frame regions 82a and 82b. As a result, the amount of image data for which parameters are calculated increases, and the processing load on the display CPU 72 increases. On the other hand, since the size of each divided part data is set so that the number of divided part data used in each frame is 2-3, the processing load of the display CPU 72 can be suppressed.

The scroll direction is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be the vertical direction or the diagonal direction.

Further, when focusing on the effect that the data capacity of a single image data can be suppressed, a configuration in which a plurality of divided part data is set as image data for displaying a series of images may be indispensable. The divided part data may not have the overlapping area PA1. In this case, if the individual size adjustment of each divided part data is not performed, the possibility that a gap will occur is reduced. Further, even if the size is adjusted, the gap may not exist by adjusting the coordinates when setting the frame areas 82a and 82b.

Further, the overlapping area PA1 may not be composed of pixels of one column but may be composed of pixels of a plurality of columns. In this case, although the data capacity assigned to the overlapping area PA1 increases, it is possible to more reliably prevent the occurrence of the gap. Further, the same data may not be set in the portion forming one overlapping area PA1.

<Structure for displaying displacement background image of small unit group>
Next, a configuration for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10, a displacement background image of a small unit group is set as a kind of background image. The displacement background image of the small unit group is a background image displayed such that a large number of small unit images are displaced in a predetermined direction over time before the rearmost image. An image of a flower flyer is set as the small unit image, but the image is not limited to this, and a rain image or a snow image may be set.

Background data PD11 for the small unit group is set as image data for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group. The small unit group background data PD11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the small unit group background data PD11.

The small unit group background data PD11 is not set as one image data, but is set as an aggregate of a plurality of divided data groups PD12 to PD15 as shown in FIG. Each of these divided data groups PD12 to PD15 has a plurality (for example, four) of divided part data.

The divided data groups PD12 to PD15 have the same number of divided part data, and the order in which the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 are read in order to display an image for one frame is predetermined. That is, by arranging the divided part data set as the first order in each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 at the corresponding positions, the displacement background image for one frame is displayed, and the next order is displayed. The displacement background images for the next frame are displayed by arranging the respective divided part data set as “1” at the corresponding positions. Then, this is sequentially performed for each combination in each order.

Data for a plurality of small unit images is set in each divided part data. The set mode of the data for these small unit images is different for each divided part data, and the combination of each divided part data is sequentially selected in the above-mentioned predetermined order. As shown, each of the small unit images is displayed so as to be displaced in a predetermined direction over time.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying the displacement background image of the small unit group will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for the displacement background executed by the display CPU 72. The displacement background calculation process is executed in the background calculation process of step S615 in the task process (FIG. 15).

First, in step S901, the value of the parts counter for specifying the order of the divided parts data corresponding to the current frame is updated. This parts counter is provided in the work RAM 73. In the following step S902, the divided data group to be set is grasped. When grasping this, the target counter provided in the work RAM 73 is referred to.

In the following step S903, the divided part data to be controlled is grasped from the information of the order shown in the parts counter and the information of the divided data group to be shown in the target counter. In a succeeding step S904, the parameter of the divided part data grasped in step S903 is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in the work RAM 73 in an area secured corresponding to the divided part data. Information for

In a succeeding step S905, it is determined whether or not the setting of all the divided part data corresponding to the current order is completed. If the setting has not been completed, the target counter is updated in step S906 to update the setting target to the next divided data group, and then the processing in step S902 and subsequent steps is executed. On the other hand, if the setting is completed, the displacement background designation information is stored in step S907, and then the arithmetic processing for the displacement background is ended.

When the above process is executed, each divided part data corresponding to the current order is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408). Further, displacement background designation information is set in the drawing list. Upon receiving the drawing list, the VDP 76 draws each divided part data in the frame areas 82a and 82b according to the drawing list. Then, the output of the drawing list and the corresponding drawing are repeatedly performed for each frame, so that the animation as shown in FIG. 21B is displayed on the display screen G.

As described above, when displaying an animation for displacing a small unit group, instead of controlling each small unit group as an individual sprite, a plurality of small unit images are sequentially switched to a set still image. Since the configuration is controlled, the processing load of the parameter calculation processing in the display CPU 72 is reduced. Therefore, the displacement background image of the small unit group can be displayed while suppressing the processing load on the display CPU 72.

The number of divided data groups PD12 to PD15 and the number of divided part data assigned to the divided data groups PD12 to PD15 are arbitrary as long as they are plural.

Further, the divided part data may not be assigned to each of the divided data groups PD12 to PD15, and a common divided data group in which a large number of divided part data are set may be provided. In this case, the divided part data may be distributed to each divided position from the common divided data group.

<Addition processing of effect images>
Next, the effect image addition processing will be described with reference to FIG. 23A to 23E are explanatory diagrams for explaining the addition processing of the effect image.

An effect image is an image showing a blast, an image showing water droplets, a luminescent image showing how light is emitted from the light source to the surroundings, and an aura image showing as if the surroundings of the character are illuminating. In addition, it is an image for enhancing the visual effect. Of these effect images, the target to which an image representing a blast, an image representing water droplets, etc. is not limited, but the aura image is applied to a predetermined sprite.

Specifically, the effect data PD17 is set as shown in FIG. 23(b) in correspondence with the sprite data PD16 as shown in FIG. 23(a). The sprite data PD16 includes an image area PA2 to be displayed on the display screen G as an individual image and a frame area PA3 surrounding the periphery of the image area PA2, and is defined as a rectangular shape as a whole. There is. On the other hand, the effect data PD17 is defined along the outer edge of the image area PA2, and the effect area PA4 to be displayed on the display screen G as an effect image and the effect area PA4 to have a rectangular shape as a whole. And a frame area PA5 defining the inside and the outside.

Incidentally, the sprite data PD16 and the corresponding effect data PD17 are defined to have the same size and the same shape at the time of initial setting. In addition, since information of “0”, which is completely transparent information, is set as the α value in the pixels forming the frame areas PA3 and PA5, the pixels are not displayed on the display screen G, and the image area PA2 and The effect area PA4 is a display target on the display screen G. However, the frame areas PA3 and PA5 may be hidden by using dedicated α data. Details of the α data will be described later.

By applying the effect data PD17 to the sprite data PD16, as shown in FIG. 23(c), the effect image CH2 as if the surroundings of the character CH1 are emitting light is generated. .. In this case, the effect image CH2 overlaps a part of the background image in front of it. On the other hand, since the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are individually set, it is possible to display the character CH1 alone.

As described above, the frame areas 82a and 82b in which the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are drawn include a large number of unit areas, and each unit area is set with an area for storing color information. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23(d), in each unit area 121, color information storage areas 121a to 121c each having 1 byte are set in one-to-one correspondence with each color of RGB. , RGB can be set to 256 colors.

The smaller the value of the numerical value information stored in each of the color information storage areas 121a to 121c, the darker the color of RGB is finally displayed, and the minimum value is black. Further, as the value of the numerical information is larger, the color of the lighter degree in RGB is finally displayed, and in the case of the maximum value, white is displayed. It should be noted that the color information storage areas 121a to 121c need only be 1 byte in a configuration capable of displaying only 256 colors instead of the full color system.

On the other hand, for each pixel 122 of the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17, as shown in FIG. 23(e), color information consisting of numerical information is set using a palette table or the like. In this case, the color information set in each of the pixels 122 is not full color but data capable of displaying only 256 colors. However, in order to allow good drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b, each color of RGB can be displayed. In, each is set as information within the range of 1 byte.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the color information storage areas 121a to 121c of each unit area 121 are set with 1 byte instead of 3 bytes, and in the configuration capable of displaying only 256 colors, The color information may also be set in 1 byte.

Further, in addition to the above color information, α value information is set in each pixel 122. Although a storage capacity of 1 byte is secured as the α value information, in practice, numerical information of any one of “0 to 100” in decimal is set. Further, the α value information is numerical information of “0 to 100”, which corresponds to the α value of “0 to 1” and is treated as a value less than 1 in the calculation using the α value.

When the color information of each pixel 122 is drawn in the unit area 121 of the drawing target, the numerical information obtained by accumulating the α value with respect to each numerical information of RGB in each pixel 122 is used for storing the color information in the unit area 121. The areas 121a to 121c are stored in areas corresponding to RGB. In this case, when the α value is set as the opaque information of “1”, the color information of the pixel 122 is overwritten as it is in the corresponding unit area 121. On the other hand, when the α value is less than 1, a predetermined calculation using the α value is executed with the image to be superimposed on the back side of the display screen G, and the calculation result is stored in the unit area 121. Written.

In the case of the effect data PD17, an α value less than 1 is set for all pixels. Specifically, all pixels included in the frame area PA5 are set with complete transparency information having an α value of “0”, and each pixel included in the effect area PA4 is semitransparent with 0<α value<1. Information is set. When the effect data PD17 is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b, an α value is set for the numerical information of each pixel of the effect data PD17 for each unit area 121 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. The accumulated results are added.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying an image using the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for the first effect effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the first effect effect is executed by the effect calculation process of step S616 in the task process (FIG. 15). Further, the calculation process for the first effect effect is activated when the information about the first effect effect is set in the currently set data table.

First, in step S1001, the sprite data PD16 included in the display area is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S1002, the parameters of the sprite data PD16 grasped in the step S1001 are calculated and derived, and information of the derived parameters is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with the sprite data PD16. Information for

In a succeeding step S1003, it is determined whether or not the effect data should be applied based on the currently set data table. If it is not necessary to apply the effect data, this operation processing is ended as it is.

When the arithmetic processing for the first effect effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the sprite data PD16 is a drawing target, and drawing including the parameter information of the sprite data PD16 is executed. A list is created and sent to the VDP 76.

On the other hand, if it is necessary to apply the effect data PD17, the effect data PD17 to be applied this time is grasped in step S1004. In the following step S1005, the same coordinates as the coordinates of the sprite data PD16 to be applied in step S1002 are grasped as the coordinates of the effect data PD17, and the area reserved in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the effect data PD17 is grasped. The information for control is updated by writing.

In the following step S1006, the control information is updated by calculating and deriving the information of the parameters other than the coordinates for the effect data PD17, and writing the derived parameter information in the secured area. In this case, if the size and rotation angle of the sprite data PD16 to be applied have been changed from those at the time of initial setting, the size and rotation angle of the effect data PD17 are adjusted so as to be the same. After that, after storing the effect designation information in step S1007, the present calculation processing is ended.

When the calculation processing for the first effect effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), a drawing list in which both the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are set as drawing targets is created. To be done. Further, the drawing list includes parameter information of each of the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 and effect designation information indicating that the effect data PD17 should be applied. Then, the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76.

Next, the setting process for the first effect effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the first effect effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). In addition, the setting process for the first effect effect is activated when the designation relating to the first effect effect is set in the drawing list.

In step S1101, the current sprite data PD16 shown in the drawing list and the address to which the sprite data PD16 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In the following step S1102, the parameters of the sprite data PD16 are grasped.

In a succeeding step S1103, it is determined whether or not the effect designation information is set in the drawing list in association with the sprite data PD16. If the effect designation information has not been set, this setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect designation information is set, in step S1104, the effect data PD17 to be drawn together with the sprite data PD16 is grasped, and the effect data PD17 is transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM75. Know which address you have. After that, in step S1105, after the parameters of the effect data PD17 are grasped, this setting process is ended.

That is, the effect data PD17 is set in association with the application target sprite data PD16 in the drawing list, and is simultaneously processed in the processing times for processing the application target sprite data PD16. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect data PD17 may be set independently of the application target sprite data PD16 in the drawing list. Even in this case, since the parameters are set for the effect data PD17 alone as described above, it is possible to draw the effect data PD17 in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b.

By the way, since the sprite data PD16 and the effect data PD17 are handled separately, as described above, the same sprite data PD16 can be used to display the character CH1 alone corresponding to the sprite data PD16. At the same time, the character CH1 to which the effect image CH2 is applied can be displayed.

By performing the setting process for the first effect effect, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the sprite data PD16 is applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be rendered with the above parameters applied. And the effect data PD17 are drawn.

Next, the first effect addition processing executed by the VDP 76 when the effect data PD17 is drawn will be described. FIG. 26A is a flowchart showing the first effect addition process, and FIG. 26B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the first effect addition process. The first effect addition process is executed as a part of the writing process executed in step S505 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, the first effect addition processing is activated when the effect data PD17 is set.

First, in step S1201, a target pixel update process is executed. In the process of updating the target pixel, a process for updating the pixel to be rendered this time in the effect data PD17 is executed. Specifically, the pixel update counter set in the register 92 is updated so that the drawing target advances by one pixel.

In the following step S1202, the numerical information stored in the dot (that is, the unit area) in which the current target pixel is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b is read and grasped. In this case, as shown by “r1”, “g1”, and “b1” in FIG. 26(b-1), each numerical value information of RGB is grasped.

In the following step S1203, the numerical information set in the target pixel of this time in the effect data PD17 is grasped. This numerical information is each numerical information as a result of accumulating numerical information of α value with respect to each numerical information of RGB. That is, each numerical value information of RGB is grasped as shown by “α×r2”, “α×g2”, and “α×b2” in FIG. 26(b-2).

In addition, in the integration, an operation is performed so that the α value defined as a decimal value of “0 to 100” functions as “0.00 to 1.00” which is a value of 1 or less, Further, the value is rounded down or rounded off so that the value after the decimal point is not included in the integrated result. The handling of the α value and the handling of numerical values below the decimal point are the same in the following description. Further, the α value is defined as a decimal value of “0 to 10”, and the arithmetic is performed so that the α value functions as “0.0 to 1.0” which is a value of 1 or less. Good.

In subsequent step S1204, the RGB numerical value information acquired in step S1202 and the RGB numerical value information acquired in step S1203 are added. As a result, as shown in FIG. 26B-3, each numerical value information of RGB becomes “r1+α×r2”, “g1+α×g2”, and “b1+α×b2”. In the following step S1205, the RGB numerical value information calculated in step S1204 is written in the current target dot.

Then, in step S1206, it is determined whether or not drawing has been completed for all pixels of the effect data PD17. If not completed, the processes of steps S1201 to S1205 are repeated. If it has been completed, this addition processing is terminated.

By performing the addition process, the effect image CH2 corresponding to the effect data PD17 is reflected in the color information and the degree of brightness of the image (for example, the background image) on which the effect image CH2 is superimposed. Is displayed. As described above, the effect image CH2 is an image that allows the far side, such as light or water droplets, to pass therethrough, and therefore, if the effect image CH2 is displayed independently of the background image, a strange feeling occurs. On the other hand, by performing the addition process as described above, the effect image CH2 is displayed in a state in which the background image is reflected, which is preferable in appearance without causing the above-mentioned discomfort. Become.

The specific process for reflecting the individual image on the back side when the individual image on the front side is displayed is not limited to the addition process, and other calculation process can be performed as long as the reflection can be performed well. May be configured to be executed.

Further, after the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side is set in the frame regions 82a and 82b, the addition process of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side to the frame regions 82a and 82b is executed. Alternatively, the image data resulting from the addition process may be set in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

<Partial addition processing of effect image>
Next, the partial addition processing of the effect image will be described.

As described above, when the effect image is applied, the addition process is executed. However, when the bright image is also overlaid on the bright image, the RGB numerical values in the unit areas of the frame regions 82a and 82b. There is a case where the information becomes the maximum value, and the display is white, which is out of the designer's intention (so-called whiteout). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, partial addition is performed when a predetermined effect image is displayed in order to suppress the occurrence of the above-described blown-out highlights.

Regarding the data structure for performing the partial addition, an effect that is treated independently of the character's sprite data, such as an image showing a blast or an image showing water droplets, will be taken as an example and refer to FIG. While explaining. FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure for performing partial addition.

As shown in FIG. 27(a-1), the effect data PD18 to which the partial addition is applied includes an effect area PA6 which is a target to be displayed on the display screen G as an effect image including a plurality of pixels, and an overall rectangular shape. And a frame area PA7 that defines the periphery of the effect area PA6 so as to have a shape. As described above, each pixel forming the effect area PA6 has color information having numerical information corresponding to each of RGB and information of an α value accumulated with respect to each numerical information of the color information. It is set. In addition, "0" which is the completely transparent information is set as the α value in each pixel forming the frame area PA7.

The partial addition data PD19 is defined so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the effect data PD18 and has the same size and outer shape as the effect data PD18 at the time of initial setting, as shown in FIG. 27(a-2). Is set. The partial addition data PD19 has an effect-corresponding area PA8 defined to have the same shape and the same number of pixels as the effect area PA6 of the effect data PD18, and a perimeter of the effect-corresponding area PA8 to have a rectangular shape as a whole. And a frame corresponding area PA9 that defines

Unlike the effect area PA6 of the effect data PD18, color information is not set in each pixel forming the effect corresponding area PA8, and only the α value information is set. By the way, the α value information set for each pixel is individually set according to the execution target of partial addition, and if there is a pixel for which the same α value information is set for each pixel, There are also pixels for which different α value information is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the α value set for each pixel may be the same.

When partial addition is performed, the partial addition data PD19 is first applied to each dot (that is, each unit area) on which the effect data PD18 is drawn in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b. After that, the effect data PD18 is drawn for each dot. A specific processing configuration for performing the drawing will be described below.

FIG. 27B is a flowchart showing the calculation process for the second effect effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the second effect effect is executed by the effect calculation process of step S616 in the task process (FIG. 15). Further, the calculation process for the second effect effect is activated when the information about the second effect effect is set in the currently set data table.

First, in step S1301, based on the currently set data table, the effect data PD18 to be drawn this time is grasped. In a succeeding step S1302, the parameters of the effect data PD18 grasped in the step S1301 are calculated and derived, and information of the derived parameters is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the effect data PD18. Information for

In a succeeding step S1303, the partial addition data PD19 to be designated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1304, the same coordinates as the coordinates of the effect data PD18 to be applied in step S1302 are grasped as the coordinates of the partial addition data PD19, and the information of the grasped coordinates is stored in the work RAM 73. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the work data PD19.

In the following step S1305, the control information is updated by calculating and deriving the information of the parameters other than the coordinates for the partial addition data PD19 and writing the derived parameter information in the secured area. In this case, if the size and the rotation angle of the application target effect data PD18 have been changed from those at the initial setting, the size and the rotation angle of the partial addition data PD19 are adjusted so as to be the same. .. Then, after the partial addition designation information is stored in step S1306, the present arithmetic processing is terminated.

When the calculation processing for the second effect effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the drawing list in which both the effect data PD18 and the partial addition data PD19 are set as drawing targets Is created. Further, the drawing list includes parameter information of the effect data PD18 and the partial addition data PD19, and partial addition designation information indicating that the partial addition data PD19 should be applied. The created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76.

Next, the setting process for the second effect effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the second effect effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, the setting process for the second effect effect is activated when the partial addition designation is set in the drawing list.

In step S1401, the partial addition data PD19 to be applied this time shown in the drawing list and the address to which the partial addition data PD19 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In the following step S1402, the parameter of the data PD19 for partial addition is grasped.

In a succeeding step S1403, the effect data PD18 to be drawn this time shown in the drawing list and the address to which the effect data PD18 is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. After that, in step S1404, after the parameters of the effect data PD18 are grasped, this setting process is ended.

That is, the partial addition data PD19 is set in association with the effect data PD18 to be applied in the drawing list, and is simultaneously processed in the processing times for processing the effect data PD18 to be applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the partial addition data PD19 may be set independently of the effect data PD18 to be applied in the drawing list. In this case, since the parameter is set only for the partial addition data PD19, if the drawing order is set so that the partial addition data PD19 is processed before the effect data PD18, the partial addition is performed. It is possible to appropriately draw the work data PD19 in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b.

By performing the setting process for the second effect effect, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the partial addition is performed with the above parameters applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. The data PD19 and the effect data PD18 are drawn.

Next, the second effect addition processing executed by the VDP 76 when the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18 are drawn will be described. 29A is a flowchart showing the second effect addition processing, and FIG. 29B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the second effect addition processing. The second effect addition process is executed as a part of the writing process executed in step S505 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, the second effect addition processing is started when the partial addition data PD19 is set.

First, in step S1501, a target pixel update process is executed. In the update process of the target pixel, a process for updating the pixel to be rendered this time in the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18 is executed. Specifically, the pixel update counter set in the register 92 is updated so that the drawing target advances by one pixel.

In the following step S1502, the numerical information stored in the dot (that is, the unit area) in which the current target pixel is drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b is read out and grasped. In this case, as shown by “r3”, “g3”, and “b3” in FIG. 29(b-1), each numerical value information of RGB is grasped.

In the following step S1503, the α value set in the current target pixel in the partial addition data PD19 is grasped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29(b-2), "α1" is set as the α value.

In a succeeding step S1504, the α value grasped in step S1503 is integrated with each RGB numerical value information grasped in step S1502. As a result, as shown in FIG. 29(b-3), each RGB numerical value information corresponding to the integration result becomes “α1×r3”, “α1×g3”, and “α1×b3”.

In the following step S1505, the numerical information set in the target pixel of this time in the effect data PD18 is grasped. This numerical value information is each numerical value information obtained as a result of integrating the numerical value information of the predetermined α value for the pixel with respect to each numerical value information of RGB. That is, as shown in FIG. 29(b-4), each numerical value information of RGB is “α2×r4”, “α2×g4”, “α2×b4”.

In the following step S1506, the RGB numerical value information obtained in step S1505 and the RGB integration result information obtained in step S1504 are added. As a result, as shown in FIG. 29B-6, each numerical value information of RGB becomes “α1×r3+α2×r4”, “α1×g3+α2×g4”, “α1×b3+α2×b4”. In the following step S1507, the RGB numerical value information calculated in step S1506 is written in the current target dot.

After that, in step S1508, it is determined whether or not drawing has been completed for all pixels of the partial addition data PD19 and the effect data PD18. If not completed, the processes of steps S1501 to S1507 are repeated. If it has been completed, this addition processing is terminated.

After the addition processing is executed, the numerical information already stored in the unit area in which the effect data PD18 is drawn is reduced to a value corresponding to the α value of the partial addition data PD19. The numerical value information of the result obtained by adding the numerical value information of the effect data PD18 to the numerical value information of is set. As a result, after drawing the effect data PD18, it is possible to prevent each numerical value information of RGB in the unit area of the frame regions 82a and 82b from reaching the maximum value, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure.

Further, for example, when the numerical value information or the α value of the effect data PD18 is suppressed, the effect image is made to fit the image to be superimposed, and the effect image cannot enhance the visual effect. On the other hand, since the numerical information of the images on the superimposed side is suppressed by the partial addition data PD19, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure while enhancing the effect image.

Also, it is conceivable to set the numerical information of the images to be superposed in a state where the numerical information is originally suppressed. Then, when the image is used without application of the effect image, it corresponds to the numerical information. You are limited to color information. On the other hand, by separately setting the partial addition data PD19 as described above, it is difficult for the restriction on the images on the side of superimposition to occur.

Further, since the partial addition data PD19 is configured such that the numerical information corresponding to the color information is not set and the numerical information corresponding to the α value is set, the data capacity of the partial addition data PD19 is the effect. It is smaller than the data PD18. Therefore, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the storage capacity required in the NAND flash memory 102.

A method other than the method of applying the partial addition data PD19 may be adopted as a method for reducing the ratio of reflecting the individual image on the back side. For example, in the configuration in which the α value of the image data can be manipulated in pixel units in the processing of the VDP 76, the numerical information at the corresponding portion of the individual image on the back side in the processing of the VDP 76 is reduced at a predetermined rate. Good.

In addition, in the individual image on the back side, even a position other than the overlapping portion with the individual image on the front side is affected, but a configuration for setting a uniform α value for partial addition to the individual image on the back side is also possible. Conceivable.

Further, in a configuration in which the limit numerical values of the frame regions 82a and 82b are the darkest and the minimum numerical value is the brightest, in order to reflect the individual image on the back side to the individual image on the front side, instead of the addition processing described above. , Subtraction processing needs to be executed. Further, in order to suppress overexposure, partial subtraction data needs to be applied in place of the partial addition data PD19.

Further, instead of the above configuration, the partial addition data PD19 may have a configuration in which not only the α value but also numerical information corresponding to color information is set. In this case, in step S1503 of the second effect addition process, the α value and the numerical value information of the target pixel in the partial addition data are grasped, and in step S1504, the process of fusion operation is executed instead of the integration process. .. Specifically, when the α value of the partial addition data PD19 is set to α1 and the color information of the partial addition data PD19 is set to “r5, g5, b5”, in step S1504,
R: r3×(1-α1)+r5×α1
G: g3×(1-α1)+g5×α1
B: b3×(1-α1)+b5×α1
The fusion operation is performed.

Then, by performing the processing of step S1505 to step S1507 on the calculation result,
R: r3×(1-α1)+r5×α1+α2×r4
G: g3×(1-α1)+g5×α1+α2×g4
B: b3×(1-α1)+b5×α1+α2×b4
Becomes

Even when using the partial addition data PD19 in which the numerical information corresponding to the color information is set as described above, the timing before the effect data is drawn is executed by executing the processing of the fusion operation. Since the numerical information already stored in is reduced in numerical value, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of whiteout.

<Composite data that combines multiple effect images>
Next, a configuration for creating combined data in which a plurality of effect images are combined will be described.

As described above, a plurality of effect images may be displayed in the image for one frame in order to enhance the visual effect. For example, an image representing a blast and a luminescent image may be displayed at the same time. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 has a function of separately storing each effect data originally set individually in a combined and combined state. Specific processing for creating the combined data and specific processing for using the combined data will be described below.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a plurality of effect effects executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation processing for multiple effect effects is executed by the effect operation processing in step S616 in the task processing (FIG. 15). Further, the arithmetic processing for the plural effect effects is started when information about the plural effect effects is set in the currently set data table.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether the VDP 76 has created composite data. The determination is performed by determining whether or not the creation determination flag is set in the work RAM 73, but the present invention is not limited to this, and composite data is created in the currently set data table. The configuration may be such that information on whether or not it has been completed is set.

If the combined data has not been created yet, in step S1602, a plurality of effect data to be applied this time are grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S1603, the parameters of each effect data grasped in step S1602 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the work RAM 73 in an area secured corresponding to each of these effect data. Information for In a succeeding step S1604, the plural effect effect designation information is stored.

In a succeeding step S1605, it is determined whether or not it is a synthetic data generation timing. Specifically, a plurality of types of timings at which a plurality of effect effects are performed are set, and a timing at which the number of individual images other than the effect image is relatively large and the processing load on the VDP 76 is large, There is a timing when the number of individual images other than images is relatively small and the processing load on the VDP 76 is small. The synthetic data creation timing is a timing when the processing load is small.

When it is determined that it is not the timing to create the composite data (step S1605: NO), this operation processing is ended as it is. If it is determined that it is the time to create the composite data (step S1605: YES), the composite data creation designation information is stored in step S1606, and then the present arithmetic processing ends.

When the arithmetic processing for a plurality of effect effects is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), a plurality of sprite data are drawing targets and a drawing list including parameter information of these sprite data. Is created. In addition, the drawing list includes multiple effect effect designation information that is information indicating that the multiple effect effect should be executed. When the synthetic data creation designation information is stored, the drawing list includes synthetic data creation designation information that is information indicating that synthetic data should be created.

On the other hand, if the synthetic data has been created (step S1601: YES), the synthetic data to be applied this time is grasped in step S1607. In the following step S1608, the parameters of the combined data obtained in step S1607 are calculated and obtained.

In subsequent step S1609, the additional effect data is grasped based on the information set as the case where the synthetic data is already created in the currently set data table. In the following step S1610, the parameter of the additional effect data grasped in step S1609 is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in the area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the additional effect data for control. Update information. That is, when the composite data is applied, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 have an extra processing time for drawing. Therefore, the additional effect data is set using the processing time.

After that, in step S1611, the plural effect effect designation information is stored, and in step S1612, the combined data use designation information is stored, and then the present calculation process ends.

When the arithmetic processing for a plurality of effect effects is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the combined data and the additional effect data are objects to be drawn, and the combined data and the additional effect data are further processed. A drawing list including parameter information is created. In addition, the drawing list includes a plurality of effect effect designation information and also includes synthetic data use designation information that is information indicating that synthetic data should be used.

Next, the setting process for multiple effect effects executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for multiple effect effects is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, when the multiple effect effect designation is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the multiple effect effect is activated.

In step S1701, it is determined whether synthetic data use designation is set in the drawing list. If the composite data use designation is not set, in step S1702, the plurality of effect data designated as the current drawing target and the addresses to which these effect data are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are set. Figure out That is, when a plurality of effect data are drawn at the same time, these effect data are not set individually in the drawing list but are set to be processed simultaneously in one processing time.

In the following step S1703, the parameter of each effect data is grasped. After that, in step S1704, it is determined whether the composite data creation designation is set. If the composite data creation designation is not set, this setting process is ended as it is. If the composite data creation designation is set, the process advances to step S1705.

In step S1705, composite data is created in a state in which each parameter acquired in step S1704 is applied to the plurality of effect data acquired in step S1702. Then, this setting process is completed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 31B, a combined data area 81c is set in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. The combined data created in step S2305 is written in the combined data area 81c. The combined data area 81c stores and holds the written combined data while the power supply to the VRAM 75 is continued, and when other image data is transferred from the NAND flash memory 102 to the VRAM 75. Areas that are not overwritten. Therefore, the synthesized data once created is stored and held until the power supply to the VRAM 75 is cut off.

By performing the setting process for multiple effect effects as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the above-mentioned respective parameters are applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be rendered. Each of the above effect data is drawn. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, so that the effect image using each of the effect data is displayed on the display screen G.

On the other hand, when the composite data use designation is set in the drawing list (step S1701: YES), in step S1706, the composite data designated as the current drawing target and the composite data in the composite data area 81c are displayed. Figure out the address where is stored. In the following step S1707, the parameter of the combined data is grasped.

In subsequent step S1708, the additional effect data designated as the current drawing target and the address to which the additional effect data is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. In other words, when the composite data and the additional effect data are drawn at the same time, the composite data and the additional effect data are not set individually in the drawing list, but are set to be processed simultaneously in one processing time. Has been done. After that, in step S1709, after the parameters of the additional effect data are grasped, this setting process ends.

By performing the setting process for multiple effect effects as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the combined data is applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be rendered with the parameters applied. Is drawn, and additional effect data is drawn with the parameters applied. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, so that an effect image using the combined data and the additional effect data is displayed on the display screen G.

As described above, the composite data for simultaneously displaying a plurality of effect images is created, and the composite data is used in the subsequent use, so that the plurality of effect data are stored at each execution timing of the plurality of effect effects. The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with the drawing configuration.

In particular, since the display CPU 72 issues an instruction to create the composite data at a timing when the processing load on the VDP 76 is small, it is possible to create the composite data while preventing the processing drop in the VDP 76.

Further, when a plurality of effect effects are executed using the combined data, an additional effect image using the additional effect data is displayed by utilizing the fact that there is a margin in processing time. As a result, more effect images can be applied, and the visual effect of the effect images can be enhanced.

Further, the storage capacity required for the effect data in the NAND flash memory 102 can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the synthesized data is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance. Further, since the combined data is created by using the individually set effect data, the effect data can be used individually.

Further, since the combined data is stored in the combined data area 81c after being created, after the combined data is created, the combined data can be used for a plurality of frames that are not continuous.

In addition, the synthetic data is created in accordance with each effect data that constitutes the synthetic data when it is used for display. As a result, it is not necessary to set the processing timing for creating the composite data independently of the image display.

In addition, the synthetic data is created after the parameter information is applied to each of the effect data forming the synthetic data. As a result, when synthetic data is used, it is sufficient to derive and apply parameter information for the synthetic data, and it is not necessary to derive and apply parameter information for each effect data that constitutes the synthetic data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the combined data is used.

It should be noted that, when a plurality of effect effects are executed using the combined data, the additional effect data may not be drawn. Even in this case, the synthetic data is created, so that the processing time in the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be easily adjusted.

Further, the combined data may be created at a timing different from the timing at which each effect data is used for display, such as when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

<Partial display of individual image using α data>
Next, a configuration for partially displaying an individual image using α data will be described.

As described above, the α data is the transparency information applied to each pixel of the background data and the sprite data, and is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 as image data in advance. The α data is individually set for image data such as background data and sprite data that defines an individual image, but for the symbol sprite data, the entire α data and the partial α data are set respectively. Has been done.

The α data for whole and the α data for partial will be described with reference to FIG. 32. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining α data, FIG. 32(a) shows the symbol sprite data PD20 corresponding to a predetermined symbol, and FIG. 32(b) is set in association with the symbol sprite data PD20. 32(c) shows the case where the whole α data PD21 is applied to the symbol sprite data PD20, and FIGS. 32(d) to 32(g) are associated with the symbol sprite data PD20. The set partial α data PD22 to PD25 are shown.

As shown in FIG. 32A, the symbol sprite data PD20 includes an image area PA10 to be displayed on the display screen G as an individual image, and a frame area PA11 that surrounds the image area PA10. The frame area PA11 enables the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to handle the symbol sprite data PD20 as image data defined in a rectangular shape, regardless of the outer edge shape of the image area PA10, and facilitates designation of coordinates.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), the size of the overall α data PD21 is set so that its outer shape matches the design target sprite data PD20. The overall α data PD21 has an image corresponding area PA12 that occupies the inside of the outer edge portion and a frame corresponding area PA13 that occupies the outside of the outer edge portion, with the outer edge portion of the image area PA10 in the design target sprite data PD20 as a boundary. Is equipped with.

For each pixel included in the frame corresponding area PA13, "0" which is complete transparency information is set as an α value. On the other hand, "1", which is opaque information, is set as an α value for each pixel included in the image corresponding area PA12 excluding its outer edge portion, and each pixel included in the outer edge portion has an α value. 0<α value<1, which is partial transmission information, is set.

By applying the overall α data PD21 to the symbol sprite data PD20, the α value of each pixel included in the image corresponding area PA12 is applied to each pixel included in the image area PA10, and the frame area PA11 is further applied. The α value of each pixel included in the frame corresponding area PA13 is applied to each pixel included in.

In this case, as described above, the size of the whole α data PD21 is set so that its outer shape matches the design target sprite data PD20. Therefore, by setting the size and rotation angle of both data PD20 and 21 to be the same, and further setting both data PD20 and 21 so that the reference pixel such as one pixel at the center overlaps, the α data PD21 for the whole of the pattern sprite data PD20 The application can be performed, and the processing load related to the setting can be reduced. The same applies to the partial α data PD22 to PD25.

Further, when the pattern sprite data PD20 to which the overall α data PD21 is applied is overlapped with the image data which is overlapped on the back side of the display screen G, each dot related to the overlay is determined by the overall α data PD21. Numerical information fusion (that is, blending) is performed based on the existing α value. In particular,
R: “R value of back side image”×(“1”−“α value”)+“R value of front side image”דα value”
G: “G value of back side image”×(“1”−“α value”)+“G value of front side image”דα value”
B: “B value of the back side image”×(“1”−“α value”)+“B value of the front side image”דα value”
Becomes The same applies to the partial α data PD22 to PD25.

By applying the overall α data PD21, in the applied pattern CH3, the frame area PA11 is in a completely transparent state as shown in FIG. 32(c), and only the image area PA10 is visible. In addition, jaggies that occur in the outline of the pattern CH3 are reduced, and the color can be smoothly changed so that the outline of the pattern CH3 is fused with the background. That is, it is possible to perform anti-aliasing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 32(d) to 32(g), the sizes of the partial α data PD22 to PD25 are set such that the outer shape thereof matches the design target sprite data PD20. The partial α data PD22 to PD25 have a partial image corresponding area PA14 that occupies the inside of the outer edge portion with the outer edge portion corresponding to a part of the image area PA10 in the design target sprite data PD20 as a boundary, and the outer edge portion. Corresponding area PA15 other than a part occupying the outside of the area.

For each pixel included in the corresponding area PA15 other than a part, "0" which is the completely transparent information is set as the α value. On the other hand, non-transparency information “1” is set as an α value in each pixel included in a portion of the partial image corresponding area PA14 excluding the outer edge portion, and α is set in each pixel included in the outer edge portion. As the value, 0<α value<1 which is the partial transmission information is set.

The α data PD22 to PD25 for each portion are different in the portion corresponding to the partial image corresponding area PA14 in the image area PA10 of the symbol sprite data PD20. Specifically, the partial α data PD22 of FIG. 32(d) corresponds to a quarter of the destination side when the image area PA10 is variably displayed, and the partial α data PD22 of FIG. 32(e) is used. The data PD23 corresponds to half of the destination side, the partial α data PD24 of FIG. 32(f) corresponds to half of the source side, and the partial α data PD25 of FIG. 32(g) proceeds. It corresponds to 1/4 of the original side.

The partial α data PD22 to PD25 set for one symbol sprite data PD20 are not limited to four, and may be two, three, or five or more. Further, the number may be one. In addition, the combination of the above-mentioned whole α data and the plurality of partial α data is set in one-to-one correspondence with each type of symbol sprite data.

By using the α data PD22 to PD25 for each part, it is possible to display a part of the symbol. Even when a partial display is performed in this way, jaggies that occur in the outline of the design are reduced within the range of the partial display, and the colors change smoothly so that the outline of the design merges with the background. It becomes possible. That is, it is possible to perform anti-aliasing even when displaying a part.

Hereinafter, processing in the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 when applying α data will be described.

First, the symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the symbol calculation process is a process executed in step S617 of the task process (FIG. 15), and calculates various parameters for the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner in each game. Is a process to derive.

In step S1801, it is determined whether it is time to execute partial display. Whether or not it is the timing is determined by referring to the information designated by the current pointer in the currently set data table.

If it is not the time to execute the partial display (partial display), in step S1802, the symbol sprite data to be controlled this time is grasped. In subsequent step S1803, various parameters such as coordinates, size and rotation angle are calculated and derived for all of the grasped symbol sprite data, and information of the derived various parameters is secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the symbol sprite data. The control information is updated by writing in the designated area.

In the following step S1804, the α data for the whole corresponding to each of the symbol sprite data grasped in step S1802 is grasped. In this case, the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 also grasps the information of the address to which each overall α data is transferred. After that, in step S1805, after the synthesis designation information is stored in the register, the present symbol calculation processing is ended.

When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the symbol sprite data grasped in step S1802 is the drawing target, and further the parameter information of each of the symbol sprite data. Then, a drawing list including the type and address of the whole α data and the synthesis designation information indicating that the whole α data should be applied to the corresponding symbol sprite data is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

On the other hand, if it is time to execute partial display (step S1801: YES), the coordinates and size of the partial display area are grasped in step S1806. The partial display area is an area displayed so as to partition a part of the display screen G (see the area partitioned by the frame indicated by the symbol PL5 in FIG. 34B).

In a succeeding step S1807, the symbol sprite data displayed this time on the display screen G including the partial display area is grasped. In the pachinko machine 10, when displaying the partial display area, the pattern is displayed only in the partial display area, and the background and the effect character are displayed outside the partial display area on the display screen G. Is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol may be displayed outside the partial display area.

In the following step S1808, various parameters such as coordinates, size and rotation angle are calculated and derived for all of the symbol sprite data grasped in step S1807, and information of the derived various parameters is associated with the symbol sprite data in the work RAM 73. Then, the control information is updated by writing in the secured area. In this case, the size information is calculated so that the symbol displayed in the partial display area is displayed in a smaller size than the normal display state in the situation where the partial display area is not displayed.

In a succeeding step S1809, it is determined whether or not the partial α data needs to be set. If it is necessary to set the partial α data, in step S1810, the partial α data corresponding to the pattern sprite data that needs to be set, and the partial α data corresponding to the current drawing list creation target is set. Understand α data. In this case, the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 also grasps the information of the address to which each partial α data is transferred.

When a negative determination is made in step S1809 or after the processing of step S1810 is executed, it is determined in step S1811 whether or not the overall α data needs to be set. Even for the symbol sprites displayed in the partial display area, if the partial α data is not applicable, it is necessary to set the overall α data, and in this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1811. do. When it is necessary to set the α data for the whole, the process of step S1804 is executed to grasp the α data for the whole.

Regardless of whether or not the overall α data is grasped in step S1804, after finally storing the synthesis designation information in step S1805, the present symbol calculation processing is ended.

When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the partial display area should be set in addition to the information described as the case where only the whole α data is applied. A drawing list is created that includes information, parameter information of the partial display area, the type and address of the partial α data, and synthesis designation information indicating that the partial α data should be applied to the corresponding symbol sprite data. And transmitted to the VDP 76.

Incidentally, in the drawing list, not only the contents of data corresponding to the image displayed in the partial display area but also data corresponding to the background and the effect character displayed outside the partial display area are set. In this case, the image displayed in the partial display area is displayed as if it exists on the front side of the display screen G as compared with the image displayed outside the partial display area, and thus is set in the drawing list. The order in which the image data corresponds to outside the partial display area is first, and the image data corresponding to the partial display area is later.

Next, the symbol sprite data setting process executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process of the symbol sprite data is executed in the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, the setting process of the symbol sprite data is started when the synthesis designation is set in the drawing list.

In step S1901, the pattern sprite data to be drawn this time shown in the drawing list is grasped. In a succeeding step S1902, it is determined whether or not the overall α data is applied to the symbol sprite data grasped in the step S1901.

When applying the whole α data, in step S1903, the whole α data is read from the designated address and is combined with the symbol sprite data read from the designated address. Thereby, the α value set for each pixel of the overall α data is applied to each corresponding pixel in the pattern sprite data. By the way, when synthesizing the whole α data, the whole α data is synthesized so as to overlap the whole pattern sprite data. The same applies to the case of partial α data.

On the other hand, in the case of applying the partial α data, in step S1904, the partial α data is read from the specified address and is combined with the symbol sprite data read from the same specified address. As a result, the α value set for each pixel of the partial α data is applied to each corresponding pixel in the pattern sprite data.

After executing step S1903 or step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1905. In step S1905, various parameters (coordinates, size, rotation angle, etc.) referred to when writing the composite sprite data created in step S1903 or step S1904 into the frame areas 82a and 82b are grasped. Then, this setting process is completed.

The various parameters grasped in step S1905 are information set for the symbol sprite data grasped in step S1901. That is, the information of various parameters required for writing in the frame areas 82a and 82b is set for the symbol sprite data, but is not set for the whole α data or the partial α data, and the symbol sprite is used. Information on various parameters set for the data is applied to the synthetic sprite data. As a result, the amount of information specified in the drawing list can be suppressed and the processing load on the display CPU 72 can be reduced compared to the configuration in which various parameter information is set for the entire α data and the partial α data. Be done.

By the way, in the case of writing the pattern sprite data for which the setting process has been completed in the frame areas 82a, 82b, the background data and the effect data already written in the frame areas 82a, 82b have already been described. An operation for blending (blending operation) is performed.

Next, how a partial display of symbols is performed using the partial display area PL5 will be described with reference to FIG. 34(b). FIG. 34(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a part of the symbol is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 34B, the partial display area PL5 is displayed as a range smaller than the display screen G at a position closer to the corner portion of the display screen G. Further, the outer edge of the partial display area PL5 is not in contact with the outer edge of the display screen G, and all the outer edges of the partial display area PL5 have a gap with the outer edge of the display screen G.

In the partial display area PL5, the variable display of the symbols CH3 and CH4 is performed in a predetermined direction. The predetermined direction is the same as the case where the variable display of symbols is performed on each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 without displaying the partial display area PL5, but it may be a different direction.

The symbols CH3 and CH4 that are variably displayed in the partial display area PL5 are displayed so as to appear from a predetermined one side of the partial display area PL5 and disappear from the one side opposite to the predetermined side. In this case, these symbols CH3 and CH4 are partially displayed so as not to overflow the partial display region PL5.

Incidentally, although omitted in FIG. 34B for convenience of explanation, in a region outside the partial display region PL5 on the display screen G, a predetermined background and an image of a character for effect are displayed. In this case, the images of these predetermined backgrounds and effect characters are displayed between the peripheral edge of the display screen G and the peripheral edge of the partial display area PL5 in the corner portion where the partial display area PL5 is set close. You may do it. Further, a predetermined background or an image of a character for effect may be displayed on both sides of the partial display area PL5.

By combining the partial α data for the symbol as described above, it is possible to display a part of the symbol using the α data that can be antialiased.

Further, as described above, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 cannot recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, but only the coordinates of the reference pixel. Then, in the process on the program, the process of dividing only a part of the symbol sprite data cannot be performed. On the other hand, a configuration is possible in which a plurality of symbol sprite data necessary for performing partial display are set in advance for one symbol. However, the pattern sprite data is data including color information, and has a larger data capacity than the α data in which only the α value is set for each pixel. Therefore, by performing a partial display using α data, it is possible to perform a partial display while suppressing the data capacity of the image data and further the data capacity required in the NAND flash memory 102.

Further, when performing partial display, the VDP 76 only needs to read out the partial α data and apply it to the image data to be applied. Therefore, partial display can be performed while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the VDP 76.

Note that anti-aliasing may not be performed when the partial α data is applied. Further, the application target of the partial α data is not limited to the design, and may be a background character or a production character. Further, the parameter information may be set independently for the whole α data and the partial α data.

<First Alternative Mode for Partial Display>
A first alternative mode for performing partial display will be described.

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first alternative mode, FIGS. 35(a) and 35(c) show symbol sprite data, and FIGS. 35(b) and 35(d) show general α data. 35(e) to (h) show partial α data.

In this another embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35(a) to (h), α data PD28, PD29 for the whole is individually set for each of the symbol sprite data PD26, PD27, and α data PD30 for the part is set. .. to PD33 are set in common to each of the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27. By the way, the initial size of the data stored in the NAND flash memory 102 is the same for all the data PD26 to PD33. The above-mentioned data structure is the same for the symbol sprite data other than the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27 illustrated in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(c).

In the case of this configuration, when partial display is not performed, antialiasing can be performed by synthesizing the corresponding overall α data PD28 and PD29 with the respective symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27. Further, when performing partial display, first, the corresponding overall α data PD28 and PD29 are combined, and then the partial α data PD30 to PD33 corresponding to the part to be partially displayed are combined to prevent antialiasing. While performing, partial display can be performed using the common partial α data PD30 to PD33.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the types of the partial alpha data PD30 to PD33 as compared with the configuration in which the partial alpha data is individually set for the symbol sprite data PD26 and PD27, and the partial alpha data is used. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the data PD30 to PD33.

<Second Alternative Mode for Partial Display>
A second alternative mode for performing partial display will be described.

FIG. 36(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second different form, and FIG. 36(b) is a flowchart showing the setting process of the symbol sprite data in the second different form.

In this alternative mode, anti-aliasing is performed and part of the symbol is displayed by using α palette data instead of using α data. The α palette data PD34 is data in which α value information is added to each color information of the palette data for 256 colors as shown in FIG. 36(a-1).

As shown in FIG. 36(a-2), in the pattern sprite data PD35, an image area PA16 and a frame area PA17 are set, but color information not set in the image area PA16 is set in the frame area PA17. Has been done. On the other hand, in the overall α palette data, complete transparency information is set as an α value for the color information set in the frame area PA17. In the image area PA16, the non-transparent information "1" is set as the α value in the color information of the portion excluding the outer edge portion, and the color information of the outer edge portion is the partially transparent information as the α value. 0<α value<1 is set. By combining the overall α palette data with the pattern sprite data PD35, antialiasing can be performed as shown in FIG. 36(a-3).

Further, in the pattern sprite data PD35, as shown in FIG. 36(a-2), a plurality of partial areas PA18 to PA21 in which the same color information is not used are set. On the other hand, complete transparency information is set as the α value for the color information set in some of the partial areas PA18 to PA21 and the frame area PA17, and the color information set in the other areas. The partial α pallet data for which the opacity information is set as the α value is prepared. Plural types of the partial α palette data are prepared so that the partial areas PA18 to PA21 to which the α value of the complete transmission information is applied are different from each other. By combining the partial α palette data with the symbol sprite data PD35, a part of the symbol can be displayed as shown in FIG. 36(a-4).

The process of setting the symbol sprite data in the VDP 76 that is executed when the α palette data is used will be described below with reference to FIG. 36(b).

First, in step S2001, the pattern sprite data to be drawn this time shown in the drawing list is grasped. In a succeeding step S2002, it is determined whether or not the overall α palette data is applied to the symbol sprite data grasped in the step S2001.

When the α palette data for the whole is applied, the α palette data for the whole is read from the designated address in step S2003, and is combined with the symbol sprite data read from the designated address. As a result, the α value added and set to each color information in the overall α palette data is applied to the pattern sprite data.

On the other hand, when the partial α palette data is applied, in step S2004, the partial α palette data is read from the designated address and is combined with the symbol sprite data read from the designated address. As a result, the α value set by being added to each color information in the partial α palette data is applied to the pattern sprite data.

After executing step S2003 or step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, various parameters (coordinates, size, rotation angle, etc.) referred to when writing the composite sprite data created in step S2003 or step S2004 into the frame areas 82a and 82b are grasped. Then, this setting process is completed.

By executing the above-described processing, the overall α palette data or the partial α palette data is combined with the symbol sprite data. Even with this configuration, although the data structure of the symbol sprite data is restricted as compared with the case where α data is used, antialiasing and partial display of the symbol sprite can be performed. Further, it is possible to set the partial display in accordance with the setting of the color information.

<Another mode for performing character transition display using α data>
Another mode for performing character transition display using α data will be described.

FIG. 37(a) is a flowchart showing the character transition processing executed by the VDP 76, and FIGS. 37(b) to 37(f) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the character transition display is performed. The character transition process is executed by the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). In addition, the character transition process is activated when the character transition designation is set in the drawing list.

As shown in FIG. 37(a), in the character transition processing, first, in step S2101, the superposition processing of the character sprite data PD36 is executed. As shown in FIG. 37B, the character sprite data PD36 has a plurality of character areas PA22 to PA26 arranged side by side in a predetermined direction, specifically, a horizontal direction, and has a rectangular outer shape. The data is defined such that the periphery of the plurality of character areas PA22 to PA26 is surrounded by the frame area PA27. In step S2101, two identical character sprite data PD36 are read, and the data are set so that they are entirely overlapped in the front and rear.

In the following step S2102, palette data is set in the character sprite data PA36 on the far side. As a result, the same color information is set for each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PA36 on the back side. In subsequent step S2103, the alpha data for the whole is combined with the character sprite data PD36 on the back side. As a result, antialiasing is performed on each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite on the back side.

In a succeeding step S2104, palette data is set in the character sprite data PA36 on the front side. The palette data differs from the palette data set in step S2102 in the color information set for each numerical value information of the bitmap data. As a result, color information different from that of the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite data PD36 on the back side is set for each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite data PD36 on the front side.

In a succeeding step S2105, it is determined whether or not the general-purpose α data is combined with the character sprite data PD36 on the front side. When synthesizing the whole α data, in step S2106, the whole α data is combined with the character sprite data PD36 on the front side, and then the present character transition process ends. The overall α data is the same as the overall α data used in step S2103. As a result, anti-aliasing is performed on each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 of the character sprite data PD36 on the front side.

When the process of step S2106 is executed, finally, on the display screen G, the character areas PA22 to PA26 set in the character sprite data PD36 on the back side are not displayed, and the character sprite data on the front side is displayed. The character areas PA22 to PA26 set in the PD 36 are displayed. In this case, the character is displayed with the color information set in each of the character areas PA22 to PA26 in the character sprite data PD36 on the front side.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2105 that the overall α data is not to be combined, in step S2107, the partial α data is combined with the character sprite data PD36 on the front side, and then this character transition processing is performed. finish. As shown in FIGS. 37(c) and 37(d), the partial α data PD37 and PD38 have complete transparency information as α values for each pixel in the regions corresponding to some of the character regions PA22 to PA26 and the frame region PA27. Is set. Further, non-transparency information is set as an α value for each pixel included in the other character areas PA22 to PA26 excluding its outer edge portion, and each pixel included in the outer edge portion is partially transparent as an α value. Information 0<α value<1 is set. Further, the partial α data PD37 and PD38 are set in plural types so that the character areas PA22 to PA26 are erased character by character in a predetermined direction, specifically, in order from the left one character at a time.

When the process of step S2107 is executed, finally, in the display screen G, the character area of the character sprite on the back side is displayed for the character area that is hidden in the character sprite on the front side. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 37(e) and 37(f), some characters continuous from the left side are displayed in the color information set in each character area in the character sprite on the back side while being displayed. , The remaining characters are displayed in the color information set in each character information in the character sprite on the front side. Alternatively, all the characters are displayed in the color information set in each character information in the character sprite on the back side.

As described above, karaoke-like character transition display can be performed using α data. By the way, the character transition display is executed when a karaoke style effect is performed, and an effect that the corresponding lyrics portion is discolored according to the melody output from the speaker unit 45 is performed.

The character sprite data PD36 may not be set in an overlapping manner, but a single character sprite data PD36 may be set and the display range may be narrowed sequentially. In this case, each character area is not sequentially displayed with a different color, but is displayed so that each character area is sequentially erased.

Further, when the character sprite data PD36 is displayed so that different colors are sequentially added to each other, first, by applying α data that makes the front side character sprite data PD36 non-display, the back side character sprite data PD36 is converted. The α data to be displayed may be changed, and thereafter, the α data to be applied may be changed so that each character area of the character sprite data PD36 on the front side is sequentially displayed. In this case, when the character area of the character sprite data PD36 on the front side is to be displayed, the character area to be displayed on the character sprite data PD36 on the front side corresponds to the corresponding character of the character sprite data PD36 on the back side. The area may be overwritten, or the color information of both character areas may be blended.

Further, the character sprite data on the front side may not be anti-aliased so that the contour portion of each character area is not affected by the image on the back side.

<Structure for performing wipe switching effect>
Next, a configuration for performing the wipe switching effect will be described.

With the wipe switching effect, the image of the previous display timing is gradually erased at the timing when the background image and a large number of characters are changed, and instead the image of the subsequent display timing is gradually erased by using the erased area. It is an effect to be displayed in.

The link display function is used in the wipe switching effect. The link display function is a function that integrates the subordinate side image data (relative sprite) with one type of reference side image data (absolute sprite) and enables the VDP 76 side to handle it as one image data. is there. When a plurality of image data are integrated by the link display function, the subordinate side image data is visually displayed only within the image range of the reference side image data. Further, when the image data is integrated by the link display function, the processing performed on the reference side image data is also applied to the subordinate side image data.

Further, in the wipe switching effect, the α data for the wipe switching effect is used in order to gradually reveal the image of the subsequent display timing while gradually deleting the image of the previous display timing. The wipe switching effect α data is combined with the reference side image data at the previous display timing, but as described above, the subordinate side image data is one image data integrated into the reference side image data. Since it is handled, the α data is also applied to the subordinate image data.

Here, with reference to FIG. 38, each image data forming the image at the previous display timing, each image data forming the image at the subsequent display timing, and the α data for the wipe switching effect will be described.

FIG. 38A shows the image data PD39 to PD42 that form the image at the previous display timing. Of these, the image data PD39 is image data for displaying the rearmost image at the previous display timing, and is used as reference side image data in the link display function (hereinafter, the image data PD39 is referred to as reference side image data). PD39). The plurality of image data PD40 to PD42 are image data for displaying a decorative image displayed on the backmost image, and are used as subordinate image data in the link display function (hereinafter, referred to as “subordinate image data”). The image data PD40 to PD42 are referred to as subordinate image data PD40 to PD42).

By applying the link display function to these image data PD39 to PD42, as described above, the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 are visually displayed only within the image range of the reference side image data PD39. Becomes Even if the entire subordinate side image data is included in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b, the portion protruding from the reference side image data PD39 is not the drawing target.

FIG. 38B shows the image data PD43 to PD45 forming the image at the subsequent display timing. The image data PD43 is image data for displaying the rearmost image at the rear display timing, and the plurality of image data PD44, PD45 is image data for displaying a decorative image displayed on the rearmost image. Is. The link display function is not applied to each of the image data PD43 to PD45 forming the image of the post-display timing.

38C and 38D show α data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect. Since the α data PD46 and PD47 are combined with the reference side image data PD39, they have the same size and outer shape as the reference side image data PD39 at the time of initial setting. Further, in each of the α data PD46 and PD47, the completely transparent areas PA28 and PA30 in which the α value of each pixel is set to “0” which is the completely transparent information and the α value of each pixel is “1” which is the opaque information. And opaque areas PA29 and PA31 set to. In each of the α data PD46 and PD47, the area inside the boundary line is the non-transmissive areas PA29 and PA31, and the area outside is the completely transmissive areas PA28 and PA30. The α data PD46 and PD47 are switched and used each time an image for one frame is updated when the wipe switching effect is executed, but the α data PD46 used at the earlier timing is later used. The size of the completely transparent areas PA28 and PA30 is set to be larger than that of the α data PD47 used at the timing.

A specific processing configuration for executing the wipe switching effect using each of the above image data will be described.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing for the wipe switching effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the wipe switching effect is executed in the background calculation process of step S615 in the task process (FIG. 15). Further, the calculation process for the wipe switching effect is started when the information about the wipe switching effect is set in the currently set data table.

First, in step S2201, the respective image data PD43 to PD45 corresponding to the image at the subsequent display timing are grasped based on the currently set data table, and these image data PD43 to PD45 are grasped as the priority side in drawing. To do. In the following step S2202, the parameters of the image data PD43 to PD45 grasped as the post-display timing are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the image data PD43 to PD45. The information for control is updated by writing to.

After that, in steps S2203 to S2209, processing for giving an instruction to draw an image at the previous display timing is executed. First, in step S2203, the reference side image data PD39 of the images at the previous display timing is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S2204, the control information is calculated by calculating and deriving the parameter of the reference side image data PD39, and writing the information of the derived parameter in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the reference image data PD39. To update.

In subsequent step S2205, the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 of the images at the previous display timing are grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S2206, the parameters of the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 are calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameters is written in the work RAM 73 in an area secured corresponding to each subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42. To update the control information.

Then, in step S2207, the link designation information is stored. The link designation information is information for designating the drawing of image data using the link display function. In a succeeding step S2208, the α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect corresponding to the current drawing instruction are grasped based on the currently set data table. The α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect are set in association with the reference side image data PD39, and the application target is the reference side image data PD39.

After that, after the wipe designation information is stored in step S2209, the present arithmetic processing is terminated. The wipe designation information is information for instructing to combine the α data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect with the reference side image data PD39.

When the calculation processing for wipe switching effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), a drawing list for drawing an image corresponding to the wipe switching effect is created. The drawing list will be described below. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing list created when the wipe switching effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 40, a plurality of image data is set in association with each drawing order. In this case, in step S2201 of the arithmetic processing, each image data forming the image of the subsequent display timing is grasped as the priority side. Therefore, even in the drawing list, each image data forming the image of the subsequent display timing is better. , The drawing order is set earlier than each image data forming the image of the previous display timing.

A link is designated for each image data forming the image at the previous display timing. When the link designation is made, the image data relating to the link designation is processed within the range of one processing of the drawing processing (FIG. 13) in the VDP 76, but the present invention is not limited to this and each processing is performed. It may be configured such that the processing is performed separately at each time. Although not shown, the parameter P(4) of the background data corresponding to the reference side image data among the image data forming the image at the previous display timing includes the α data for the wipe switching effect. Information is set.

By the way, the pattern sprite data is set in a drawing order after the image data forming the image at the previous display timing. Therefore, an image in which the variable display of the symbol is being executed is displayed in front of the background image on which the wipe switching effect is performed.

Next, the setting process for the wipe switching effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the wipe switching effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, at the timing when the setting process for the wipe switching effect is executed, each image data forming the image at the post-display timing designated in the drawing list this time is drawn in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b. It has been completed.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not link designation is set in the drawing list. When the link designation is not set, this setting process is ended as it is. When the link designation is set, in step S2302, the reference side image data PD39 designated as the current drawing target and the reference side image data PD39 in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are transferred. Know the address. In the following step S2303, the parameters of the reference side image data PD39 are grasped.

In a succeeding step S2304, the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 designated as the current drawing target and the address to which the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 are transferred are grasped in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. In the following step S2305, each parameter of the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 is grasped.

In the following step S2306, link setting is performed. As a result, the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 grasped in step S2304 are linked to the reference side image data PD39 grasped in step S2302. Incidentally, at the time of this link, each of the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 to which the parameter grasped in step S2305 is applied is linked to the reference side image data PD39 to which the parameter grasped in step S2303 is applied. ..

In a succeeding step S2307, it is determined whether or not the wipe designation is set. If the wipe designation is not set, this setting process is ended as it is. If the wipe designation is set, in step S2308, the α data PD46, PD47 for the wipe switching effect designated this time and the α data PD46, PD47 are transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM75. Know which address you have. Then, the α data read based on the grasped address is combined with the reference side image data PD39 to which the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 are linked. Then, this setting process is completed.

Next, the state of the wipe switching effect using the link display function will be described with reference to FIG.

At a timing before the wipe switching effect is started, the image PC12 at the previous display timing is displayed as shown in FIG. In addition, before the image PC12 at the previous display timing, variable display of symbols is performed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

After that, when the wipe switching effect is started, the reference side image data is drawn after the image data PD43 to PD45 forming the image PC13 at the post-display timing are drawn in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b. Image data in a state in which the subordinate side image data PD40 to PD42 are linked to the PD39 and the α data PD46 for wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 38C is combined is drawn.

In this case, the image data PD39 to PD42 of the previous display timing is drawn so as to overlap the image data PD43 to PD45 of the subsequent display timing, but at the time of the drawing, the calculation for fusion as described above is executed. To be done. Therefore, the numerical information of the image data at the subsequent display timing remains as it is in each dot corresponding to the pixel in which the completely transparent area PA28 is combined. On the other hand, since the numerical information of the pixel to which the non-transparent area PA29 is combined at the previous display timing is overwritten on the dot to be drawn, the numerical information of the image data at the subsequent display timing is erased and the previous display is performed. The image data of the timing is written. As a result, as shown in FIG. 42B, a wipe image in which the outside of the boundary line is the image PC13 at the later display timing and the inside of the boundary line is the image PC12 at the earlier display timing is displayed. In addition, in front of the wipe image, variable display of symbols is performed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

After that, the drawing process is executed by using the α data PD47 for wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 38D instead of the α data PD46 for wipe switching effect shown in FIG. 38C. As shown in 42(c), the area in which the image PC12 at the earlier display timing is displayed becomes narrower, but the area in which the image PC13 at the later display timing is displayed becomes wider.

As described above, the background image switching mode is gradually changed over a plurality of frames while performing the wipe switching effect, so that the background image switching mode can be made novel and the background image switching mode can be changed. It is possible to diversify.

Further, since the image data PD39 to PD42 forming the image of the front side display timing are linked and the linked image data is combined with the α data PD46 and PD47 for the wipe switching effect, The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the α data for the wipe switching effect is individually combined for the image data PD39 to PD42.

Further, after the image data PD43 to PD45 of the rear display timing is simply drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn, the image data PD39 to PD42 of the front display timing is drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b. It is a composition. That is, for the image data PD43 to PD45 at the rear side display timing, the image data may be drawn normally according to the drawing list. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration from becoming complicated.

Note that the α data may be individually applied to the subordinate image data PD40 to PD42 for the purpose of antialiasing or partial display. Further, the image data PD43 to PD45 of the rear side display timing may be configured to be linked.

The direction of wipe switching is not limited to the configuration in which the image at the previous display timing narrows from the outer side to the inner side over a plurality of frames, and may be configured to narrow from the inner side to the outer side. The configuration may be narrowed from one predetermined side to one side opposite thereto.

<Structure for smoothly moving and displaying sprites>
Next, a configuration for smoothly moving and displaying the sprite will be described.

When displaying an animation in which the sprite is moving in a predetermined moving direction, the sprite is drawn at a position shifted by a predetermined dot in the moving direction for each frame or for every plurality of frames. A sprite for smooth movement is set as the sprite.

The sprite for smooth movement will be described with reference to FIG. 43A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, and FIGS. 43B and 43C show sprite data PD48, PD49 for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement. It is an explanatory view for explaining.

As shown in FIG. 43(a), the smooth movement sprite CH5 is an individual image representing a cloud that is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction over time. Further, the display size is smaller than that of the other individual image PC 14 that is simultaneously displayed as an image for one frame. Further, when the sprite CH5 for smooth movement or another individual image PC14 is displayed, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the front side thereof, but the individual image corresponding to the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is not displayed. The display size is smaller than the design. In the smooth movement sprite CH5, the number of image updates required to move one dot is set to be larger than that of the symbol. That is, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is moved and displayed in a state where the moving speed is slower than the symbol.

The smooth movement sprite CH5 is not limited to the individual image showing the cloud, and if it is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction, it may be an individual image showing another object such as an airplane. It may be.

A plurality of sprite data is set as image data for displaying the smooth movement sprite CH5. Specifically, two pieces of sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set. Both of the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are for representing the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, but the second sprite data PD49 is based on the frame regions 82a and 82b in the movement direction with respect to the first sprite data PD48. It corresponds to the state of being moved by half a dot.

Both of the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are data deviated by half a dot due to the difference in the α value at the boundary portion. Comparing both sprite data PD48 and PD49 with each pixel constituting the same boundary part as an example, as shown in FIGS. 43B and 43C, the α value of the pixel on the front side in the moving direction is different. ing.

As described above, when the α value is “0”, it corresponds to the complete transparency information, and in the pixel having the α value of “0”, all the overlapping images on the back side of the display screen G are transparent. On the other hand, when the α value is “1”, it corresponds to the opaque information, and the pixels having the α value of “1” are in a state of filling the overlapping images on the back side of the display screen G. Further, in the case of 0<α value<1, in the state of being semi-transparent by the α value, the overlapping images on the back side of the display screen G are transmitted.

Incidentally, when the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is superimposed on the image on the back side, the calculation for fusion is executed. The calculation for the fusion is as described above.

The first sprite data PD48 has the boundary α value set as shown in FIG. 43(b), while the second sprite data PD49 has the boundary α value set as shown in FIG. 43(c). The α value of the portion is set to a value corresponding to a state of being shifted by half a dot with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b in the moving direction. As a result, when the second sprite data PD49 is set at the same position as the coordinates at which the first sprite data PD48 is set, as indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIGS. 43B and 43C, The smooth movement sprite CH5 is visually recognized as if it has moved by half a dot with reference to the frame regions 82a and 82b or by a corresponding amount with reference to the display screen G.

Incidentally, the second sprite data PD49 is created by doubling the first sprite data PD48, shifting it by one dot with respect to the frame regions 82a and 82b, and then halving it. ..

Next, a processing configuration for performing smooth movement display using each of the sprite data PD48 and PD49 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for smooth movement executed by the display CPU 72. The arithmetic processing for smooth movement is executed by the background arithmetic processing in step S615 in the task processing (FIG. 15). Further, the arithmetic processing for smooth movement is started when information about smooth movement is set in the currently set data table.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the smooth movement display. This determination is made based on the currently set data table. If it is the start timing, the area for the progress flag set in the work RAM 73 is cleared in step S2402. In the following step S2403, the numerical information of the progress counter set in the work RAM 73 is initialized.

In a succeeding step S2404, the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as a current drawing target. In the following step S2405, by referring to the numerical information of the progress counter, the coordinate information of the first sprite data PD48 is calculated and derived, and the derived coordinate information is stored in the work RAM 73 in the first sprite data PD48. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to. Incidentally, the coordinate information is set so as to correspond one-to-one to the numerical information of the progress counter.

After that, in step S2406, parameters other than the coordinate information are calculated and derived for the first sprite data PD48, and the derived parameter information is written in the secured area to update the control information. .. Further, in step S2407, after the smooth movement designation information is stored, the present arithmetic processing is ended. When the above process is executed, in the drawing list, the first sprite data PD48 is set as the drawing target and the initial value coordinates are set as the coordinates thereof. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

On the other hand, if it is not the start timing, it is determined in step S2408 whether or not the progress target flag is set. If the progress target flag is not set, it means that the first sprite data PD48 has been set in the previous frame, and the process advances to step S2409.

In step S2409, the progress flag is set. In the following step S2410, the second sprite data PD49 is grasped as the current drawing target. In a succeeding step S2411, control is performed by grasping the coordinate information of the second sprite data PD49 and writing the grasped coordinate information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in association with the second sprite data PD49. Information for In this case, since the progress counter updating process has not been executed, the same coordinate information as the coordinate information at which the first sprite data PD48 was drawn in the previous frame is grasped.

Thereafter, in step S2412, parameters other than the coordinate information are calculated and derived for the second sprite data PD49, and the derived parameter information is written in the secured area to update the control information. .. Further, in step S2407, after the smooth movement designation information is stored, the present arithmetic processing is ended. When the above process is executed, the second sprite data PD49 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list, and the same coordinates as the previous frame are set as the coordinates thereof. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

If it is determined in step S2408 that the progress flag is set, it means that the second sprite data PD49 has been set in the previous frame, and the process advances to step S2413.

In step S2413, the progress flag is cleared. In a succeeding step S2414, the progress counter is updated so that 1 is added. In a succeeding step S2415, the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as a current drawing target. In subsequent step S2416, the coordinate information of the second sprite data PD49 is calculated and derived by referring to the numerical information of the progress counter updated in step S2414, and the derived coordinate information is secured as above. The information for control is updated by writing in the area. In this case, the information of the coordinate that has advanced by one dot in the moving direction with respect to the frame region 82a, 82b with respect to the coordinate set in the previous frame is grasped.

Thereafter, in step S2417, parameters other than coordinate information are calculated and derived for the first sprite data PD48, and the derived parameter information is written in the secured area to update the control information. .. Further, in step S2407, after the smooth movement designation information is stored, the present arithmetic processing is ended. When the above process is executed, the first sprite data PD48 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list, and its coordinates are displaced by one dot in the movement direction from the coordinates set in the previous frame. Is set. In the drawing list, smooth movement designation information is set.

Next, the smoothing movement setting process executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for smooth movement is executed in the content grasping process of step S504 in the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, the setting process for smooth movement is started when the smooth movement designation is set in the drawing list.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the current drawing target is the first sprite data PD48. In the case of the first sprite data PD48, the process proceeds to step S2502, the first sprite data PD48 is grasped as a drawing target, and the first sprite data PD48 is transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM75. Know the address. On the other hand, if it is not the first sprite data PD48, the flow advances to step S2503 to grasp the second sprite data PD49 as a drawing target, and the second sprite data PD49 in the change area 81b in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM75. Figure out which address is being forwarded to.

After executing the processing of step S2502 or step S2503, the coordinates of the drawing target at this time are grasped in step S2504, and other parameters are grasped in step S2505, and then this setting processing is ended.

By executing the setting process for smooth movement, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), the sprite of the current drawing target of the sprite data PD48 and PD49 is written in the frame regions 82a and 82b of the drawing target. The data is drawn at the specified coordinates. In this case, as shown in FIG. 45B, the first sprite data PD48 is set so that the coordinate in the moving direction is “n” in the first frame, and the coordinate in the moving direction is in the second frame. The second sprite data PD49 is set to be the same for "n". Further, the first sprite data PD48 is set so that the coordinate in the moving direction becomes “n+1” in the third frame, and the second sprite data PD48 is set in the fourth frame so that the coordinate in the moving direction becomes “n+1”. Sprite data PD49 is set. Then, after the first sprite data PD48 and the second sprite data PD49 are alternately set for the same coordinates, the state in which the moving direction is updated by one dot is repeated. As a result, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is visually recognized for each frame as if it advances by half a dot with reference to the frame regions 82a and 82b or by a corresponding amount with reference to the display screen G. It can be smoothly moved and displayed.

In particular, since the smooth movement sprite CH5 has a smaller display size than the other individual images PC14 that are displayed at the same time, one dot or the display screen G is set for each frame based on the frame regions 82a and 82b. In the configuration in which the amount of movement corresponding to one dot is used as a reference, the amount of movement with respect to its own area becomes a large ratio, and there is a concern that the movement may be noticeable as rattling. On the other hand, according to this configuration, it is possible to smoothly move and display the sprite CH5 without causing such an inconvenience.

Also, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement is an individual image showing a cloud, but when the frame rate is lowered as if this cloud is moving slowly, the frame areas 82a and 82b are used as reference points at the timing of movement. However, in a configuration in which one dot is moved or the display screen G is moved by an amount corresponding to the one dot, there is a concern that it may be noticeable as rattling. On the other hand, according to this configuration, even if one dot or a corresponding amount is moved in each of a plurality of frames, the movement is performed by less than one dot with reference to the frame regions 82a and 82b during that time. , The sprite CH5 can be smoothly moved and displayed.

By the way, as a configuration for reducing the frame rate, specifically, the information of the same coordinates is applied to the first sprite data PD48 by the number of the first plurality of frames, and the information of the same coordinates is changed to the second information. A configuration in which the coordinate information is advanced by one dot when the second plurality of frames is applied to the sprite data PD49 is conceivable. In this case, the number of the first plurality of frames and the number of the second plurality of frames may be the same or different. However, if it is desired to display the sprite CH5 for smooth movement as if it is advancing at a constant speed, it is preferable that the first plurality of frames and the second plurality of frames have the same number.

Further, the smooth movement display as described above can be realized only by alternately drawing the sprite data PD48 and PD49 shifted by half a dot. That is, it is possible to obtain the above-described excellent effects while suppressing the complication of the processing configuration. Further, the sprite data PD48 and PD49 can be created by a simple method of making the α value of the outer edge portion different.

Since the difference between the sprite data PD48 and PD49 is half a dot, the apparent movement amount should be the same when switching from one to the other and when switching from the other to the one. You can

The sprite data PD48 and PD49 shifted by a half dot is not limited to the configuration, and sprite data shifted by less than 1 dot such as 1/4 dot or 1/4 dot may be provided. .. In addition to the reference sprite data, a plurality of sprite data for less than one dot such as 1/4 dot, half dot, and 3/4 dot may be provided so that the movement amounts are different. ..

Further, in a configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b and the number of dots in the display screen G have a one-to-one correspondence, the second sprite data PD49 is based on the display screen G with respect to the first sprite data PD48. As a result, the data is shifted by half a dot.

Further, in a configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b is smaller than the number of dots in the display screen G, the second sprite data PD49 is displaced from the first sprite data PD48 by a half dot with respect to the display screen G as a reference. The configuration may be set as data. In this case, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set as data that is offset by less than half a dot with reference to the frame areas 82a and 82b. Further, both sprite data PD48, PD49 may be set as data which is shifted by less than one dot with respect to the display screen G and not by one dot.

Further, in a configuration in which the number of dots in the frame areas 82a and 82b is larger than the number of dots in the display screen G, the second sprite data PD49 is displaced from the first sprite data PD48 by half a dot with respect to the display screen G as a reference. The configuration may be set as data. In this case, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 are set as data that is deviated by half a dot or more with reference to the frame areas 82a and 82b. Further, both sprite data PD48, PD49 may be set as data which is shifted by less than one dot with respect to the display screen G and not by one dot.

Further, both sprite data PD48 and PD49 are not pre-stored in the memory module 74, but only one is pre-stored, and the other is written from one sprite data after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It may be configured to be created and stored separately. In this case, since it is necessary to create the one sprite data and store the sprite data separately, the processing load increases, but the storage capacity required for storing the sprite data in the memory module 74 can be reduced.

Further, the above-described configuration for smooth movement may be applied to a sprite in which a part of the sprite is displayed instead of the whole in which the sprite is displayed to move.

Further, the individual image PC14, which is displayed at the same time as the smooth movement sprite CH5 and has a size larger than the sprite CH5, is displayed as if it is moving for a predetermined period, that is, the viewpoint is slowly changed. May be configured. In this case, the smooth movement sprite CH5 may have a configuration in which the number of image updates required to move one dot is set to be larger than that of the individual image PC14. That is, the sprite CH5 for smooth movement may be moved and displayed in a state where the moving speed is slower than that of the individual image PC14. In this configuration, since a small individual image is moved and displayed at a slower speed than a large individual image, rattling due to movement of one dot may be noticeable. By preparing the shifted sprite data PD48 and PD49 and using them alternately, it is possible to suppress the rattling.

<Structure for zooming in using the scaler 97>
Next, a configuration for performing a zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 will be described.

As described above, the VDP 76 outputs an image signal toward the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data created in the output target frame regions 82a and 82b, and displays the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31. A display circuit 94 for displaying an image corresponding to the drawing data is provided (see FIG. 4). Incidentally, the image signal is a signal including gradation data for determining a display color in each dot (each pixel) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, and is output to the symbol display device 31 based on a predetermined clock signal. ..

The display circuit 94 converts the number of pixels of the drawing data read from the output target frame regions 82a and 82b into the number of pixels designated by the display CPU 72, and also each dot forming the liquid crystal display unit 31a of the symbol display device 31. A scaler 97 for generating gradation data of (each pixel) is provided.

The scaler 97 is provided as a dedicated circuit for resolution adjustment in the display circuit 94. As shown in FIG. 4, the scaler 97 is provided with a resolution adjusting buffer 97a. When the scaler 97 generates grayscale data, the rendering data created in the output target frame areas 82a and 82b is transferred to the resolution adjustment buffer 97a, and the grayscale data for the specified number of pixels is obtained. The drawing data is converted so that In this conversion, linear interpolation processing is executed. Specifically, the number of pixels can be converted using bilinear filtering.

Based on the gradation data created in the resolution adjusting buffer 97a, an image signal is generated by the image signal output unit 98 provided in the display circuit 94 and is output to the symbol display device 31 to be displayed on the symbol display device 31. One frame of image is displayed. Incidentally, the image signal output unit 98 is provided with a line buffer 98a, and fine control is performed using the line buffer 98a when generating or outputting the image signal.

Here, when drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, the data is written in all the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800. The number of dots is x600. On the other hand, the liquid crystal display unit 31a has a resolution of 1024×768 dots. That is, the liquid crystal display unit 31a has a higher resolution than the frame regions 82a and 82b.

When the resolution adjustment value (adjustment information) in the scaler 97 is set to the initial adjustment value (initial adjustment information), the drawing data created with a resolution of 800×600 corresponds to the liquid crystal display unit 31a at 1024. It is converted into gradation data having a resolution of ×768. The state of this conversion will be described with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 46A, the range defined by the solid line is the range of the resolution adjusting buffer 97a, and the range defined by the alternate long and short dash line is the range in which the transferred drawing data PD50 is written. When the resolution adjustment is performed on the drawing data PD50 with the resolution corresponding to the initial adjustment value, the drawing data PD50 is converted into the gradation data PD51 having the size shown in the range defined by the alternate long and two short dashes line. In this case, the number of pixels of the gradation data PD51 is the same as the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, and all the data forming the gradation data PD51 is output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal. That is, when converting to the resolution corresponding to the initial adjustment value, since the gradation data for all the dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is created by using all the pixels of the drawing data, The number of pixels of gradation data increases.

The initial adjustment value is set based on the initial setting process (FIG. 10) being executed by the display CPU 72, as described above. The area in the resolution adjusting buffer 97a to which the drawing data PD50 is transferred is always constant.

In the pachinko machine 10, the scaler 97 is used to perform the zoom-in effect on the image. In this zoom-in effect, the resolution adjustment value in the scaler 97 is set to the enlargement adjustment value. A plurality of enlargement adjustment values are set so that the corresponding resolutions are different, and each resolution is higher than the resolution of the initial adjustment value. The manner in which the drawing data is converted into the gradation data having the resolution corresponding to the predetermined adjustment value for enlargement will be described with reference to FIG.

When the resolution adjustment is performed on the drawing data PD52 indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 46(b) at the resolution corresponding to the adjustment value for enlargement, the gradation data of the size shown within the range divided by the alternate long and two short dashes line Converted to PD53. In this case, since the number of pixels of the gradation data PD53 is larger than the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a, it is not possible to output all the data forming the gradation data PD53 to the symbol display device 31 as image signals.

On the other hand, the range of the gradation data PD53 to be output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal is designated by the display CPU 72. At the time of this designation, the address of the dot serving as the drawing reference point is designated in the resolution adjusting buffer 97a, but the designation method is arbitrary as long as the designation can be performed well.

In the display circuit 94, when the drawing reference point is designated, the data in the range indicated by the broken line in FIG. 46(b) in the gradation data PD53 is output to the symbol display device 31 as an image signal. In this case, since the image signal is output by using some pixels of the drawing data, the image display on the symbol display device 31 is substantially performed with a part of the image corresponding to the drawing data being enlarged. Is done.

It should be noted that the drawing reference point corresponds to any of the dots at the four corners in the range that is the output target of the image signal, but which dot is the target is arbitrary. Further, the information capacity of the resolution adjusting buffer 97a is set to an information capacity capable of storing all pixels of the gradation data regardless of which enlargement adjustment value is used to convert the drawing data to the gradation data. Has been done.

A specific processing configuration for executing the zoom-in effect of an image using the scaler 97 will be described.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for zoom-in effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for zoom-in effect is shared and executed by the calculation processes of steps S615 to S617 in the task process (FIG. 15), but for convenience of description, it is shown here as a single flowchart.

First, in step S2601, the image data for background is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S2602, the parameter of the grasped background image data is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in the work RAM 73 in an area secured corresponding to the background image data. Update the control information.

In the following step S2603, the image data for effect is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S2604, the parameter of the grasped effect image data is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in the work RAM 73 in an area secured corresponding to the effect image data. Update the control information.

In a succeeding step S2605, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is the timing to expand the scaler 97 as compared with the initial adjustment value. If it is not the timing to enlarge, in step S2606, the image data for the symbol (that is, the symbol sprite data) is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S2607, the parameter of the grasped image data for the symbol is calculated and derived in accordance with that the scaler 97 is set to the initial adjustment value, and the information of the derived parameter is stored in the work RAM 73. The information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the image data for symbols. After that, this calculation process is terminated.

When the arithmetic processing for zoom-in effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), the drawing for drawing the image corresponding to the scaler 97 being set to the initial adjustment value. A list is created and sent to VDP 76.

On the other hand, when it is the timing to expand the scaler 97 compared to the initial adjustment value, in step S2608, information about the current adjustment value for enlargement is grasped. Information on each enlargement adjustment value is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance and transferred to the work RAM 73 by the timing required by the display CPU 72. Information on any of the enlargement adjustment values is set in the data table, and in step S2608, the information on the enlargement adjustment values shown in the currently set data table is grasped.

In a succeeding step S2609, information on the drawing reference point of this time is grasped. The information of the drawing reference point is set in one-to-one correspondence with the information of the adjustment value for enlargement. The information on each drawing reference point is stored in the NAND flash memory 102 in advance and transferred to the work RAM 73 by the timing required by the display CPU 72. Information on any of the drawing reference points is set in the data table, and in step S2609, the information on the drawing reference points shown in the currently set data table is grasped. In subsequent step S2610, zoom-in designation information is stored.

Then, in step S2611, the image data for the design is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S2612, the parameter of the grasped image data for the design is calculated and derived in accordance with that the scaler 97 is set to the adjustment value for enlargement of this time, and the information of the derived parameter is stored in the work RAM 73. In, the information for control is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the image data for the symbol. In this case, the coordinates and the size of the image data for the symbol are calculated so that the symbol display position and the symbol size on the display screen G are not changed between the pre-execution timing and the execution timing of the zoom-in effect.

Specifically, when the image data of the same size is resolution-adjusted by the scaler 97, the size of the resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value is larger than the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. Therefore, the size information of the image data for the design specified in the drawing list is the initial adjustment value so that the size after the resolution adjustment with the enlargement adjustment value will be the same as the size after the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. Is specified to be smaller than the case.

Further, when the resolution of the image data is adjusted by the scaler 97, the position of the image is displaced in the direction of enlargement in the resolution adjustment using the enlargement adjustment value as compared with the resolution adjustment using the initial adjustment value. Therefore, the coordinate information of the image data for the design specified in the drawing list is the initial adjustment value so that the position after the resolution adjustment with the adjustment value for enlargement is the same as the position after the resolution adjustment with the initial adjustment value. It is specified by displacing it in the direction opposite to the enlargement direction.

After executing the processing of step S2612, the present arithmetic processing is terminated. When the calculation process for zoom-in effect is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), an image corresponding to the scaler 97 being set to any of the enlargement adjustment values is drawn. A drawing list for creating is created and transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, the drawing list includes information on the adjustment value for enlargement, information on the drawing reference point, and zoom-in designation information indicating that the zoom-in effect should be performed. Further, with respect to the image data for symbols, parameter information corresponding to the enlargement adjustment value designated at the same time is set.

By the way, the number of pieces of image data for which adjustment for enlargement is performed on the parameter information as described above is equal to or less than the number of pieces of image data for which adjustment for enlargement is not performed.

Next, the setting process for the zoom-in effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The zoom-in effect setting process is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, when the zoom-in designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the zoom-in effect is executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the zoom-in designation information is set in association with the image data for symbols, the setting process for zoom-in effect is the drawing order of the image data for symbols in the drawing list this time. Will be started.

In the drawing order in the drawing list, since the background image data and the effect image data are set as an order prior to the pattern image data, the zoom-in effect setting process is executed. At the timing, the drawing of the background image data and the effect image data is completed.

First, in step S2701, the information of the enlargement adjustment value designated in the drawing list is set by writing it in the dedicated area of the register 92 (see FIG. 4). Here, the dedicated area is set as an area different from the area in which the information of the initial adjustment value is written. Therefore, even if the information of the adjustment value for enlargement is set, the information of the initial adjustment value is not erased.

In the following step S2702, the information of the drawing reference points designated in the drawing list is set by writing in the dedicated area of the register 92. Here, when the resolution adjustment is performed with the initial adjustment value, the drawing reference point corresponding to the initial adjustment value is predetermined in the display circuit 94 because it is sufficient to always set a constant drawing reference point.

In a succeeding step S2703, the enlargement flag is set in a predetermined area set in the register 92. When the display circuit 94 outputs an image signal by setting the enlargement flag, the resolution adjustment is performed with the enlargement adjustment value set in step S2701, and the resolution is set in step S2702. An image signal output target range is defined with reference to the drawing reference point. The enlargement flag is deleted based on an instruction from the display CPU 72 when the zoom-in effect is finished.

In a succeeding step S2704, the image data for the design designated as the current drawing target and the address to which the image data for the design is transferred in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 are grasped. Further, in step S2705, the parameters of the image data for symbols are grasped. Then, this setting process is completed.

By executing the setting process for zoom-in effect as described above, the drawing data created based on the drawing list specified this time is subjected to resolution adjustment with the corresponding enlargement adjustment value and converted into gradation data. The converted data is output as an image signal in a predetermined range based on the drawing reference point.

The output process executed by the display circuit 94 to output the image signal will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. The output process is started when an instruction to output an image signal is issued from the display CPU 72, and is substantially started at every image update start timing (for example, 20 msec).

First, in step S2801, it is determined whether the enlargement flag is set in the register 92. If the enlargement flag is not set, a linear interpolation process corresponding to the initial adjustment value is executed in step S2802. In this case, the information of the initial adjustment value is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the linear interpolation processing is executed according to the initial adjustment value. In the linear interpolation processing, in order to interpolate the increase in the number of pixels due to the increase in resolution, the numerical information (or pixel value) of each pixel after expansion is linearly calculated from the numerical information set for the four points of pixels before expansion. Bilinear interpolation is performed by interpolation. It should be noted that the bilinear interpolation is not executed collectively for all pixels, but is sequentially executed for each predetermined number of pixels.

In a succeeding step S2803, it is determined whether or not the conversion into the gradation data is completed, and if the conversion is not completed, the process returns to the step S2802. If it is completed, in step S2804, the dot to be output is grasped based on a predetermined initial reference point.

After that, in step S2805, after the image signal output process is executed, the main output process is ended. In the image signal output processing, the image signals for the dots recognized in step S2804 are sequentially output.

On the other hand, if the enlargement flag is set (step S2801: YES), in step S2806, linear interpolation processing corresponding to the enlargement adjustment value currently specified is executed. In this case, the information of the enlargement adjustment value is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the linear interpolation processing is executed according to the enlargement adjustment value. The details of the linear interpolation processing are as already described.

In a succeeding step S2807, it is determined whether or not the conversion into the gradation data is completed, and if the conversion is not completed, the process returns to the step S2806. If it has been completed, in step S2808, the drawing reference point specified this time is grasped from the dedicated area of the register 92, and the dot to be output is grasped based on the grasped drawing reference point.

After that, in step S2805, after the image signal output process is executed, the main output process is ended. In the image signal output process, the image signals for the dots recognized in step S2808 are sequentially output.

Next, the zoom-in effect will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the zoom-in effect. Further, FIG. 50A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the image at the image update timing immediately before the zoom-in effect is performed, and FIG. 50B is the image update timing next to the image update timing and is the zoom-in timing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image of the timing when the production was started.

As shown in FIG. 50(a), immediately before the zoom-in effect is performed, the character CH6 is displayed in the front of the background image PC15 and near the center thereof, and the symbols CH7 and CH8 are displayed in the upper left and upper right. ing. The image is in the reach display with the symbols CH7 and CH8, and the character CH6 is displayed as an effect of the reach display. When the image is displayed, each image data is drawn in the output target frame areas 82a and 82b with the same relative size and relative position as in FIG.

At the next image update timing in the above state, the zoom-in effect is started. In this case, each image data is drawn in the output target frame areas 82a and 82b with the relative size and relative position as shown in FIG. 50(b-1). As shown in FIG. 50(b-2), resolution adjustment is performed on the drawing data with the enlargement adjustment value and the image signal is output based on the area grasped with the drawing reference point as a reference. Images are displayed.

In the image, the background image PC15 and the character CH6 are enlarged so as to zoom in on the character CH6 as compared with the image in FIG. On the other hand, the positions and sizes of the symbols CH7 and CH8 are the same, substantially the same, or similar to the positions and sizes in the case of FIG. 50(a).

By the way, when the same line of the character CH6 is compared, in the state of FIG. 50(a), the line is displayed with the gradation (and color) as shown in FIG. 50(c-1), while in FIG. In the state of b-2), the lines are displayed with the gradation (and color) as shown in FIG. 50(c-2).

Further, by displaying the image shown in FIG. 50(b-2) and then the image shown in FIG. 50(a), the VDP 76 only returns to the resolution adjustment based on the initial adjustment value. Is displayed as if zoomed out. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 can perform not only the zoom-in effect using the scaler 97 but also the zoom-out effect using the scaler 97. Further, as already described, since a plurality of combinations of the enlargement adjustment value and the drawing reference point are set, the zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect can be performed in stages.

As described above, the scaler 97 can be used to perform the zoom-in effect, and the zoom-out effect can be performed by returning the zoomed-in state to the initial state. For example, a similar zoom-in effect can be performed by drawing each image data in an enlarged state when drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b. In this case, all the image data to be drawn in the VDP 76 is enlarged. It becomes necessary to execute processing, and the processing load on the VDP 76 increases. Further, for example, a configuration may be considered in which the image data for normal size and the image data for enlarged size are set in advance for the same image, but in this case, it is necessary to store the image data. This leads to an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, by performing the zoom-in effect using the scaler 97, the processing for enlarging and displaying the image is performed by the display circuit 94 instead of the control unit 91 of the VDP 76. Therefore, the zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect can be performed while suppressing the influence on the processing load of the control unit 91 and the influence on the storage capacity required for storing the image data.

Further, the size of the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b is the same regardless of whether or not the zoom-in effect is performed. This makes it possible to create drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b with the same processing configuration whether the zoom-in effect is performed or not.

Further, in the display circuit 94, when zoom-in effect is not performed, resolution adjustment is performed with a specified initial adjustment value, and a range in which an image signal is output is grasped with reference to a predetermined initial reference point. In, when the zoom-in effect is performed, only the adjustment value and the reference point that are referred to are changed. Therefore, the zoom-in effect can be performed while using the hardware configuration of the display circuit 94 when the zoom-in effect is not performed.

Further, even when the zoom-in effect is performed, the symbols are not displayed in an enlarged manner. As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the symbols from being lowered when the zoom-in effect is performed. In particular, the display CPU 72 specifies the parameter of the image data for the design as a parameter that is not enlarged and the VDP 76 only needs to draw the image data for the design according to the parameter, so that the processing load of the VDP 76 is suppressed, It is possible to improve the visibility of the design.

Further, when the zoom-in effect is finished, the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is returned to the initial adjustment value. As a result, when the zoom-in effect is finished, the display of the image according to the resolution of the display screen G can be restarted.

The display circuit 94 may be configured to execute the process corresponding to the output process (FIG. 49) only by the operation of the hardware circuit without using the program. Further, the display circuit 94 may not be built in the VDP 76 but may be provided separately from the VDP 76. In this case, the display circuit 94 may be provided on the signal path between the VDP 76 and the symbol display device 31, and the signal path is provided between the VRAM 75 and the symbol display device 31 separately from the signal path. The display circuit 94 may be provided above.

Further, the initial adjustment value and the enlargement adjustment value may be written in the same area of the register 92. In this case, after the zoom-in effect, it is preferable to execute the process of returning the information of the area to the initial adjustment value. The processing may be performed based on the designation from the display CPU 72, or may be performed independently in the VDP 76.

The initial reference point may be set in the register 92 when setting the initial adjustment value in the register 92. In this case, the area in which the initial reference point is set and the area in which the drawing reference point is set may be set separately, and these pieces of information may be set in the same area. When it is configured to be set in the same area, it is preferable to execute a process of returning the information of the area to the initial reference point after the zoom-in effect. The processing may be performed based on the designation from the display CPU 72, or may be performed independently in the VDP 76.

Further, the image data for which the adjustment for enlargement is performed on the parameter information is not limited to the image data for the symbol, and may be the image data for a predetermined effect or the image data for the background. .. In this case, for example, for the effect character that is not the enlargement target, the adjustment for enlargement may be performed so that at least the entire character is displayed, and the adjustment for enlargement is performed so that at least the position does not change. It may be configured.

In addition to the scaler 97, a circuit may be provided for adjusting the size of the drawing data in order to perform a zoom-in effect or a zoom-out effect.

Further, when the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is the initial adjustment value, only a part of the drawing data may be output as an image signal. In this case, when the adjustment value of the scaler 97 is set to the reduction adjustment value, the range output as the image signal in the drawing data is widened so that the zoom from the state displayed with the initial adjustment value is performed. It is possible to perform out production.

Further, when the zoom-in effect is performed, the background image PC15 and the character CH6 to be zoomed-in may be gradually enlarged over a plurality of image update times. In this case, it is advisable to prepare a plurality of enlargement adjustment values for the scaler 97 and to change the adjustment values stepwise so that the enlargement rate gradually increases. Further, according to the adjustment value for each enlargement, by setting the coordinates of the image data for the symbol and the parameter of the scale, when the zoom-in effect is performed so that the image is gradually enlarged, the symbol is obtained at each stage. You can prevent it from being enlarged.

<Direction using moving image data>
Next, an effect using moving image data will be described.

The moving image data is image data which has been compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with one frame of still image data as a reference and which has been encoded by the MPEG2 system, for example. When the moving image data is decoded, it is expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames.

The moving image data set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 51A to 51C, moving image data PD54 before branching, moving image data PD55 for branching A, and moving image data PD56 for branching B are provided as moving image data. , Are set. The moving image data PD54 to PD56 are set to perform super reach display that develops after reach display or without intervening normal reach display among reach displays.

In each of the moving image data PD54 to PD56, the file data is set at the first address, and the compressed data of each frame is set subsequently to the file data. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame.

The compressed data is one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

The I picture data is data that can be used to create one frame of still image data by itself when decoding. The P picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data preceding by one frame or a plurality of frames at the time of decoding. .. When decoding B picture data, bidirectional prediction is performed by referring to I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before and I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames after decoding. This is data for which still image data for one frame can be created.

In the compressed data of each moving image data PD54 to PD56, I picture data is set as the data of the first frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the second frame,..., M-1 frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the mth frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m+1th frame,..., The n−1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

The contents of the images set in the moving image data PD54 to PD56 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52(a) shows a part of the image set in the moving image data PD54 before branching, and FIG. 52(b) is set in the moving image data PD55 for branching A. FIG. 52C shows the content of part of the image, and FIG. 52C shows the content of part of the image set in the moving image data PD56 for B after branching.

As shown in FIG. 52(a-1), the moving image data for pre-branching PD54 is superimposed on the background image for pre-branching PC16 showing a wavy state, and the moving target character which is a boy character. Reference data (I picture data) PD57 corresponding to the image to which CH9 is added is set. As shown in FIGS. 52(a-2) and 52(a-3), the difference data (P picture) corresponding to an image which does not have the background image PC16 but in which the movement target character CH9 moves in a predetermined direction Data, B picture data) PD58 and PD59 are set. One frame of still image data is created by the reference data PD57, and the difference data PD58 and PD59 are applied to the reference data PD57, so that the difference data PD58, and the background image PC16 set in the reference data PD57. One frame of still image data to which the moving target character CH9 set in the PD 59 is added is created.

In the moving image data PD55 for A after branching, as shown in FIG. 52(b-1), the same boy character is overlaid on the background image PC17 for A after branching in which many jellyfish are shown. Reference data (I picture data) PD60 corresponding to an image to which a certain moving target character CH9 is added is set. As shown in FIGS. 52(b-2) and 52(b-3), the difference data (P picture Data, B picture data) PD61 and PD62 are set. One frame of still image data is created by the reference data PD60, and the difference data PD61 and PD62 are applied to the reference data PD60, so that the difference data PD61 is set for the background image PC17 set in the reference data PD60. , One frame of still image data to which the movement target character CH9 set in the PD 62 is added is created.

In the moving image data PD56 for B after branching, as shown in FIG. 52(c-1), the same boy character is overlaid on the background image PC18 for B after branching in which many fish are shown. Reference data (I picture data) PD63 corresponding to the image to which a certain moving target character CH9 is added is set. Further, as shown in FIGS. 52(c-2) and 52(c-3), the difference data (P picture) corresponding to an image which does not have the background image PC18 but in which the movement target character CH9 moves in a predetermined direction Data, B picture data) PD64 and PD65 are set. One frame of still image data is created by the reference data PD63, and the difference data PD64 and PD65 are applied to the reference data PD63, so that the difference data PD64 is set for the background image PC18 set in the reference data PD63. , One frame of still image data to which the moving target character CH9 set in the PD 65 is added is created.

Using each of the moving image data PD54 to PD56, the super reach display corresponding to the effect branch is executed. Specifically, when the super reach display is started, the pre-branch effect is executed by each still image data created from the pre-branching moving image data PD54.

After that, depending on the branch timing, either the post-branch A effect or the post-branch B effect is selected. In the selection, the post-branch A production is selected when the effect operation device 48 is operated at the determination timing before the branch timing, and the effect operation device 48 is not operated at the determination timing. After branching, the effect for B is selected. When the post-branch A effect is selected, the post-branch A effect is executed by each still image data created from the post-branch A moving image data PD55. On the other hand, when the post-branch B effect is selected, the post-branch B effect is executed by each still image data created from the post-branch B moving image data PD56.

It should be noted that the specific trigger for selecting either the post-branch A effect or the post-branch B effect is not limited to the above, and the effect operation device 48 operates in the specific operation mode at the determination timing. When it is operated, when the production operating device 48 is operated for a specific number of times or for a specific period at the determination timing, or is determined in advance from the start of the current super reach display to the branch timing. When one or a plurality of game balls have entered the ball entering portion, one of the effects may be selected.

A specific processing configuration for performing super reach display using the moving image data PD54 to PD56 will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for a moving image executed by the display CPU 72. The moving image calculation process is executed in the background calculation process of step S615 in the task process (FIG. 15). The arithmetic processing for the moving image is started when the data table corresponding to the game times in which the super reach display is performed is set.

First, in step S2901, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is after the branch timing. If it is the timing before branching, in step S2902, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the pre-branching effect is being executed.

If the pre-branching effect is not being executed, it means that the timing is before the start timing of the above-mentioned super reach display, and therefore the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to decode the moving image data PD54 before branching.

If it is the timing to decode the moving image data PD54 before branching, in step S2904, various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table. Specifically, in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, the address to which the moving image data PD54 before branching is transferred in advance and the moving image data PD54 before branching are decoded to generate still image data for a plurality of frames. When created, the address of the area for storing the still image data in the change area 81b is grasped.

Thereafter, in step S2905, the decode designation information for before branching is stored. Incidentally, the timing determined in step S2903 is set so that the decoding of the moving image data PD54 for pre-branch is completed before the pre-branch effect is started.

When a negative determination is made in step S2903, or after the execution of step S2905, in step S2906, arithmetic processing corresponding to the timing before the pre-branching effect is generated is executed. Specifically, the image data for background is grasped based on the currently set data table, and various parameters of the image data are calculated to update the control information. After that, this calculation process is terminated.

When the moving image calculation process is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S408), the background image data in the image corresponding to the timing before the pre-branching effect occurs is drawn. A drawing list including the above is created and transmitted to the VDP 76. Further, when the arithmetic processing this time is the timing for designating the decoding of the pre-branching moving image data PD54, the decoding designation information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the above-described pre-branching moving image data PD54 are performed. Information of various addresses is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S2902 that the pre-branching effect is being executed, the process advances to step S2907. In step S2907, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to decode the post-branching moving image data PD55 and PD56.

If it is the timing to decode the post-branching moving image data PD55, PD56, it is determined in step S2908 whether the decoding target is the post-branching A moving image data PD55. Specifically, in the data table, a key for determining whether or not the performance operation device 48 has been operated at the determination timing before the branch timing is set, and when the key is confirmed, Determines whether or not a flag indicating that the operation device for production 48 has been operated is set in the work RAM 73. Incidentally, the flag is set in the command corresponding process in step S403 when the reception of the operation generation command is confirmed in step S402 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11) of the display CPU 72. In step S2908, an affirmative determination is made when a flag indicating that the operation device for performance 48 has been operated is set, and a negative determination is made when the flag is not set.

When the decoding target is the moving image data PD55 for A after branching (step S2908: YES), various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table in step S2909. Specifically, in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, the address to which the moving image data PD55 for A after branching is transferred in advance, and the moving image data PD55 for A after branching are decoded and still images for a plurality of frames When the data is created, the address of the area for storing the still image data in the expansion buffer 81 is grasped. Then, in step S2910, the decode designation information for A after branch is stored.

On the other hand, when the decoding target is the moving image data PD56 for B after branch (step S2908: NO), various addresses are grasped based on the currently set data table in step S2911. Specifically, in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, an address to which the moving image data PD56 for B after branching is transferred in advance, and the moving image data PD56 for B after branching are decoded and still images for a plurality of frames When the data is created, the address of the area for storing the still image data in the expansion buffer 81 is grasped. Then, in step S2912, the decode designation information for A after branch is stored.

By the way, the timing determined in step S2907 is set so that the decoding of the target post-branching moving image data PD55 and PD56 is completed before any one of the post-branching effects is started.

When a negative determination is made in step S2907, or after the execution of step S2910 or step S2912, the process proceeds to step S2913. In step S2913, the address where the still image data corresponding to the frame number of this time is stored in the still image data created from the moving image data before branching is grasped. This address is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S2914, the parameter of the still image data is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the still image data to update the control information. To do. After that, in step S2915, the moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the moving image data is used is stored, and then the present arithmetic processing is ended.

When the moving image arithmetic processing is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), still image data created from the moving image data before branching is included as a drawing target and A drawing list in which the parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76. In addition, when the arithmetic processing this time is the timing for designating the decoding of the moving image data PD55 for A after branching, the decoding designation information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the moving image data PD55 for branching A are set in the decoding designating information. Information on the above various addresses is set in the drawing list. On the other hand, if the arithmetic processing this time is the timing for designating the decoding of the moving image data PD56 for B after branch, the decode designation information indicating that the decoding should be performed and the moving image data PD56 for B after branch are set. Information on the above various addresses is set in the drawing list.

Since the background image and the effect image are mixed in the still image data, it is not necessary to set the effect image separately from the still image data. Therefore, when the still image data is set as the drawing target, the effect calculation process of step S616 is skipped. However, since the symbol is displayed separately from the still image data, the symbol calculation process is not skipped. Therefore, when the still image data is set in the drawing list, the image data for symbols is also set in the drawing list. This is the same in other cases where still image data is set in the drawing list.

When it is determined in step S2901 that the timing is after the branch timing, the process proceeds to step S2916. In step S2916, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not the effect to be executed is the after-branch A effect. By the way, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2908, data corresponding to the after-branch A effect is set as data to be referred to after branching in the data table, and when a negative determination is made, in the data table. As data to be referred to after branching, data corresponding to the after-branch B effect is set.

If the effect to be executed is the after-branch A effect, the process proceeds to step S2917. In step S2917, of the still image data created from the moving image data for A after branching, the address where the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored is grasped. This address is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S2918, the parameter of the still image data is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in the area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the still image data to update the control information. To do. After that, in step S2919, after the moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the moving image data is used is stored, the present arithmetic processing is ended.

When the arithmetic processing for moving images is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), still image data created from the moving image data for A after branch is included as a drawing target, and A drawing list in which the parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

If the effect to be executed is the after-branch B effect, the process proceeds to step S2920. In step S2920, of the still image data created from the moving image data for B after branch, the address at which the still image data corresponding to the current frame number is stored is grasped. This address is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S2921, the parameter of the still image data is calculated and derived, and the information of the derived parameter is written in an area secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the still image data to update the control information. To do. After that, in step S2922, after the moving image designation information indicating that the still image data created from the moving image data is used is stored, the present arithmetic processing is ended.

When the arithmetic processing for moving images is executed as described above, in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S408), still image data created from the moving image data for B after branch is included as a drawing target, and A drawing list in which the parameters of the still image data are set is created and transmitted to the VDP 76.

Next, the decoding process executed by the video decoder 93 of the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The decoding process is started when any of the decoding designation information is set in the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72. The decoding process is activated asynchronously with the drawing process (FIG. 13) executed by the control unit 91 of the VDP 76 and the output process (FIG. 49) executed by the display circuit 94.

First, in step S3001, the address of the moving image data currently specified is grasped from the information of the transfer destination address specified in the drawing list. In the following step S3002, the area of the expansion destination of the moving image data is grasped from the information of the expansion destination address specified in the drawing list.

In subsequent step S3003, the moving image data is read from the address recognized in step S3001 and the moving image data is decoded. Then, each still image data of the decoding result is written in each area of the address grasped in step S3002. Then, this decoding process is terminated.

Next, the moving image setting process executed by the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The moving image setting process is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13). Further, when the moving image designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the moving image is executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the moving image designation information is set in association with the still image data to be drawn, the setting process for moving images is based on the drawing order of the still image data in the drawing list this time. It will be started when it becomes.

In the drawing order in the drawing list, since the still image data is set as an order prior to the image data for the pattern, after the setting process for the moving image is executed and the still image data is drawn. , A pattern is drawn.

First, in step S3101, information on the address where the still image data to be set this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list. In the following step S3102, the still image data to be drawn this time is grasped from the address information grasped in step S3101. In a succeeding step S3103, the parameter of the still image data is grasped from the information set in the drawing list. Then, this setting process is completed.

Since the moving image setting process is executed as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S505), still image data is applied to the frame regions 82a and 82b to be rendered with the parameters applied. Is drawn. Further, since the image data for the symbol is also set in the drawing list this time, the image data for the symbol is drawn so that the symbol is displayed in front of the still image corresponding to the still image data. .. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 31 based on the drawing data, so that an image for one frame forming the super reach display is displayed on the display screen G.

As described above, since a series of images corresponding to the super reach display is displayed using the moving image data PD54 to PD56, the images of each frame of the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are individually set as still image data. Compared with the configuration for storing, the above-mentioned super reach display is performed using a live-action image or a high-definition image while suppressing the storage capacity required for storing the image data in the NAND flash memory 102. be able to.

In the super reach display, the pre-branch effect is performed until the branch timing, and after the branch timing, the content of the destination effect is switched according to the operation mode of the effect operation device 48. As a result, it is possible to suppress the super reach display from becoming uniform, and it is possible to provide various effects.

In this case, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are the moving image data PD54 for pre-branch corresponding to the effect before branching, the moving image data PD55 for A after branching corresponding to the effect for A after branching, and B after branching. It is set separately for the post-branching B moving image data PD56 corresponding to the production effect. Therefore, until the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the moving image data PD54 for before branching is simply drawn sequentially in the frame order set in the moving image data PD54. Pre-production can be performed. After the branch timing, still image data created by decoding the side corresponding to the execution target of the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for both branches is set in the moving image data PD55 and PD56. The target post-branch effect can be performed only by sequentially drawing in the same frame order.

When still image data for multiple frames is created by decoding from moving image data, it is necessary to draw each still image data in the frame order set in the moving image data. It is difficult to cope with the above branch in moving image data. Further, both the single moving image data in which the pre-branching effect and the post-branching A effect are set and the single moving image data in which the pre-branching effect and the post-branch B effect are set are prepared in advance It is also possible to put it in a configuration. However, since it is necessary to output the moving image data from the still image data corresponding to the first order frame, it is difficult to output the still image data from the middle order frame. Then, when super-reach display is started, it becomes necessary to decode both moving image data. In this case, it is feared that the processing load of the VDP 76 will increase, and it is necessary to increase the storage capacity of the VRAM 75. Compared to each of the assumed configurations, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are separately prepared as described above, so that the moving image data PD54 to PD56 to be used is switched according to the situation up to the branch timing. Since it suffices to do so, it is possible to preferably execute the super reach display as described above.

When the super reach display is started, the moving image data PD54 before branching is decoded, and the moving image data PD55 for A after branching and the moving image data PD56 for B after branching are decoded. Do not decode. As a result, the processing load at the time of starting the super reach display can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which all the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are collectively decoded.

In addition, the determination as to which of the post-branch A effect and the post-branch B effect is to be performed is performed before the branch timing before the branch timing, and before the branch timing. Of the moving image data PD55 for A and the moving image data PD56 for B after branching, only the moving image data corresponding to the effect of the sorting destination is decoded. As a result, it is possible to smoothly start the display of a new moving image after the completion of the pre-branching effect. Further, as compared with the configuration in which both moving image data for post-branch are decoded, the processing load related to decoding is suppressed, and the storage capacity required for decoding in the VRAM 75 is reduced.

In addition, even if the configuration in which the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are separately stored as described above is applied to an effect different from the effect in which the effect at the destination is arbitrarily selected according to the situation up to the branch timing. Good. For example, in a configuration in which a first effect (first reach display) and a second effect (second reach display) that are common from the start timing to the middle and have different aspects from the middle are set, The configuration may include first moving image data for displaying an image from the start to the middle, and second moving image data and third moving image data corresponding to the mode from the middle. In this case, since the first moving image data can be commonly used, the entire data capacity can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the entire moving image data is individually provided for each effect.

Further, for example, as the display effect, only the normal reach display is performed, the first super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, and the second super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed. In the configuration in which the case is set, moving image data for normal reach display, moving image data for first super reach display, and moving image data for second super reach display are set. It may be configured. In this case, in the game time for performing normal reach display, still image data created from moving image data for normal reach display may be sequentially displayed. Further, in the game time in which the first super reach display is performed after the normal reach display is performed, after the still image data created from the normal reach display moving image data is sequentially displayed, the first super reach display moving image is displayed. Still image data created from the data may be sequentially displayed. Also, in the game time in which the second super-reach display is performed after the normal reach display, the still image data created from the normal-reach display moving image data is sequentially displayed, and then the second super-reach display moving image is displayed. Still image data created from the data may be sequentially displayed.

According to this configuration, moving image data for normal reach display may be commonly used in each of the game times for performing the first super reach display and the game times for performing the second super reach display. It is possible to suppress the entire data capacity as compared with the configuration in which the content of the normal reach display is included in each of the moving image data of the super reach display and the moving image data of the second super reach display.

Further, as the display effect, a configuration in which the after-branch A effect is performed without the before-branch effect is set, and the after-branch B effect is performed without the before-branch effect. May be set. Even with the configuration in which these display effects are set, moving image data PD55 for A after branching is set separately from moving image data PD54 for before branching, and similarly, moving image for branching before. Since the moving image data PD56 for B after branching is set separately from the image data PD54, the effect can be started in the unit of effect for A after branching, and the effect is produced in the unit of effect for B after branching. You can start.

Further, as described above, a configuration in which I picture data, which is reference data, is present for each predetermined effect period may be applied to a series of effects in which branching does not occur. For example, when a series effect for the whole is started, in a configuration in which a series of moving images is displayed over the effect period for the whole, the first effect corresponding to the front side in the effect period for the whole. The first moving image data and the second moving image data may be individually set in the period and the second effect period corresponding to the period behind the period. In this case, by using the first moving image data and the second moving image data, it is possible to perform a series of effects for the whole, and to perform the second effect period without the first effect period. It is possible to produce a performance. By the way, in the above-mentioned overall series production, a predetermined character may move in front of a predetermined background. In this case, in both the first moving image data and the second moving image data, the I picture is displayed. A predetermined background image is set in the data.

In addition, the form after the pre-branching effect or after the common effect is not limited to two patterns, and may be three patterns, four patterns, or five patterns or more. In this case, the effect of individually having the moving image data PD54 to PD56 as described above is further enhanced.

Further, the moving picture decoder 93 may be configured to execute the processing corresponding to the decoding processing (FIG. 54A) only by the operation of the hardware circuit without using the program. Further, the video decoder 93 may not be built in the VDP 76 but may be provided separately from the VDP 76. In this case, the moving picture decoder 93 may be provided on the signal path between the VDP 76 and the symbol display device 31, and the signal path is provided between the VRAM 75 and the symbol display device 31 separately from the signal path. The moving picture decoder 93 may be provided above.

Further, in the configuration in which the timing for determining the effect after the branch is the same as or close to the timing for the branch, the moving image data PD55 for the after-branch A and the data for the after-branch B for the period during which the before-branch effect is executed. A configuration may also be adopted in which both of the moving image data PD56 are decoded.

Further, the configuration using a plurality of types of moving image data as described above may be applied to the jackpot effect or the notice effect before the reach, instead of the reach effect.

<Regarding the composition for drawing the ground color and the composition for switching the ground color>
Next, a configuration related to drawing of the background color and a configuration related to switching of the background color will be described.

The ground color is a color that is initially set as a color displayed on the entire display screen G, and specifically, initial numerical value information that is set as an initial value in the unit area of each of the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75. Is a color corresponding to.

Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of display modes in which the display modes of the display screen G are different from each other are set. The display mode is a state in which the type of the standby image displayed until the game time is started or the type of the game time image displayed when the game time is being executed is set to a predetermined type. A first display mode and a second display mode are set as a plurality of types of display modes.

In the first display mode and the second display mode, the display mode of the background image displayed on the display screen G, the character displayed during the effect, and the like are different. The background image is displayed on the entire display screen G. Specifically, the background image is set to be the same as or larger than the drawing range PL2 (see FIG. 14) and a still image in which detailed illustrations are drawn. And the background individual image displayed on the front side of the backmost image. The rearmost image is set so that the basic color is different between the first display mode and the second display mode. Specifically, the basic color of the rearmost image in the first display mode is set to "blue", and the basic color of the rearmost image in the second display mode is set to "white". ..

Here, in the initial state when the power is turned on or reset, the display mode is set to the first display mode, and the ground color is set to “blue” corresponding to the rearmost image in the first display mode. Thus, by displaying the ground color when the power is turned on, it is possible to perform an inspection for confirming whether or not there is a missing dot on the display screen G.

Also, the display mode is adapted to be switched in a predetermined case. Examples of the predetermined case include a case where the operation section of the effect operation device 48 is operated in a situation where the game times and the opening/closing execution mode are not executed, a case where a specific effect is performed, and the like. When the display mode is switched, the background color is also switched along with the switching of the display mode.

A specific processing configuration of the background color switching accompanying the drawing and display mode switching using the background color as the background will be described below.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart for executing the operation generation command corresponding process executed by the display CPU 72. The operation occurrence command handling process is executed by the command handling process of step S403 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, in step S3201, it is determined whether an operation generation command for mode switching has been received from the sound emission control device 60. If it has not been received, this operation command handling process is terminated, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S3202.

In step S3202, the display mode counter is updated. The display mode counter is a counter for the display CPU 72 to specify the current display mode, and is provided in the work RAM 73. A counter value is set in the display mode counter in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. In the present embodiment, since two types of display modes, the first display mode and the second display mode, are set, the counter value corresponds to the value “0” corresponding to the first display mode and the second display mode. The value of “1” is set.

Here, in the initial setting process of the display mode in step S308 of the initial setting process (FIG. 10), the initial value of the counter for the display mode is set to "0", so that the supply of operating power to the display CPU 72 is started. When the pachinko machine 10 is reset or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the display mode is set to the first display mode.

After that, in step S3203, a background color switching process for switching the background color to a color corresponding to the display mode is executed. Specifically, the initial numerical value information stored in the area for ground color adjustment in the register 92 of the VDP 76 is updated to the color information corresponding to the display mode switched this time. That is, the display mode is identified with reference to the display mode counter updated in step S3202, and if the identification result is the first display mode, the initial numerical value information is set to the color information of “blue”. To do. On the other hand, if the specific result is the second display mode, the initial numerical value information is set to the color information of "white". Then, this operation generation command response processing is ended.

Here, in the background color initial adjustment process of step S309 of the initial setting process (FIG. 10), since the color information of “blue” is set as the initial numerical value information, when the supply of the operating power to the VDP 76 is started. Alternatively, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the ground color is set to “blue”.

Next, the calculation processing for the display mode background executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The calculation processing for the display mode background is executed in the background calculation processing of step S615 in the task processing (FIG. 15).

First, in step S3301, the display mode counter provided in the work RAM 73 is referenced to determine whether or not the display mode is the first display mode. In the case of the first display mode, it is determined in step S3301 whether or not to draw the backmost image. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the drawing process of the backmost image is set in the currently set data table.

Here, of the data tables, the data table with the large processing load does not include the drawing processing of the backmost image. A data table having a large processing load is, specifically, a drawing list including background data corresponding to the backmost image because a large number of image data to be drawn are set in an image for one frame. Is a data table that can affect the operation of the display CPU 72 even if the display CPU 72 fails or does not fail. It should be noted that whether or not the processing load is large, that is, whether or not to include the drawing process of the rearmost image in the data table is determined and set in advance in the development stage of creating the data table. Further, depending on the data table, the backmost image may not be set over the entire frame, or the backmost image may not be set partially over a plurality of frames with a relatively large processing load. is there. That is, when attention is paid in frame units (image update timing units), a plurality of types of individual images including the backmost image as one frame image in the data table are set as drawing targets in the first frame ( In the second frame (second update timing) in which the processing load related to the display of the individual images excluding the backmost image is larger than that in the first update timing), the drawing processing of the backmost image is not set. Can also be said.

If it is determined that the drawing process for the backmost image has been set, the process advances to step S3303 to grasp the first backmost image to be updated this time based on the currently set data tail. In a succeeding step S3304, various parameters of the grasped first rearmost image are calculated and derived, and information of the derived parameters is written in the work RAM 73 in an area secured corresponding to the rearmost image. Information for Then, it progresses to step S3305.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the bottom image is not drawn, that is, if the drawing process for the bottom image is not set, the process proceeds to step S3305 without executing the processes of steps S3303 and S3304.

In step S3305, the background update target sprite data corresponding to the first display mode is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S3306, various parameters of the grasped sprite data are calculated to update the control information.

If the display mode is the second display mode, a negative decision is made in step S3301 and the operation proceeds to step S3307. In step S3307, it is determined whether to draw the bottom image. If it is determined that the bottom image is not drawn, the process proceeds to step S3310. If it is determined that the back image is drawn, the process proceeds to step S3308, and the current update target is set based on the currently set data table. Of the second rearmost image of. In a succeeding step S3309, various parameters of the grasped second backmost image are calculated to update the control information. Then, the process proceeds to step S3310.

In step S3310, the background update target sprite data corresponding to the second display mode is grasped. Then, in step S3311, various parameters of the grasped background sprite data are calculated to update the control information.

After the process of step S3306 or step S3311, the process proceeds to step S3312, the process of storing the background designation information is performed, and the present arithmetic process ends.

After the background calculation process is executed, the effect calculation process (step S616 in FIG. 15) and the symbol calculation process (step S617 in FIG. 15) are executed. Then, a drawing list is created in the drawing list output process (step S408).

Here, the drawing list of FIG. 57 will be described for the drawing list when it is determined that the bottom image is not drawn, that is, for the drawing list created based on the data table in which the drawing process of the bottom image is not set. As shown in the explanatory diagram, background data corresponding to the rearmost image is not set, and only sprite data is set. Based on the drawing list, the content grasping process shown in step S504 of the drawing process (FIG. 13) is executed, and the writing process is executed in step S505 based on the grasping result of the process.

The write processing of step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S3401, it is determined whether it is the timing to start drawing data creation. Specifically, it is determined whether it is the timing to start writing the image data set first in the drawing list. If it is not the creation start timing, it means that drawing data is being created. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3404, and if it is the creation start timing, the process proceeds to step S3402.

In steps S3402 and S3403, a process of initializing the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation target is executed. Specifically, the ground color is recognized in step S3402. In detail, the area in which the initial numerical value information of the register 92 is stored is accessed to grasp the initial numerical value information at the present time. Since the initial numerical value information is stored in the register 92, it is not necessary to perform the reading process from the memory or the like. As a result, the access speed is higher than that of the configuration in which the reading process from the memory or the like is performed.

After that, in step S3403, the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation target are initialized. Specifically, the numerical information of all the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation target is updated to the initial numerical information grasped in step S3402. As a result, all the numerical information of the unit area is once set to the initial numerical information, so that the stored numerical information relating to the previous drawing data is erased. Then, it progresses to step S3404.

In step S3404, image data writing processing is executed. Specifically, image data is written based on the grasping result of the contents grasping process (FIG. 13) in step S504. Specifically, the numerical information of the unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation target is sequentially updated from the initial numerical information to the numerical information corresponding to the grasped result. The image data writing process is repeatedly executed until writing of all the sprite data set in the drawing list is completed. Here, when the background data is not set in the drawing list, the numerical information of the unit area at the place where the sprite data is set in the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation target is updated, while the sprite data is updated. The numerical information of the unit area in the area where is not set is not updated, and the initial numerical information is maintained.

An image displayed on the display screen G when the rearmost image is not drawn will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an image displayed on the display screen G when the bottom image is drawn, and FIG. 59(b) is displayed on the display screen G when the bottom image is not drawn. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image displayed. For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the display mode is the first display mode. In this case, the background color is set to "blue".

When the background data is set in the drawing list, the numerical information of each unit area is updated from the initial numerical information to the numerical information corresponding to the background data in the background data writing process. After that, the numerical information of the unit area where the sprite data is set is sequentially updated from the numerical information corresponding to the background data to the numerical information corresponding to the sprite data. As a result, as shown in FIG. 59(a), the rearmost image PPC0 corresponding to the background data in the first display mode is displayed on the entire display screen G, and the first display is performed on the front side of the rearmost image PPC0. The individual images PPC1 to PPC4 corresponding to the mode sprite data are displayed.

On the other hand, when the background data is not set in the drawing list, the numerical information of the unit area where sprite data is not set remains the initial numerical information, so the background color is displayed at the location corresponding to the unit area. Will be done. As a result, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the individual images PPC5 to PPC13 corresponding to the sprite data in the first display mode are displayed with the background color as the background. In this case, as compared with FIG. 59(a), the illustration drawn on the backmost image PPC0 is not displayed, but the background color to be displayed and the basic tone of the backmost image PPC0 in the first display mode. Since the same color is used, the difference between the two is less noticeable. In the second display mode, the background color is set to "white", which is the color that is the basis of the rearmost image in the second display mode. Therefore, the background color is the same as in the first display mode. The difference between the images displayed on the display screen and those displayed on the screen is not noticeable.

Here, in order to diversify the display mode such as effect effects, it is preferable that a large number of sprite data are drawn. In this case, the processing load required to create the entire drawing list becomes large, and there is a concern that the display CPU 72 may lose processing. In particular, it is necessary to update the image in a cycle of 20 msec, and the drawing list created based on the processing result of the task processing is transmitted to the VDP 76, and the VDP 76 further receives one frame based on the received drawing list. This is performed by creating drawing data corresponding to the minute image and outputting the drawing data to the display screen G as an image. Then, in the task process of creating the drawing list, the drawing data corresponding to the image for one frame is created based on the drawing list for the period required for creating the drawing list and receiving it by the VDP 76 for 20 msec. And must be completed in a shorter period than the period required for transmission.

Further, when a plurality of display modes are set and the image data used for each display mode is different, it is necessary to perform the grasping process of the currently set display mode in the arithmetic processing, which increases the processing load of the task processing. Is concerned.

Furthermore, when the sprite data to be drawn increases, the processing load required to create the drawing data in the VDP 76 increases, so that the period required to create the drawing data increases. Then, the processing period of the display CPU 72 is shortened, and the processing is easily dropped.

On the other hand, according to this configuration, the processing load can be reduced by not drawing the backmost image PPC0 when the processing load is large. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above processing omission. In this case, the background color functions as the background, so that the individual images do not appear twice.

That is, since the initial numerical value information is set for each unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, and the writing is performed based on the drawing list for each unit area, the initial numerical value information is supported. An individual image is displayed with the image as a background. In such a configuration, by not setting the background data corresponding to the backmost image PPC0 in the drawing list, it is possible to display the background color in the display area of the backmost image PPC0. As a result, the processing load required to set the background data in the drawing list can be reduced. Further, it is not necessary to perform special processing in the drawing processing, and it is not necessary to perform processing for grasping the display area of the backmost image PPC0. Therefore, the processing load can be suitably reduced.

Further, the base color of the rearmost image PPC0 and the background color set in the first display mode are set to be the same. This makes it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when the background image PPC0 is switched to the background color. That is, based on the change of the display mode, the initial numerical value information set in the register 92 is switched to the value corresponding to the same color as the backmost image PPC0, and the image corresponding to the changed initial numerical value information is the background. It will be displayed as an image.

Further, when the processing load is large, it means that the number of individual images to be displayed is large. In this case, since a large number of individual images are displayed on the display screen G, the ratio of the rearmost image PPC0 in the area of the display screen G tends to be small. This makes it difficult to noticeably switch from the state in which the rearmost image PPC0 is displayed to the state in which the background color is displayed.

In addition, data for performing special effects such as effect effects and partial enlarged display is often set for images that have a large processing load when drawing. For this reason, the player is attracted to the above-mentioned special effect and is less likely to pay attention to the background. Therefore, even if the background color is set, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

In particular, in the case of performing a special effect, in order to obtain a visual effect attracted to the special effect portion, it may be set so as to be inconspicuous except for the special effect portion. Specifically, the contrast of the rearmost image PPC0 may be suppressed more than the effect part. In this case, the difference in lightness and darkness in the rearmost image PPC0 is small, and the rearmost image PPC0 is likely to appear as a single color. Therefore, even if the rearmost image PPC0 is represented by the ground color in a situation where a special effect is performed, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Incidentally, as a configuration for initializing the frame areas 82a and 82b, a process of reading out image data corresponding to the initialization image displayed on the entire display screen G from the memory module 74 and writing the image data may be considered. However, in this case, since it is necessary to additionally perform processing such as adding image data corresponding to the initialization image to the drawing list, there is a concern that the processing load will increase. However, it is difficult to store the image data corresponding to the initialization image in the register 92 in advance from the viewpoint of the storage capacity of the register 92.

On the other hand, in this configuration, the initial numerical value information is temporarily stored in the register 92, and the initial numerical value information is set in each unit area of the frame areas 82a and 82b to initialize the frame areas 82a and 82b. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effects of reducing the processing load and the storage capacity of the register 92. Further, the ground color can be easily changed by changing the initial numerical value information stored in the register 92.

When the power supply to the register 92 is cut off, the information stored in the register 92 is not held, and the initial numerical value information becomes undefined. In such a situation, when the game is started, the background color may not be displayed properly, and the individual image may not be displayed properly. On the other hand, in the present configuration, since the initial numerical value information is initialized in the initial setting process, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that may occur when the register 92 holds the initial numerical value information.

Next, a specific processing configuration of the inspection of the display screen G using the background color will be described below.

In this pachinko machine, the background color is displayed before the initial image is displayed in the initial setting process. Specifically, the background color display process is executed in step S310 in the initial setting process (FIG. 10).

In the background color display process, a drawing list for displaying the background color is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. The drawing list for displaying the background color is an empty drawing list in which the image data to be drawn is not set.

When the drawing list for displaying the ground color is received by the VDP 76, the VDP 76 executes the processing of creating drawing data based on the drawing list, specifically, the processing of steps S502 to S505. Here, since the image data to be drawn is not set in the drawing list for ground color display, the process proceeds to step S505 without performing any particular process in the content grasping process of step S504.

In the writing process of step S505, the process related to the display of the ground color, specifically, the processes of steps S3402 to S3403 are executed. Here, since the grasping process is not performed in the content grasping process, the process of writing the image data (step S3404) is not executed.

When the above process is performed, the drawing data of all the numerical information of each unit area of the frame regions 82a and 82b is the initial numerical information. When an image signal is output to the pattern display device 31 based on the drawing data, the ground color is displayed on the entire display screen G. The display of the background color is continued until the display CPU 72 transmits the drawing list for the initial image and the VDP 76 updates the image. That is, the background color is displayed until the initial image is displayed. In this way, by displaying the background color on the entire display screen G before the display of the initial image is started, it is possible to perform the dot dropout inspection at the stage before the game is started.

Here, when a dot dropout is inspected by displaying the ground color on the entire display screen G, it is better that the ground color displayed on the display screen G at the time of the inspection is the same from the viewpoint of the reliability of the inspection result. preferable. However, since the ground color (initial numerical value information) can be changed, the color of the ground color at the time of inspection may change. Therefore, there is a concern that the reliability of the inspection result may be reduced. On the other hand, when the ground color is displayed on the entire display screen G after the initial setting of the initial numerical information, the ground color of the same color can be inspected. It can be avoided.

Further, the initial numerical value information initially set in the initial setting process is the color of the image corresponding to the image data to be excluded from the drawing list, specifically, the rearmost image in the first display mode which is also initialized in the initial setting process. It is set to be the same as the basic color of PPC0. In other words, since the background color is set in the initial setting process performed before the game is started, the initial numerical value information is associated with the image to be the background color display in the stage before the game is started. Completed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game is started in the situation where the above correspondence is not performed.

Although the rearmost image PPC0 is the image set to be the same as or larger than the drawing range PL2, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rearmost image PPC0 corresponds to the drawing range PL2 by combining a plurality of divided images. A configuration in which a rear image is formed may be used. In this case, since it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load associated with the combining process, it is possible to further enhance the effect of reducing the processing load by not drawing the backmost image.

In addition, in the writing process, the value of the unit area is first set to the initial numerical information, and then the numerical information corresponding to the drawing list of this time is updated, but this is not the only option, and the drawing list of this time can be used first. It may be configured to update the numerical value information described above and then execute the process of setting the initial numerical value information. In this case, it is necessary to carry out a mask process to grasp the background part.

Further, although the background color is changed according to the display mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background color may be changed at the execution timing of the effect when a specific effect is performed. In this case, the color may be changed according to the color of the backmost image during the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect with a large processing load while ensuring a state in which the player does not feel uncomfortable.

The timing of changing the background color is not limited to the execution timing of the specific effect, and may be, for example, the case of shifting to the open/close execution mode. That is, the background color may be changed according to the gaming state.

The basic color of the rearmost image has only to be different between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the specific color is arbitrary. However, focusing on the fact that it is possible to suitably perform the dot dropout inspection, the rearmost image in the initially set display mode (first display mode) is an image based on a color other than “black”. It is preferable to set.

Further, although the background color is initially set in correspondence with the color of the backmost image in the display mode that is initially set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the background color may be set to another color. In this case, it is advisable to separately perform the process of changing the background color to a color corresponding to the display mode in the V interrupt process or the like.

Although the background color is used as the background, the object to which the background color is applied is not limited to the background. For example, when performing an effect in which a shadow is formed on an individual image, the shadow portion may be represented by the background color. Good.

Although a single-color image of the background color is used as the backmost image, the present invention is not limited to this, and any image that is smaller than the processing load required to display the backmost image may be used. However, the configuration using the background color is superior from the viewpoint of processing load and storage capacity.

Although the background color is set to be the same as the base color of the rearmost image PPC0, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to be substantially the same or similar. In short, it is preferable to use a color similar to the color that is the basis of the backmost image PPC0 so that it does not give a strange feeling when the display of the backmost image PPC0 is switched to the display of the background color.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The NAND flash memory 102 provided in the display control device 70 has a lower data transfer rate than the NOR flash memory due to its specifications. On the other hand, the boot data for initial startup is stored in advance in the boot memory 119, which requires a faster reading speed than the NAND flash memory 102, so that the supply of operating power to the display CPU 72 is started. In this case, or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the display CPU 72 can quickly start the process for initial activation. Therefore, the control in the display CPU 72 can be smoothly started as compared with the configuration in which the program data for initial activation is stored in the NAND flash memory 102.

Further, a random accessible memory such as a NOR flash memory is used for the ROM 53 of the main control device 50, and a NAND flash memory 102 is used for the memory module 74 of the display control device 70. For a certain main control device 50, while simplifying the configuration relating to the reading of control program data, for the display control device 70 that is the control means on the downstream side, it is important to prioritize an increase in the amount of data that can be stored in advance. You can

As described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16, the display CPU 72 is not included in the display target on the display screen G in a predetermined frame, but may be included in the display target on the display screen G in the subsequent frame. A control start process for deriving parameters is performed in advance for image data corresponding to a unique individual image. This makes it possible to disperse the control start timing so that a large number of individual images to be control-started do not exist in one processing operation, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omissions.

As described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, scroll background data including data for a plurality of frames is stored in advance as a plurality of divided part data, whereby a single image data is obtained in the NAND flash memory 102. There is no need to set the storable size too large. Also, if the background data for scrolling is transferred as a single image data, the transfer time will be lengthened, but since it can be transferred in units of divided parts data, the timing of data transfer can be adjusted. It will be easy.

As described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, when displaying an animation for displacing a small unit group, a plurality of small unit images are collectively set instead of controlling each small unit group as an individual sprite. The configuration is such that the generated still images are sequentially switched. Accordingly, the displacement background image of the small unit group can be displayed while suppressing the processing load on the display CPU 72.

As described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26, when the effect data PD17 is set in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the addition processing is executed. As a result, the effect image CH2 corresponding to the effect data PD17 is displayed in a state in which the color information and the degree of brightness of the image (for example, the background image) on which the effect image CH2 is superimposed are reflected. Since the effect image CH2 is an image that allows objects on the far side, such as light and water droplets, to pass through, the effect image CH2 feels strange when displayed regardless of the background image. On the other hand, by performing the addition process, the effect image CH2 is displayed in a state in which the background image is reflected, which is preferable in appearance without causing the above-described discomfort.

As described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29, in the unit area in which the effect data PD18 is drawn, the numerical information already stored therein is reduced to a numerical value at the rate of the α value of the partial addition data PD19. The numerical value information obtained by adding the numerical value information of the effect data PD18 to the numerical value information after the setting is set. As a result, after drawing the effect data PD18, it is possible to prevent each numerical value information of RGB in the unit area of the frame regions 82a and 82b from reaching the maximum value, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure.

As described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, synthetic data for simultaneously displaying a plurality of effect images is created, and the synthetic data is used in the subsequent use. As a result, the processing load of the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which a plurality of effect data are drawn each time the execution timing of a plurality of effect effects is reached.

As described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 37, partial display of individual images such as designs and characters is performed using α data and α palette data. As a result, it is possible to perform partial display of individual images in a configuration in which the VDP 76 cannot partially handle image data. Further, these α data and α palette data have a smaller data capacity than the image data. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the image data for the whole display and the image data for the partial display are individually prepared for the individual image to be partially displayed, the increase in the storage capacity necessary for storing the image data is suppressed. , Partial display of individual images can be performed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42, the background image switching is gradually performed over a plurality of frames while performing the wipe switching effect, so that the background image switching mode can be made novel. In addition to this, it is possible to diversify the background image switching mode. In this case, the image data PD39 to PD42 forming the image at the front side display timing are linked, and the α data PD46 and PD47 for wipe switching effect are combined with the linked image data. The processing load on the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the α data for wipe switching effect is individually combined for each of the image data PD39 to PD42.

As described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45, as the image data for displaying the sprite CH5 for smooth movement, the first sprite data having a relationship in which the sprite CH5 is displaced by half a dot in the moving direction of the sprite CH5. The PD 48 and the second sprite data PD 49 are stored. Then, the sprite data PD48 and PD49 are alternately used. As a result, the smooth movement sprite CH5 can be displayed for each frame as if moving forward by half a dot with reference to the frame regions 82a and 82b or with a corresponding amount based on the display screen G. The sprite CH5 can be smoothly moved and displayed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50, the scaler 97 can be used to perform the zoom-in effect, and the zoom-out effect can be performed by returning the zoomed-in state to the initial state. .. For example, a similar zoom-in effect can be performed by drawing each image data in an enlarged state when drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b. In this case, all the image data to be drawn in the VDP 76 is enlarged. It becomes necessary to execute processing, and the processing load on the VDP 76 increases. Further, for example, a configuration may be considered in which the image data for normal size and the image data for enlarged size are set in advance for the same image, but in this case, it is necessary to store the image data. This leads to an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, by performing the zoom-in effect using the scaler 97, the processing for enlarging and displaying the image is performed by the display circuit 94 instead of the control unit 91 of the VDP 76. Therefore, the zoom-in effect and the zoom-out effect can be performed while suppressing the influence on the processing load of the control unit 91 and the influence on the storage capacity required for storing the image data.

As described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are the moving image data PD54 for pre-branch corresponding to the pre-branch effect and the post-branch A's corresponding to the post-branch A effect. The moving image data PD55 and the moving image data PD56 for B after branch corresponding to the effect for B after branch are set separately. Therefore, until the branch timing, each still image data created by decoding the moving image data PD54 for before branching is simply drawn sequentially in the frame order set in the moving image data PD54. Pre-production can be performed. After the branch timing, still image data created by decoding the side corresponding to the execution target of the moving image data PD55 and PD56 for both branches is set in the moving image data PD55 and PD56. The target post-branch effect can be performed only by sequentially drawing in the same frame order.

When still image data for multiple frames is created by decoding from moving image data, it is necessary to draw each still image data in the frame order set in the moving image data. It is difficult to cope with the above branch in moving image data. Further, both the single moving image data in which the pre-branching effect and the post-branching A effect are set and the single moving image data in which the pre-branching effect and the post-branch B effect are set are prepared in advance It is also possible to put it in a configuration. However, since it is necessary to output the moving image data from the still image data corresponding to the first order frame, it is difficult to output the still image data from the middle order frame. Then, when super-reach display is started, it becomes necessary to decode both moving image data. In this case, it is feared that the processing load of the VDP 76 will increase, and it is necessary to increase the storage capacity of the VRAM 75. Compared to each of the assumed configurations, the moving image data PD54 to PD56 are separately prepared as described above, so that the moving image data PD54 to PD56 to be used is switched according to the situation up to the branch timing. Since it suffices to do so, it is possible to preferably execute the super reach display as described above.

As described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59, in the configuration for performing the process of setting the initial numerical information in each unit area of the frame regions 82a and 82b before the process of writing the drawing data in the frame regions 82a and 82b, A drawing list excluding the backmost image PPC0 is created according to the content of the image. As a result, the processing load on the rearmost image PPC0 can be reduced. In this case, the individual image is displayed with the background corresponding to the color corresponding to the initial numerical value information input during the initialization process. Therefore, by setting the initial numerical information in advance to the information corresponding to the color that is the basic tone of the rearmost image PPC0, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player.

<Second Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of this embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of this embodiment.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 60, the main control device 50 is provided as in the first embodiment. Further, the main control device 50, a payout control device 55 for controlling the payout device 56, a power supply function for supplying power to each device including the main control device 50, and a drive control for the game ball launching mechanism 58, and The firing control device 57, the main display unit 33 that displays the result of the game, and the accessory display unit 34 that displays the result of the electric-role opening lottery are electrically connected. In addition, a voice light emission control device 60 is provided, which drives and controls the various light emitting units 35, 36, 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50, and receives an operation signal from the production operation device 48. In addition, a display control device 130 for controlling the symbol display device 31 based on a command transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 is provided.

The hardware configuration of the display control device 130 is different from that of the display control device 70 in the first embodiment. The hardware configuration of the display control device 130 will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 60, the display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted. ..

The display CPU 131 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads (fetches), interprets (decodes), and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the display CPU 131 is connected to an input port 137 mounted on the display control board 136 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 via the input port 137. To be done. Note that the reception of a command from the voice emission control device 60 in the display CPU 131 is not limited to the configuration of directly receiving the command from the voice emission control device 60, and includes the configuration of receiving the command relayed to the relay board. Be done.

The display CPU 131 is connected to the work RAM 132, the memory module 133, and the VRAM 134 via the bus, and based on the command received from the voice emission control device 60, various data stored in the memory module 133 is stored in the work RAM 132 or the VRAM 134. Send a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via the bus, and issues a drawing instruction for displaying a 3D image on the symbol display device 31, based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. The memory module 133, the work RAM 132, the VRAM 134, and the VDP 135 will be described below.

The memory module 133 pre-stores control data (control information) including a control program and fixed value data, and pre-stores various image data (image information) for displaying a 3D image. It is a storage means. The memory module 133 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage and, in detail, a NAND flash memory is used as the semiconductor memory. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is executed well. Further, the memory module 133 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The various image data stored in the memory module 133 includes image data for objects such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 31, image data for texture attached to the object, and one frame worth. Image data for the back surface that constitutes the rearmost image.

Here, the object is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system (world space) which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. Is. Moreover, a polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of three-dimensional coordinate vertices. In order to apply a surface model, for example, to the image data for an object, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with the reference coordinates preset for each object as the origin. That is, in the image data for each object, the relative position (that is, direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in the self-contained local coordinate system.

The texture is an image attached to each polygon of the object, and by attaching the texture to the object, an image corresponding to the object, for example, a display image including a design, a character, etc. is generated. The method of holding the image data for texture is arbitrary, but for example, it includes at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette table that is referred to when determining a display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. There is.

The backmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image. The method of holding the image data for the back side is arbitrary, but for example, it is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state in which two-dimensional still image data is compressed. Incidentally, when the image data for the back surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, a plate polygon is used.

The work RAM 132 is a storage unit for temporarily storing the control data read from the memory module 133 and transferred, and also temporarily storing a flag and the like. The work RAM 132 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and, in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the work RAM 132 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Based on the data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133, the control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. In this case, the control data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the display CPU 131 corresponding to the control data. Then, the display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

By the way, as the work RAM 132, one having a read speed (transfer speed) higher than that of a NAND flash memory 162, which will be described later, is used when the data of the same capacity is read and compared. In other words, as the work RAM 132, when the data read of the same capacity is compared, the work RAM 132 has a shorter period required for the read than the NAND flash memory 162.

The VRAM 134 is a storage unit for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 134 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply to retain the memory, and in detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM, or dual port RAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is well executed. The VRAM 134 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 134 includes a development buffer 141, and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance before the execution timing of the process in the VDP 135 using the image data. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 135. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a Z buffer 143, a screen buffer 144 and a mode buffer 145, the details of which will be described later.

Incidentally, as the VRAM 134, one having a read speed (transfer speed) higher than that of a NAND flash memory 162 described later is used when the data of the same capacity is read and compared. In other words, as the VRAM 134, when the data of the same capacity is read and compared, the VRAM 134 is used such that the period required for the read is shorter than that of the NAND flash memory 162.

The VDP 135 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 141 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 131. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 31b incorporated to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 31a in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 135 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance of the VDP 135 should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware for drawing.

More specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation unit 151, a rendering unit 152, a register 153, a display mode control unit 154, and a display circuit 155. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and also connected to the I/F 156 for the display CPU 131 and the I/F 157 for the VRAM 134.

The I/F 156 for the display CPU 131 causes the register 153 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131. The geometry calculation unit 151 arranges the object designated as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. In addition, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after placing the object in the world coordinate system. Then, finally, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display screen G.

The rendering unit 152 adjusts the light source and pastes the texture on each clipped object based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, and determines the appearance of the object. In addition, the rendering unit 152 projects each object onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and also performs various adjustments based on the depth information to render one frame of drawing data, which is two-dimensional data, into a frame buffer. 142. The drawing data for one frame means the data necessary for displaying the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

Note that all the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by the drawing list. A memory in which the control program is stored in advance is incorporated in the VDP 135, and the control program and the drawing list are included. The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute processing depending on the contents of the above. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 133. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute the process only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using the program.

Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b are provided. Each of these frame areas 142a and 142b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 31a (that is, the display screen G) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is displayed. More specifically, the full color system is adopted, and it is possible to set 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

The storage capacity is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 142 is provided with the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b, in the situation where drawing is executed on the symbol display device 31 using drawing data created in one frame area. The drawing data to be used in the future is created for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 142.

The display circuit 155 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 142a or the second frame area 142b, and the image signal is displayed in the display circuit 155. It is output to the symbol display device 31 via the connected output port 138. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 142a and 142b to the display circuit 155. The transferred drawing data is subjected to resolution adjustment by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the pattern display device 31, and converted into gradation data. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 31 is generated and output. The display circuit 155 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal.

In addition, the display mode control unit 154 executes a predetermined process based on the drawing list stored in the register 153 when displaying an image corresponding to the display mode. The predetermined process will be described later.

<Specific configuration of memory module 133>
Next, a specific configuration of the memory module 133 will be described.

FIG. 61 is a block diagram for explaining the hardware configuration of the memory module 133. As shown in FIG. 61, the memory module 133 is configured by packaging the controller 161 and the NAND flash memory 162 into one package.

A memory cell array is provided in the NAND flash memory 162, and in the memory cell array, in order to display an image on the symbol display device 31 and a control program area 163 in which the control program data of the display CPU 131 is stored. An image data area 164 storing image data to be used is provided.

The image data area 164 includes an object storage area 165 that stores image data for an object, a texture storage area 166 that stores image data for a texture, and a back image storage area that stores image data for a back surface. 167 and. Further, the object storage area 165 is provided with a connected object storage area 165a which stores image data for connected objects. The connected object will be described in detail later.

The controller 161 has a main body side I/F 171 that transmits and receives data to and from the display CPU 131 that is a transfer instruction source and the work RAM 132 and VRAM 134 that is a data transfer destination, and a storage side I/F that transmits and receives data to and from the NAND flash memory 162. /F172, a controller CPU 173, a control ROM 174 and a control RAM 175, which are control units that perform data control processing in the controller 161 and physical block management processing of the NAND flash memory 162, and a NAND flash based on a transfer instruction from the controller CPU 173. A transfer execution circuit 176 that reads data from the memory 162, a cache memory 177 that temporarily stores the data read by the transfer execution circuit 176, and a data read from the NAND flash memory 162. An error correction circuit 178 for detecting an error and correcting the detected error.

Generally, the NAND flash memory 162 is used while avoiding a block including a defect in the memory cell array. The presence/absence of this defective block and the site thereof differ depending on the individual. Therefore, the logical address transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133 needs to be associated with each page of the physical block in the NAND flash memory 162, and the association is executed by the controller CPU 173.

Specifically, the control ROM 174 stores in advance an address management table (address management information group) that associates a logical address with the address of each page of the physical block. The addressing command received from the display CPU 131 is temporarily stored in the addressing buffer of the control RAM 175. When the address specification command is stored in the control RAM 175, the controller CPU 173 reads the address management table from the control ROM 174 and grasps the address of the page of the physical block corresponding to the specified logical address. Then, the controller CPU 173 issues a transfer instruction to the transfer execution circuit 176, and the transfer execution circuit 176 transfers the data so that the data of the physical address according to the transfer instruction is transferred from the NAND flash memory 162 to the cache memory 177. The process is executed. The data transferred to the cache memory 177 is transferred to the work RAM 132 or the VRAM 134.

By the way, as the control ROM 174, a memory such as a mask ROM or a NOR flash memory that can read data by random access is used. Further, as the cache memory 177, one having a read speed (transfer speed) higher than that of the NAND flash memory 162 is used when the data of the same capacity is read and compared. In other words, as the cache memory 177, when the data of the same capacity is read and compared, the cache memory 177 has a shorter period than the NAND flash memory 162. Specifically, it has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing data, and in particular, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, the RAM is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used.

In addition, the memory module 133 is provided with a boot memory 179 in which boot data for initial startup in the display CPU 131 is stored in advance. As the boot memory 179, a mask ROM is used so that random access is possible, and a read speed (transfer speed) is higher than that of the NAND flash memory 162 when compared by reading data of the same capacity. It is used. In other words, as the boot memory 179, when the data of the same capacity is read and compared, the read memory requires a shorter period than the NAND flash memory 162.

The boot memory 179 is not limited to the mask ROM, and may be a NOR flash memory as long as the data read speed is faster than that of the NAND flash memory 162, and an internal power supply such as a battery. It may be a DRAM unit or an SRAM unit equipped with.

The storage capacity of the boot memory 179 is set smaller than the storage capacity of the NAND flash memory 162. Specifically, the NAND flash memory 162 has the same, substantially the same, or similar storage capacity as one page. Boot data for initial startup is stored in advance in the boot memory 179, and when the processing at the time of initial startup is executed in the display CPU 131, the data is read from the boot memory 179, not from the NAND flash memory 162. Is read. As the boot data for the initial activation, an instruction code for initializing the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 and an instruction code for transferring the data stored in the NAND flash memory 162 to the work RAM 132 or the VRAM 134 are set.

Data transfer processing is executed in the controller 161. The content of the data transfer process is the same as the data transfer process (FIG. 7) of the controller 101 in the first embodiment. Further, the operation and effect obtained by executing the data transfer process are also the same as those in the first embodiment.

<Development Buffer 141 of Work RAM 132 and VRAM 134>
Next, the expansion buffer 141 of the work RAM 132 and the VRAM 134 to which data is transferred in advance from the memory module 133 will be described.

First, the work RAM 132 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 60, the work RAM 132 stores power to itself while the situation in which the transferred data may be used even after being used once is continued. A regular area 132a for storing and holding while the supply is continued, and a changing area 132b to be overwritten when transferring other data after use are provided.

Program data necessary for advancing main processing (FIG. 9), V interrupt processing (FIG. 11), command interrupt processing, and the like in the display CPU 131 is written in the regular area 132a. By providing the common area 132a, it is possible to smoothly start the main process, the V interrupt process, the command interrupt process, and the like that are repeatedly executed at relatively short intervals.

When it becomes necessary to temporarily store data that exceeds the storage capacity of the change area 132b, all or a part of the data in the common area 132a is included within a range that does not hinder the smooth execution of processing in the display CPU 131. May be temporarily erased. In this case, it is necessary that the data is restored to the common area 132a by the time when the corresponding process is started.

Program data necessary for executing a subroutine activated as necessary in each of these processes is written in the change area 132b. In addition, program data necessary for a subroutine to be executed next may be transferred to the change area 132b while the predetermined subroutine is being executed. It is done so as not to erase. Since the change area 132b is provided as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the work RAM 132 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 133.

Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main controller 50, the work RAM 132 is not supplied with backup power. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power source to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the work RAM 132 up to that point is erased or destroyed.

Next, the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 will be described.

To the expansion buffer 141, specifically, the power supply to itself is continued while the situation in which the transferred image data may be used even after being used once is continued. During use, a regular area 141a for storing and holding, and a changing area 141b that is overwritten when another image data is transferred after use are provided.

Image data for objects, image data for textures, and image data for the back surface used when starting the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 31 are written in the regular area 141a, and a predetermined illegality is written. The abnormality notification data used when displaying the abnormality notification image when an abnormality is detected is written. By providing the common area 141a, even if a drawing instruction is suddenly issued from the display CPU 131, the VDP 135 can properly draw an image corresponding to the drawing instruction by accessing the common area 141a. it can.

When it becomes necessary to temporarily store image data that exceeds the storage capacity of the change area 141b, all or one of the regular areas 141a is within a range that does not hinder the smooth display of images on the symbol display device 31. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the data of the copy is temporarily deleted. In this case, the restoration of the image data to the common area 141a needs to be performed by the drawing timing of the corresponding image.

Image data for an object, image data for a texture, image data for a back surface, and the like are written in the change area 141b. Further, the image data necessary for the next effect may be transferred to the change area 141b while the predetermined effect is being executed, but the transfer erases the image data necessary for the effect being executed. Not done. By providing the changing area 141b as described above, data transfer can be favorably performed in a configuration in which the storage capacity of the expansion buffer 141 is suppressed to be smaller than the storage capacity of the memory module 133.

Incidentally, unlike the RAM 54 of the main controller 50, backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 134. Therefore, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped or when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the data stored and held in the VRAM 134 up to that point is erased or destroyed.

<Basic processing in display CPU 131>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described.

In the display CPU 131, main processing is started when supply of operating power is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset. The content of the main processing is the same as the main processing (FIG. 9) executed by the display CPU 72 of the first embodiment except for the following points.

The initial image data for which a transfer request is made in step S307 is not a mere 3D image data, but a combination of 2D still image data and plate polygon image data. Further, various parameters grasped in step S313 are the address information of the area to which the initial image data is transferred in the VRAM 134, the information of the frame areas 142a and 142b of the mode in which the drawing data should be created using the initial image data, The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 include information for creating drawing data corresponding to the initial image from the initial image data.

Further, the regular image data for which the transfer request is made in step S316 includes the image data for the back surface used when starting the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 31, and for displaying the symbols. The image data for the object and the image data for the texture are included. The image data for the back surface and the image data for displaying the pattern are set corresponding to the types of the display modes, but the regular image data includes the image data for both display modes. Further, the abnormality notification data used when displaying the abnormality notification image when a predetermined fraud or abnormality is detected is included. The abnormality notification data is for 2D still image data and plate polygon. It is a combination with the image data of.

By executing the main process in the display CPU 131, it is possible to execute the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. The contents of the command interruption process are the same as those in the first embodiment. The contents of the V interrupt process are the same as the V interrupt process (FIG. 11) executed by the display CPU 72 of the first embodiment except for the task process of step S407.

<Task processing in display CPU 131>
Here, the task processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the task process, first, in step S3501, a control start setting process is executed. In the setting process for control start, a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in the display CPU 131 at the current processing time is executed. An individual image is a 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for the back surface or a 3D image defined by a combination of image data for an object and image data for a texture. That is.

Regarding the setting process for control start, specifically, it is first determined based on the currently set data table whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in the current process. If it exists, the change area 132b of the work RAM 132 is searched for a free buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and the individual image grasped as the control start target is searched. Reserve a free buffer area so that there is a one-to-one correspondence. Further, the initialization process is executed for all the secured free buffer areas, and the control start parameters corresponding to the individual images are set in the initialized free buffer areas.

In the following step S3502, the control update target is grasped. This control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and which may be included in the image for one frame after the current processing.

In the following step S3503, background calculation processing is executed. In the background calculation process, the coordinates of the background image that forms the background image and the characters for the background, coordinates in the world coordinate system, rotation angle, scale, light information for adding and contrasting light, and projection A process for calculating and deducing various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information for performing and a Z test designation is executed.

In the following step S3504, effect calculation processing is executed. In the effect calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is executed for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect.

In a succeeding step S3505, symbol calculation processing is executed. In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is performed for the image of the symbol to be displayed in a variable manner in each game.

By the way, in each process of step S3503 to step S3505, a process of updating the control start parameter set in step S3501 is executed. Further, in each processing of steps S3503 to S3505, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image in accordance with a specific pattern each time the image update timing comes. This animation data is defined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is stored in advance in the NAND flash memory 162 and is transferred to the work RAM 132 in advance by the time when it needs to be read by the display CPU 131.

After that, in step S3506, the process of grasping the arrangement target in the world coordinate system is executed, and then this task process is ended. In the grasping process of the arrangement target in the world coordinate system, the process of grasping the individual image to be set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images that are the control update targets by the processes of steps S3503 to S3505 described above. To execute. The grasping is performed based on the currently set data table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

In other words, the number of individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 is set to be larger than that of the individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, so that adjustment is performed in step S3506. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the display CPU 131 and the individual image to be controlled by the VDP 135 may be the same, and in this case, the process of step S3506 is executed. There is no need.

Note that in the control start setting process of step S3501, the control start timings of the individual images are dispersed and set in the same manner as in the first embodiment so as to disperse the processing load of the display CPU 131. Good.

<Basic processing in VDP135>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

In the VDP 135, a process of setting the value of the register 153 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 131, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b.

Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I/F 156 for the display CPU 131. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) by the cooperation of the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152. The process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 at a predetermined image signal output start timing.

Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the process, the content of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. 63A to 63C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, target buffer information, which is information indicating which one of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created, is set for the image for one frame related to the drawing list. There is. Further, various designation information is set in the header information. The contents of various designation information will be described later. When moving image data is included as image data handled by the VDP 135, the presence/absence of decoding designation and the information of the address to which the moving image data to be decoded is transferred are set in the header information. Good.

In the drawing list, in addition to the above header information, a plurality of types of image data to be placed in the world coordinate system at the time of creating the drawing data this time are set, and further information on the drawing order of each image data, The parameter information of each image data is set. Specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be serially-numbered numerical information, and the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

In the drawing list of FIG. 63(a), the back image data is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. There is. Further, the image data for effect is set as an order after the image data for background, for example, the object A for effect is set as the m-th, the object for effect B is set as the m+1-th, and so on. There is. Further, as the order after the image data for these effects, the image data for symbols is set, for example, the object A for symbols is set as the nth, the object for symbols B is set as the n+1th, and so on. There is.

Parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3),..., P(m), P(m+1),..., P(n), P(n+1),. Has multiple types of parameters set. Regarding the parameter P(1) of the image data for the back side, specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(b), the information of the address of the area to which the image data for the back side is transferred in the VRAM 134 and the image for the back side are displayed. Coordinate information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting the data, and in the world coordinate system when setting the back image data The rotation angle information that indicates the rotation angle, scale information that indicates the magnification when setting the world coordinate system for the scale that is set as the initial state of the back image data, and the back image data Information of a uniform α value indicating the entire transparent information (or transparent information) when setting is set.

Here, the coordinate information is individually set for all pixels of the image data for the object. Further, this coordinate information is set for the image data for the object, but is not set for the image data for the texture. In the texture image data, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each pixel of the object image data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the NAND flash memory 162 in a state of being attached to the combination of the image data for the object and the image data for the texture. There is. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 135 when performing texture mapping.

Also, the parameter (P1) includes camera information including coordinate and orientation information of the virtual camera when the back image data is projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane for rendering, and the back image data is rendered. Light information including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case of performing.

Further, the parameter (P1) is set with Z test designation information indicating whether or not the Z buffer method, which is a kind of method for performing hidden surface removal, is applied. The Z-buffer method is a method in which, when many objects or two-dimensional images are overlapped in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system, each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel) arranged on the Z-axis is viewed from the viewpoint. Is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the numerical information set to the pixel closest to the viewpoint is sequentially set to the corresponding unit areas in the frame areas 142a and 142b. When applying the Z buffer method, the Z buffer 143 provided in the VRAM 134 is used. A specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 will be described later.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, the Z-sort method is set as a method for performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which, for each pixel arranged on the Z axis, the numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 142a and 142b. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to and the addition processing as already described or the processing for fusion processing as already described is executed as necessary. The Rukoto. The description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sort is omitted, but it is activated when the effect image is displayed.

Further, the parameter (P1) is created to display α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is applied and the application target, fog designation information indicating whether fog is applied or not, and a background image. Separately-designated information indicating whether or not to separately store the drawing data for the background image is set.

Here, the α value is the transmission information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of designating the uniform α value and a method of designating the α data. The uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of 2D still image data and texture image data, and is stored in the NAND flash memory 162 in advance as image data. The α data can have different transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the image data for the same texture. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

Since the uniform α value and α data are set as described above, the transparency of 2D still image data or image data for texture is not controlled finely on a pixel-by-pixel basis but is uniform for all pixels. In a situation where it is sufficient to control, it is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to deal with a uniform α value, and it is also possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying α data.

The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction in the world coordinate system, specifically, the Z-axis direction. Fog is used to represent fog and the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, fog is applied to the image for one frame in a fixed manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if the same fog as other objects is applied to the object arranged on the back side in the Z-axis direction, a different fog is set for the object in a situation where the texture is not obtained due to being too dark. It is good to have a configuration. Accordingly, it is possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while preventing the above texture from being impaired.

In addition, the separate saving means that the drawing data for the background image once created is written and saved in the mode buffer 145 provided separately from the frame areas 142a and 142b in order to use it as it is in the subsequent frames. Say. As shown in FIG. 60, the mode buffer 145 is provided with a first mode buffer 145 and a second mode buffer 145 so as to correspond one-to-one to each display mode. The specific content of this separate storage will be described later in detail.

Further, in other parameters such as the parameter P(2), as shown in FIG. 63(c), the information of the object is replaced with the information of the image data for the background among the various information of FIG. 63(b). Texture information and is set. As these pieces of information, information on the address of the area to which the object or texture is transferred is set.

Drawing processing in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the following description, how the drawing data is created as the drawing process is performed will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S3601, it is determined whether a new drawing list is received from the display CPU 131. If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed in step S3602.

In the setting process for the background, out of the image data designated in the drawing list this time, the image data for the back face for displaying the background image and the object for the character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and the character object are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

If not arranged, a free buffer area to be referred to for arrangement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, initialization processing of that area is executed. After that, the VRAM134 grasps and reads the address to which the image data is transferred in advance, and at the same time, the coordinate value of the local coordinate system for the image data is set so that the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale are designated in the drawing list. The world conversion processing for converting the coordinate values in the world coordinate system is executed and set in the secured buffer area.

If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters set in the already secured buffer area is executed. Further, in the background setting process, a control ending process is executed to erase the background image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

In a succeeding step S3603, effect setting processing is executed. In the setting process for effect, the object for displaying the effect image is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for effect, a control ending process is executed to delete the image data for effect that is not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

In a succeeding step S3604, a setting process for symbols is executed. In the design setting process, the object for displaying the design is grasped in the image data specified in the drawing list this time. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the symbol setting process, a control end process is executed to erase the image data for symbols not designated in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

As a result of the processes of steps S3602 to S3604 being executed, as shown in FIG. 65, it is designated as an arrangement target by the drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis. The setting of the scene in which the rearmost image PC21 and the various objects PC22 to PC30 are arranged at the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale that are also designated by the drawing list is completed. Note that, in FIG. 65, a state in which the rearmost image PC21 and various objects PC22 to PC30 are arranged is simply shown.

In the following step S3605, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and direction of the viewpoint are determined based on the information of the camera specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is used as the origin of the viewpoint based on the coordinates and direction of the viewpoint. Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 65, the viewpoint PC 31 shown by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding thereto is set.

Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (the backmost image PC21 and various objects PC22 to PC30), and in reality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, viewpoint switching can be performed individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of description, FIG. 65 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

In a succeeding step S3606, conversion processing into the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed. In the conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system, each of the camera coordinate systems described above is converted to a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, for each individual image, when it is included in the visual field of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image near the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

In a succeeding step S3607, clipping processing is executed. In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S3606 is recognized with the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, in this state, the space corresponding to the screen area PC32 (see FIG. 65) corresponding to the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn (that is, the display screen G of the symbol display device 31) is extracted as a reference and extracted in step S3606. Clip each clipped individual image.

In a succeeding step S3608, lighting processing is executed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and the shadows, reflections, etc. of each object extracted by the clipping process are calculated based on the virtual light source. ..

In a succeeding step S3609, texture mapping processing is executed. In the texture mapping process, textures corresponding to the respective objects extracted by the clipping process are pasted to determine the appearance of each object. This texture mapping process includes processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping in addition to the process of simply pasting image data for texture.

Thereafter, in steps S3610 to S3612, the individual images extracted in step S3607 and further subjected to the lighting process and the texture mapping process are projected onto the screen area PC32 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection or parallel projection). Drawing data is created by performing projection.

Specifically, first in step S3610, background drawing data creation processing is executed. In the drawing data creation process for the background, the drawing data for the background is created by projecting the backmost image and the object set as the background image onto the screen area PC32 while performing hidden surface removal.

Here, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144 as shown in FIG. 60, and the background buffer in which the background drawing data is written and the effect drawing data are written in the screen buffer 144. The effect buffer and the design buffer into which the drawing data for the design is written are set. An area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC32 is set in the background buffer, the effect buffer, and the symbol buffer. The background drawing data created in step S3610 is written in the background buffer. If the image data for the background is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the background is not created.

In subsequent step S3611, a rendering data creation process for effect is executed. In the rendering data creation process for rendering, the object set as the rendering image is projected onto the screen area PC32 while the hidden surface is erased, so that the rendering buffer is used for rendering in the screen buffer 144. Create drawing data. If the rendering image data is not specified in the rendering list, the rendering data for rendering is not created.

In a succeeding step S3612, drawing data creation processing for symbols is executed. In the drawing data creation processing for symbols, the object set as the symbols is projected onto the screen area PC32 while the hidden surface is being erased, thereby drawing the symbols in the buffer for symbols in the screen buffer 144. Create the data. If the drawing image data is not designated in the drawing list, the drawing data for the design is not created.

After that, in step S3613, the drawing data combining process is executed, and then the present drawing process is ended. In the drawing data synthesizing process of step S3613, the drawing data for background, the drawing data for effect, and the drawing data for design, which are individually created in the screen buffer 144 by the processes of steps S3610 to S3612, are generated. The composition is performed and the composition result is written as the drawing data for one frame in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b.

In this case, the drawing data for the background, the drawing data for the effect, and the drawing data for the pattern are specified to be lined up from the back side to the front side, and the images are set so that they do not overlap in the depth direction. ing. Therefore, in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b, first, the drawing data for the background is written, then the drawing data for the effect is written, and finally the drawing data for the symbol is written. At this time, if the completely transparent α value is set for the pixel for which drawing is performed, the image on the back side is used as is, and if the semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is set. The image on the back side and the image on the front side are fused at the standard ratio, and when the opaque α value is set, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side. Then, the fusion operation as described above is executed.

By the way, each drawing data is regulated to have an area for one frame, but the alpha value of complete transparency is set for the blank part that is not projected in the drawing data for production and the drawing data for design. Has been done.

The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within the range of 20 msec cycle. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data, but since the double buffer method is adopted as already described, the output of the image signal is the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data for one frame after that frame. Further, the display circuit 155 has a selector circuit which alternately switches the frame regions 142a and 142b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. The frame areas 142a and 142b, which are drawing targets, are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting image signals.

Note that steps S3602 to S3607 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and steps S3608 to S3613 are processes executed by the rendering unit 152.

<Mask display using Z buffer 143>
Next, the mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

As described above, the Z buffer 143 is used when performing hidden surface removal by the Z buffer method. Now, the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The hidden surface process using the Z buffer is activated in each drawing data creation process of steps S3610 to S3612 in the drawing process (FIG. 64) when the Z test is designated in the drawing list. Further, when the Z test is designated, the display CPU 131 sets the camera information of each individual image that is the target of the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer so that each viewpoint has the same coordinates and orientation. The direction of the viewpoint is set in the Z-axis direction of the world coordinate system. Therefore, the Z axis of the screen area PC32, which is a reference in the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer, is set to be parallel to the Z axis of the world coordinate system. Further, only one Z buffer 143 is set, and it has an area having the same number of dots as the background buffer, the effect buffer, and the symbol buffer in the screen buffer 144.

First, in step S3701, an individual image included on the Z axis of the current projection target dot in the screen area PC32 (see FIG. 65) is set as a reference, and the target pixel of the individual image that is the test target this time is selected. Understand the set Z value. In a succeeding step S3702, the Z value set in the area of the dot corresponding to the drawing target dot in the Z buffer 143 is grasped.

In a succeeding step S3703, it is determined whether or not the Z value of the individual image grasped in the step S3701 corresponds to the front side in the Z axis direction with respect to the Z value of the Z buffer 143 grasped in the step S3702. If it corresponds to the front side, the process advances to step S3704, and the Z value grasped in step S3701 is overwritten in the area of the dot referenced in step S3702 in the Z buffer 143. In subsequent step S3705, numerical information for drawing such as color information set in the pixel referred to in step S3701 is overwritten in the area of the projection target dot of this time in the drawing target buffer in the screen buffer 144. Then, it progresses to step S3706.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3703 that the front side is not supported, the process proceeds to step S3706 without executing the processes of steps S3704 to S3705. That is, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is the same as the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143 or is on the far side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is updated. At the same time, the already set numerical information for drawing is retained as it is. On the other hand, when the Z value of the test target pixel is on the front side in the Z axis direction from the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated. , Numerical information for drawing is also updated.

In step S3706, it is determined whether or not the Z test is completed for all target pixels included on the Z axis with the projection target dot as a reference. If not completed, the process returns to step S3701, and the Z test is performed on a new target pixel.

If it is completed, it is determined in step S3707 whether or not the Z test is completed for all the dots in the screen area PC32. If not completed, the projection target dot is updated in step S3708, and the process returns to step S3701 to perform the Z test on the new projection target dot. If it is completed, this hidden surface processing is ended.

By performing the hidden surface processing as described above, even if a plurality of individual images are arranged on the Z axis, only the individual image closer to the viewpoint is displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, masking (that is, partial display) of the character for the background is executed by using the hidden surface processing. Then, this mask is performed by setting the Z value of the object for the mask in the display CPU 131.

The masking calculation process executed by the display CPU 131 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67. Note that the masking arithmetic process is the same as the effecting arithmetic process of step S3504 in the task process (FIG. 62) when the masking arithmetic process is indicated to be executed in the referred area in the data table. Is executed.

First, in step S3801, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the current processing time corresponds to the first mask display. Here, the first mask display and the second mask display are set as the mask display. The first mask display is a display mode in which a state in which a character is partially displayed is maintained for a plurality of frames, and the second mask display is in a state in which pixels to be masked are displayed in a plurality of frames from the state in which the entire character is displayed. It is a display mode that gradually increases over time and finally disappears.

If it corresponds to the first mask display, in step S3802, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S3803, a pixel to be masked is grasped in the object grasped in the step S3802 based on the currently set data table.

After that, after the Z value setting process is executed in step S3804, the present calculation process is ended. In the Z value setting process, the pixel that is the mask target in the object is set so that the Z value is on the back side of the rearmost image, and the pixel that is not the mask target is set as follows. The Z value is set so as to correspond to the position that should be originally displayed, which is on the front side of the rearmost image.

The masking arithmetic process is executed as described above, and the drawing list including the object with the Z value set as a drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135, so that the VDP 135 uses the Z buffer as the hidden surface process. The hidden surface processing (FIG. 66) is executed, and finally the first mask display is performed on the display screen G. The specific contents of the first mask display will be described with reference to FIG. 68. For convenience of description, 3D images are shown as 2D images in FIG. 68.

FIG. 68(a) shows a case where the character CH10 is normally displayed without the first mask display. Also, FIG. 68(a-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 33 corresponding to the character CH10, and FIG. 68(a-2) shows the display screen G on the display screen G. A display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 68(a-1), the Z value is set to each pixel so as to be closer to the front side than the rearmost image. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68(a-2). The entire character CH10 is displayed.

FIG. 68B shows a case where the first mask display is performed. 68(b-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 33 corresponding to the character CH10, and FIG. 68(b-2) is a display screen G A display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 68(b-1), the Z value is set so that a part of each pixel is on the front side of the image on the back surface, but the remaining pixels are set on the back surface. The Z value is set to be on the back side of the image. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68(b-2), the character CH10 is displayed only at the portion corresponding to the pixel for which the Z value is set so as to be on the front side.

A plurality of Z value setting patterns corresponding to the first mask display for the same character CH10 may be set by the control program of the display CPU 131. In this case, it is possible to set a plurality of first mask display modes for the same character CH10.

Returning to the description of the calculation process for masking (FIG. 67 ), if it is determined in step S3801 that the current processing time does not correspond to the first mask display, the current processing time is the second masking time. Since it means that the display is supported, the process advances to step S3805. In step S3805, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the second mask display based on the currently set data table.

If it is the start timing, in step S3806, an object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table. In a succeeding step S3807, the mask dedicated table is read based on the currently set data table. This mask dedicated table is stored and held until the second mask display this time is completed. In a succeeding step S3808, the pixel set as the initial erase target in the dedicated table for the mask is grasped.

After that, after the Z value setting process is executed in step S3809, the present calculation process is ended. In the Z value setting process, in the above-mentioned object, for the pixel recognized as the initial deletion target in step S3808, the Z value is set so as to be on the back side of the rearmost image, and the pixel is set as the initial deletion target. For pixels that are not formed, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position on the front side of the rearmost image and should be originally displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3805 that it is not the start timing, the process advances to step S3810. In step S3810, the erase target counter set in the work RAM 132 is updated. In a succeeding step S3811, data corresponding to the value of the erasing target counter updated in step S3810 is confirmed in the currently read mask dedicated table to grasp the erasing target pixel.

After that, the Z value setting process is executed in step S3812, and then the present calculation process is ended. In the Z value setting process, in the above-mentioned object, the pixel that is grasped as an erasing target in step S3811 is set so that the Z value is on the back side of the rearmost image and is the erasing target. For a pixel that does not exist, its Z value is set so as to correspond to a position on the front side of the rearmost image and which should be originally displayed.

The masking arithmetic process is executed as described above, and the drawing list including the object with the Z value set as a drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135, so that the VDP 135 uses the Z buffer as the hidden surface process. The hidden surface processing (FIG. 66) is executed, and finally the second mask display is performed on the display screen G. The specific contents of the second mask display will be described with reference to FIG. 69. For convenience of explanation, the 3D image is shown as a 2D image in FIG. 69.

FIG. 69(a) shows an image view of the information set in the mask dedicated table, and FIG. 69(b) shows the case where the character CH11 is displayed as usual without the second mask display. Is shown. As shown in FIG. 69(a), the object PC34 corresponding to the character CH11 has a plurality of pixels, and in the mask dedicated table, the plurality of pixels are grouped into a plurality of groups and each group is divided into groups. On the other hand, the frame order to be erased is set. Specifically, the group shown as "Z1" is set as the initial deletion target, and thereafter, the group shown as "Z2" → the group shown as "Z3" → the group shown as "Z4" → shown as "Z5" It becomes a deletion target in the order of the group.

In the frame in which the second mask display is started and the group indicated as “Z1” is the deletion target, as shown in FIG. 69(c), the pixel portion corresponding to the group of “Z1” is missing. The character CH11 is displayed. Also, in the subsequent frame, when the group indicated as “Z2” is to be erased, as shown in FIG. 69(d), in addition to the group of “Z1”, the pixel corresponding to the group of “Z2” is added. The character CH11 is displayed in a state where the part is missing. Then, the character CH11 is not displayed in the frame in which the group finally indicated as "Z5" is the deletion target.

As described above, the Z buffer 143 can be used to mask an object. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform the masking operation on the program of the display CPU 131, and it is not necessary to set the mask data which is a kind of image data in the VDP 135. Therefore, the mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity required for storing the image data.

Further, since the display CPU 131 only needs to adjust the Z value of each object, the mask display can be performed without significantly increasing the processing load of the display CPU 131. In addition, a plurality of types of mask displays such as the first mask display and the second mask display can exhibit the excellent effects as described above.

In addition, a Z value on the back side of the backmost image is set in the hidden portion. The rearmost image is an image that always forms the rear surface in any frame, and thus serves as an absolute reference as a position on the Z axis (depth direction). By setting the Z value of the part to be hidden based on this, it becomes possible to make the setting mode of the Z value in the case of non-display uniform, and the process related to the setting of the Z value. The processing load of is reduced.

Note that only one of the first mask display and the second mask display may be set. Further, in the second mask display, instead of erasing every plurality of pixels, the erasing may be performed for each pixel, and the erasing target pixel may be set as the display target again. May be

By setting the Z value in reverse, the characters are not sequentially erased over the display period for a plurality of frames, but are displayed so that the characters sequentially appear over the display period for a plurality of frames. It may be configured to be.

<Another mode of mask processing using Z buffer 143>
Another mode of mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another form of the masking arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131.

First, in step S3901, whether or not it is the start timing is determined based on the currently set data table. If it is the start timing, in step S3902, the object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S3903, based on the currently set data table, it is initialized. Read the mask table.

In a succeeding step S3904, a mask lottery process is executed. In the mask lottery process, the numerical information currently set in the lottery counter provided in the work RAM 132 is read, and the information to be erased corresponding to the numerical information is extracted from the initial mask table read in step S3903. ..

The lottery counter is configured to be updated each time the process of step S202 is executed in the main process (FIG. 9), for example, and when the counter value makes one round, the initial value is randomly selected. It is configured to be. In addition, in the initial masking table, the information to be erased is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the respective counter values of the lottery counter, and the information to be erased is all the pixels that make up the object to be masked. Of these, a plurality of pixels are set as one group and each group has a one-to-one correspondence.

In subsequent step S3905, the pixel to be erased is grasped from the information to be erased acquired in step S3904. After that, after the Z value setting process is executed in step S3906, the present calculation process is ended. In the Z value setting process, in the above object, the Z value of the pixel recognized as the deletion target in step S3905 is set to be on the back side of the backmost image, and is set as the deletion target. For a pixel that does not exist, its Z value is set so as to correspond to a position on the front side of the rearmost image and which should be originally displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3901 that it is not the start timing, the process advances to step S3907. In step S3907, the mask table is rewritten so that the erase target information already set as the erase target is excluded from the already read initial mask table. For example, the counter value corresponding to the information to be erased that has already been set as the erase target is rewritten so that the counter value is redundantly assigned to other information to be erased. This allocation may be performed randomly, or may be configured to be allocated to the information to be erased corresponding to the counter value immediately below in the table.

After that, the mask table rewritten in step S3907 is used to execute the processes of steps S3904 to S3906, and then the present arithmetic process ends.

As described above, according to this another mode, the pixels to be erased are randomly selected, so that the mask display mode can be diversified.

The mask display using the Z buffer 143 may be applied not to the background character but to the effect character or the design. For example, when applied to a character for production, the hidden surface processing is executed collectively for the image data for the background and the image data for the presentation, so that the backmost surface is processed in the same manner as the above-mentioned configuration. The Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be distributed based on the Z value of the image. Further, when applied to the design, the hidden surface processing is executed collectively for the image data for the background, the image data for the effect, and the image data for the design, so that similar to the above configuration. The Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be distributed based on the Z value of the rearmost image.

Further, even when the hidden surface processing is performed individually for the background, the effect, and the design, it is determined that the pixel for which the Z value on the back side of the rearmost image is set in the VDP 135 is not the drawing target. If so, the Z values of the display object and the non-display object may be distributed with reference to the Z value of the rearmost image, as in the above configuration.

Further, the Z values of the display target and the non-display target are not distributed based on the Z value of the rearmost image, but a Z value in front of the viewpoint is set as the Z value of the non-display target, for example. The Z value on the back side of the viewpoint may be set as the Z value to be displayed.

The hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 may be performed not based on the Z axis of the world coordinate system but based on the direction in which the viewpoint is directed.

Further, in the configuration for displaying a 2D image as in the first embodiment, when the VDP 76 is configured to be able to operate drawing data on a pixel-by-pixel basis, information in the depth direction set for each pixel of the image data is displayed. The image may be partially displayed by allocating it to either target information or non-display target information.

<Structure for switching display modes>
Next, a configuration related to switching of display modes will be described.

The display mode is a state in which the type of the standby image displayed until the game time is started and the type of the game time image displayed in the situation where the game time is being executed are set to a predetermined type. The display mode of is set. Specifically, the first display mode and the second display mode are set.

The display mode of the background image and the display mode of each symbol are different between the first display mode and the second display mode. Specifically, when comparing the symbols with the same number, the outer shapes and shapes of the symbols are the same in the first display mode and the second display mode, but the colors and the patterns are different. Regarding the background image, the type of the backmost image is different between the first display mode and the second display mode, and the number and types of characters displayed in front of the backmost image are different. The number of characters to be displayed is set to be larger in the first display mode than in the second display mode.

The switching of the display mode is performed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. Specifically, the display mode can be sequentially switched by operating the production operating device 48 in a situation where the game time and the opening/closing execution mode are not executed. In addition, switching is performed based on the operation device 48 for effect being operated under a predetermined condition in the situation where the game time is being executed.

A specific processing configuration for switching the display mode will be described.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an operation generation command response process executed by the display CPU 131. The operation occurrence command handling process is executed by the command handling process of step S403 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not an operation generation command for mode switching is received from the sound emission control device 60. If it has not been received, this operation command handling process is terminated as it is, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S4002.

In step S4002, it is determined whether it is the first switchable period. The first switchable period is a period in which neither the game times nor the opening/closing execution mode is executed. Information for specifying whether the period is the first switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S4002, it is determined whether the period is the first switchable period based on the currently set data table. .. If it is the first switchable period, in step S4003, the first switch execution flag is set for a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132.

On the other hand, if the period is not the first switchable period, the process advances to step S4004 to determine whether it is the second switchable period. The second switchable period is a period from the start timing to a predetermined reference timing in the middle of execution in the situation where the game game is being executed. Specifically, when the game diversion effect is executed on the symbol display device 31, the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is started→the high speed variation display in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3→the low speed variation It includes a display flow of sequentially stopping each of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 via the display. In this case, the second switchable period is a period from the start of variable display of symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 to the timing at which high-speed variable display in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 ends.

In addition, the mode of variable display of the symbols, start the variable display of the symbols in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 → acceleration period of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 → high-speed variable display in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (high speed is constant The display flow may be a sequential stop of each of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 via a speed)→low speed fluctuation display (low speed is a constant speed). In this case, the second switchable period may be a period in which high-speed variable display in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is being executed.

Further, a middle speed fluctuation display may be included between the high speed fluctuation display and the low speed fluctuation display. In other words, the mode of variable display of symbols is arbitrary as long as it is switched in a plurality of stages such as 2 stages, 3 stages or 4 stages or more. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period of a low discriminating stage in which the player's symbol discriminating property is low among the stages.

Further, in the flow of the variable display of the symbols, the specific variable mode is arbitrary as long as it includes the state of the variable display in the relatively low identification mode → the variable display in the high identification mode, for example, any mode. Even though the speed of change is the same, the variable display in the low identification mode displays the pattern as transparent, semitransparent, hollow or partially removed, and the variable display in the high identification mode displays the entire pattern. It may be displayed. In this case, the second switchable period may be the period during which the variable display is performed in the low identification mode.

Information for specifying whether it is the second switchable period is set in the data table, and in step S4004, it is determined whether it is the second switchable period based on the currently set data table. .. If it is determined that it is not the second switchable period, the operation corresponding to the operation generation command is ended as it is, and if it is the second switchable period, a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S4005. The second switching execution flag is set for.

After performing the processing of either step S4003 or step S4005, the process proceeds to step S4006. In step S4006, the display mode counter is updated.

The display mode counter is a counter for the display CPU 131 to specify the current display mode, and is provided in the work RAM 132. A counter value is set in the display mode counter in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode. In the present embodiment, since two types of display modes, the first display mode and the second display mode, are set as described above, the counter value is “0” corresponding to the first display mode and the second display mode. The numerical value of "1" corresponding to the mode is set. In this case, since the initial value of the display mode counter is set to “0”, the first value is set when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset. 1 display mode is set.

In step S4006, the display mode counter is updated so that the display mode is sequentially switched according to a predetermined order each time the effect operation device 48 is operated once. Specifically, when the process of step S4006 is executed in a situation where the display mode counter is "0" and the first display mode is set, the display mode counter is set to "1" When the process of step S4006 is executed in the situation where the display mode counter is "1" and the second display mode is set while switching to the display mode, the display mode counter is set to "1". 1 Switch to display mode. After executing the processing of step S4006, the processing corresponding to the operation generation command ends.

Next, the calculation processing for the display mode background executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The calculation processing for the display mode background is executed in the background calculation processing of step S3503 in the task processing (FIG. 62). In addition, when performing a jackpot effect, the background image corresponding to the display mode is not displayed, so the calculation processing for the display mode background is not executed, and when the standby image is displayed or when the game time effect is executed. For example, the calculation processing for the display mode background is executed.

First, in step S4101, the display mode counter provided in the work RAM 132 is referenced to determine whether or not the display mode is the first display mode. In the case of the first display mode, in step S4102, the first rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S4103, various parameters of the grasped first rearmost image are calculated to update the control information. In subsequent step S4104, the object corresponding to the first display mode, which is the object to be updated for the background, is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S4105, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update the control information.

On the other hand, in the case of the second display mode, in step S4106, the second rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S4107, various parameters of the grasped second backmost image are calculated to update the control information. In subsequent step S4108, an object corresponding to the second display mode, which is an object to be updated for the background, is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S4109, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update the control information.

At the execution timing of the process of step S4102, the control start setting process (step S3501) for the background object corresponding to the first rearmost image and the first display mode is completed. Further, at the execution timing of the process of step S4106, the control start setting process (step S3501) for the second background image and the background object corresponding to the second display mode is completed.

After executing the processing of step S4105 or step S4109, it is determined in step S4110 whether the first switching execution flag or the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If any of the switching execution flags is set, it is determined in step S4111 whether the processing load is large.

The situation where the processing load is large means that when the geometry calculation and the rendering for the image data specified in the rendering list this time are both executed by the VDP 135, the processing load of the VDP 135 is large or the processing load is high enough to cause processing loss. This is a situation in which the processing load on the VDP 135 is relatively large even before the drop occurs. Information regarding whether or not the processing load is large is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S4111 is performed based on the information.

If the processing load is not large, it is determined in step S4112 whether or not the background image corresponding to the current display mode has been separately saved. Here, the separate storage means that the drawing data for the background for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode is individually saved and the saved state is maintained. For another storage, the mode buffer 145 provided in the VRAM 134 is used (see FIG. 60).

In the mode buffer 145, in order to display the first mode area 145a in which drawing data for the background for displaying the background image corresponding to the first display mode and the background image corresponding to the second display mode are displayed. A second mode area 145b in which drawing data for the background is written. Further, the VDP 135 has a function of writing the drawing data for the background into either the first mode area 145a or the second mode area 145b, and reading the written background drawing data into the screen buffer 144. A display mode control unit 154 having a writing function is provided.

If it has not been stored separately, in step S4113 the execution designation information for storage is stored, and then this operation processing is ended. If it has been saved separately, this operation processing is ended.

When the calculation processing for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing includes the background display corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Image data of is set. If the process of step S4113 is being executed, the separately designated execution designation information is set. The separately-storing execution designation information includes information indicating that the separately-storing should be executed, and also includes information on the address of the separately-storing destination.

On the other hand, when the processing load is large (step S4111: YES), it is determined in step S4114 whether or not the background image of the display mode of the switching destination has been separately saved. If it has not been stored separately, this operation processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has already been stored separately, in step S4115, the use designation information of the separately stored data is stored, and then the present arithmetic processing ends.

When the calculation processing for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing includes the background display corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Image data of is set. If the process of step S4115 is being executed, the use designation information of the separate storage data is set. The separate storage data use designation information includes information indicating that the separate storage data should be used, and also includes information on the address where the separate storage data is stored.

Next, the symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The symbol calculation process is executed in step S3505 of the task process (FIG. 62).

First, in step S4201, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to execute the control update process for the symbol. The case where the jackpot effect is executed is included as a case where it is not necessary to execute, and the case where the effect for game play is executed and the case where the standby image is displayed are included as a case where it is necessary to execute. When it is not necessary to execute, the symbol calculation processing is ended as it is, and when it is necessary to execute, in step S4202, based on the currently set data table, is the game time being executed? Determine whether or not.

When the game game is not being executed, it is determined in step S4203 whether or not the first switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If the first switching execution flag is set, the symbol to be controlled is changed in correspondence with the display mode of the switching destination in step S4204. Specifically, while holding the information for the parameters of each free buffer area secured for controlling the symbols in the work RAM 132 as they are, only the information on the symbols to be controlled (for example, the information of the transfer destination address) Is rewritten with information corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. The processes of steps S4203 and S4204 may be executed by the control start setting process (step S3501) in the task process (FIG. 62). In addition, when a positive determination is made in step S4203, the first switching execution flag is cleared.

If a negative determination is made in step S4203 or the process of step S4204 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4205. In step S4205, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in the following step S4206, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol ends.

When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, the image data for the pattern corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Is set.

When the game times are being executed (step S4202: YES), in step S4207, based on the currently set data table, whether or not high speed fluctuation display is being performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. judge. When the high speed variation display is being performed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, it is determined in step S4208 whether or not the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132.

If the second switching execution flag is set, it is determined in step S4209 whether or not the symbol to be controlled can be changed in correspondence with the display mode of the switching destination. This is because when the drawing process (FIG. 64) corresponding to the drawing list this time is executed by the VDP 135, if the design of the controlled object is changed in correspondence with the display mode of the switching destination, the processing omission occurs. Based on whether or not the processing omission occurs, it can be changed, and if the processing omission occurs, it is determined that the change cannot be performed.

For example, when the background image data corresponding to the display mode switching is newly set in the drawing list this time, it is necessary to newly set the image data in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135. The processing load on the VDP 135 increases. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the symbol cannot be changed. On the other hand, when another saved data is set as the image data for the background in the drawing list this time, or when the image data for the background corresponding to the same display mode as the display mode related to the previous drawing list is set. Therefore, it is not necessary to newly set the image data in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135, so that the processing load of the VDP 135 becomes relatively small. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the design can be changed.

It should be noted that the information on whether or not it can be changed is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S4209 is performed based on that information. In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in step S4208, the second switching execution flag is cleared. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and whether or not it is possible to change the symbol to be controlled according to the execution mode of the switching destination is determined by the time for one cycle of the V interrupt processing. The configuration may be performed depending on how much progress is being made. For example, if the progress of signal output to each dot on the display screen G can be recognized by the display CPU 131 from the signal output from the VDP 135, the determination may be performed based on the content of the signal output.

If it is determined in step S4209 that the pattern can be changed, the symbol to be controlled is changed in step S4210 in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination. The specific content of this process is the same as in step S4204. After executing the processing of step S4210, the process proceeds to step S4213.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4209 that the change is not possible, the change standby flag is set in a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S4211, and then the process proceeds to step S4213. .. The change standby flag is a flag for the display CPU 131 to specify that the change of the symbol to be controlled is waiting. When the change standby flag is set, even if it is determined in step S4208 that the second switching execution flag is not set, the process of step S4212 is executed, and thus the process of step S4209 is executed. Executed. If neither the second switching execution flag nor the change standby flag is set, the process directly proceeds to step S4213. Further, the change standby flag is cleared when a positive determination is made in step S4212.

In step S4213, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in the following step S4214, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol ends.

When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. It In this case, when it is determined in step S4209 that the design corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination cannot be changed, the image data of the design corresponding to the display mode of the switching source is directly set in the drawing list. It Then, a symbol that does not correspond to the display mode is finally displayed on the display screen G, but since the timing at which the second switching execution flag is set is the high-speed variable display, the player sets the above state. Cannot be recognized or difficult to recognize.

If the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination cannot be changed, the change standby flag is set, and the change is performed in the subsequent processing times. As a result, it is possible to favorably switch the display mode while preventing the processing drop in the VDP 135. The processing load of the VDP 135 is adjusted so that the design corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination is changed within the range where the high-speed variable display is being performed.

When the high-speed fluctuation display is not being performed (step S4207: NO), the process proceeds to step S4215. In step S4215, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in the following step S4216, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. After that, the calculation process for this symbol ends. When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. It

Next, the background setting process executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The background setting process is executed in step S3602 in the drawing process (FIG. 64).

First, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the use designation of separate saved data is set in the drawing list this time. If it is set, in step S4302, the register 153 stores information for setting the separate storage data corresponding to the designation as the background drawing data.

If not set (step S4301: NO) or after performing the process of step S4302, the process proceeds to step S4303. In step S4303, the rearmost image specified in the drawing list this time is grasped, and in step S4304, various parameters designated for the rearmost image are grasped. Then, in step S4305, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the rearmost image. The contents related to this setting are as already described.

In a succeeding step S4306, the background object designated in the drawing list this time is grasped, and in the step S4307, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. Thereafter, in step S4308, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and then the setting process for the background is ended.

By performing the setting process for the background as described above, it is possible to draw not only in the situation where the use specification of separate save data is not set, but also in the situation where the use specification of separate save data is set. The image data specified in the list can be set in the world coordinate system. Along with this, for example, when the drawing list this time relates to the switching of the display mode, the setting for starting the control of the image data corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination can be performed.

Next, the background drawing data creation processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The background drawing data creation process is executed in step S3610 in the drawing process (FIG. 64).

First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the information on the use setting of the separate storage data is set in the register 153. If not set, in step S4402, hidden surface processing is executed to create background drawing data in the screen buffer 144. The hidden surface treatment has already been described.

In a succeeding step S4403, it is determined whether or not a separate save execution designation is set in the drawing list this time. If it has not been set, this drawing data creation processing is terminated. If set, in step S4404, the target mode area of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145 is set to the background mode created in step S4402. Write the drawing data of. As a result, the drawing data for the background is separately stored. After that, the main drawing data creation process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4401 that the use setting information of the separate storage data is set in the register 153, the process advances to step S4405. In step S4405, the separate save data is read from the mode area specified this time among the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145, and the read separate save data is read as the current save data. The drawing data for the background is written in the screen buffer 144. After that, the main drawing data creation process ends.

By executing the background drawing data creation processing as described above, the background drawing data through the geometry calculation and rendering, or the background drawing data related to the separately stored data is stored in the screen buffer 144. .. Further, in the frame in which the image corresponding to each display mode is displayed, the drawing data creation process for effect (step S3611) and the drawing data creation process for symbol (step S3612) are executed to perform the effect. The drawing data and the drawing data for the design are created, and the drawing data composition process (step S3613) is executed to create the drawing data for one frame.

Here, the timing at which the separately stored data for the first display mode and the separately stored data for the second display mode are created will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

FIG. 76(A) shows the drawing data PD66 for the background corresponding to the first display mode, and FIG. 76(B) shows the drawing data PD67 for the background corresponding to the second display mode. Also, FIG. 76(a) shows the ON/OFF state of the power of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 76(b) shows the presence/absence of the first display mode, and FIG. 76(c) shows the presence/absence of the second display mode. FIG. 76(d) shows the presence/absence of separate storage data for the first display mode, and FIG. 76(e) shows the presence/absence of separate storage data for the second display mode.

When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing of t1, power supply to the display CPU 131 is started, and the processing is started by the display CPU 131. Since the display mode is set to the first display mode, the drawing list is output from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 in order to display the image corresponding to the first display mode at a timing after the timing of t1. Then, based on the drawing list, the VDP 135 starts to create drawing data corresponding to the first display mode.

After that, at the timing of t2, the creation of the drawing data PD66 for the background corresponding to the first display mode is completed, so that the drawing data is stored as separate storage data for the first display mode in the first mode of the mode buffer 145. It is stored in the usage area 145a. In the background image based on the drawing data PD66 for the background corresponding to the first display mode, as shown in FIG. 76(A), the 3D character image shown by “A” to “F” in front of the rearmost image. Is displayed. Further, the separate storage data stored in the first mode area 145a is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued. Further, the display of the image corresponding to the first display mode is started at the timing of t2 or a predetermined timing thereafter.

After that, the display mode is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the effect operating device 48 being operated at the timing of t3. Then, the drawing data for the second display mode is created, and the display of the image corresponding to the second display mode is started. In addition, since the drawing data PD67 for the background corresponding to the second display mode is completed at the timing, the drawing data is stored as separate storage data for the second display mode in the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145. Memorized in. In the background image based on the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode, as shown in FIG. 76(B), a 3D character image indicated by “G” to “J” in front of the rearmost image. Is displayed. Further, the separate storage data stored in the second mode area 145b is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued.

Here, the number of objects to be set in the background drawing data PD66 corresponding to the first display mode is larger than that of the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode. Then, if the switching from the second display mode to the first display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load on the VDP 135 is large, there is a concern that the VDP 135 may drop processing. On the other hand, the processing load is large because the separate storage data for the first display mode, out of the separate storage data for both, is created by using the time during which the initial setting is performed when the power is turned on. When the display mode is switched to the first display mode under some circumstances, the processing error can be avoided by using the separately stored data.

On the other hand, the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode has a small processing load on the VDP 135 for its creation, and even if the switching to the second display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load on the VDP 135 is large. It is set to prevent processing omissions. However, when the background drawing data PD67 corresponding to the second display mode is also separately stored, and the processing load is relatively large even if the processing omission does not occur, the switching to the second display mode is performed. , The separately stored data is used.

By creating the separate save data as described above, as shown in the timings of t4 to t9, when the display mode switching is repeatedly executed in a short time, the separate save data is created in each display mode. By displaying the image for the background by utilizing it, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omission.

In addition, the target of separate storage is the background image, and does not include individual images for which variations such as designs are noticeable. As a result, when the display mode is switched in a situation where the individual image is fluctuating, even if the image is displayed using the separately saved data, the movement of the individual image in which the fluctuation is noticed is continued. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

The display mode is not limited to two stages, and may be set in three stages or four or more stages. Even in this case, it is possible to favorably switch the display mode by separately storing the drawing data for the background corresponding to each display mode.

Further, it may be configured such that the switching of the symbol type is performed without waiting, regardless of the display mode switching timing. In addition, the design may be different between the display modes.

Further, the effect character may be switched depending on the display mode. In this case, the effect character may not be a target of separate storage, or may be a target of separate storage.

<Structure for displaying 3D image using connected object>
Next, a configuration for displaying a 3D image using a connected object will be described.

The connected object is a unit of objects in which a plurality of part objects (partial objects) are connected with a connecting portion as a joint, and is set to give a motion to a character in a 3D image by relatively displacing each part object. Has been done. By using the connected object, the character of the 3D image can be smoothly moved. In addition, considering that the connected object has a skeleton portion and a joint portion, it can be referred to as a bone model.

The connected object is set to display a character performing a predetermined action. Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of connected objects for displaying a common character are set. The plurality of types of connected objects will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), a first connected object PC35 and a second connected object PC36 are set in order to display a common character. The first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 respectively have a plurality of connecting portions CT1 and CT2, but the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 are set at mutually different positions.

Specifically, the first connected object PC35 is not provided with a connecting portion at the knee portion, but is provided with a connecting portion CT1 at the elbow portion, as shown in FIGS. 77(a-1) and 77(a-2). It is possible to display the operation as shown. On the other hand, the second connected object PC36 does not have the connecting portion at the elbow portion, but has the connecting portion CT2 at the knee portion, as shown in FIGS. 77(b-1) and (b-2). The operation can be displayed. Since the connecting parts are set at different positions as described above, it is possible to make the character perform different actions depending on whether the first connected object PC35 is used or the second connected object PC36 is used. Becomes

Although both connected objects PC35 and PC36 have the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 at the common location, they may be configured not to have the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 at the common location. Further, although a common texture is mapped to both connected objects PC35 and PC36, the texture may be set individually for each. The positions of the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 and the type of the character are arbitrary as long as it is possible to make the character perform different actions by preparing a plurality of connecting objects PC35 and PC36.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying a state in which a character is moving using the above-described connected objects PC35 and PC36 will be described.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for the connected object executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the connected object is executed by the effect calculation process in step S3504 of the task process (FIG. 62). In addition, the arithmetic processing for the connected object is activated when the data table corresponding to the game time in which the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is executed is set.

First, in step S4501, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not the effect using the linked objects PC35 and PC36 is being executed (the character is being displayed). If the effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S4502 whether it is the start timing of the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36. If it is not the start timing, this operation processing is ended as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S4503.

In step S4503, the start designation information of the connected object effect is stored, and in the following step S4504, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table. To do. By the way, at the execution timing of the process of step S4504, the control start process is completed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36 in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S3501). Further, the control information of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 whose control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the series of effects of this time using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 is completed.

In the following step S4505, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated to update the control information related to the first connected object PC35. In step S4506, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated to update the control information related to the second connected object PC36.

In the following step S4507, the designation information of the first effect period is stored. Here, in the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36, the entire effect period is divided into a plurality of types of effect periods, specifically, a first effect period, a second effect period, and a third effect period. Then, the character is displayed using the first connected object PC35 during the first effect period and the third effect period, and the character is displayed using the second connected object PC36 during the second effect period. After that, in step S4508, the parameter of the first connected object PC35 of the two connected objects PC35, PC36 is set so as to be specified in the current drawing list.

In the following step S4509, another object for the first effect period, which is the object to be updated this time, is grasped based on the currently set data table. By the way, at the execution timing of the process in step S4509, the control start process for the object to be updated this time is completed in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S3501). After that, in step S4510, various parameters of the other object thus grasped are calculated to update the control information related to these other objects, and then the present calculation processing is ended.

When the arithmetic processing for the connected object is executed as described above, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list. On the other hand, the parameters of the first connected object PC 35 are set. Further, the start designation information of the connected object effect indicating that the effect using the connected objects PC35 and PC36 should be started and the specification information of the first effect period indicating the first effect period are set in the drawing list. To be done.

On the other hand, when the effect using the linked objects PC35 and PC36 is being executed (step S4501: YES), in step S4511, is the first effect period based on the currently set data table? Determine whether or not. In the case of the first effect period, after executing the processing of steps S4504 to S4510, the present calculation processing is ended. By the way, since this time is in the first effect period, the first connected object PC35 performs a predetermined first operation (see FIG. 77(a)) along with the progress of the first effect period. First, the parameters are calculated in step S4505.

When the arithmetic processing for the connected object is executed as described above, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list. On the other hand, the parameters of the first connected object PC 35 are set. Further, the designation information of the first effect period indicating that it is the first effect period is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S4511 that it is not during the first effect period, it is determined in step S4512 based on the currently set data table whether or not it is during the second effect period. In the case of the second effect period, in step S4513, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

In the following step S4514, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated to update the control information related to the first connected object PC35. In step S4515, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated to update the control information related to the second connected object PC36. By the way, since this time is in the second effect period, the second connected object PC36 performs the predetermined second operation (see FIG. 77(b)) along with the progress of the second effect period. In addition, parameter calculation is performed in step S4515.

In the following step S4516, the designation information of the second effect period is stored, and in step S4517, the parameter of the second linked object PC36 of both linked objects PC35 and PC36 is designated in the current drawing list. Set.

In subsequent step S4518, another object for the second effect period, which is the object to be updated this time, is grasped based on the currently set data table. Here, in the second effect period, the effect is more developed than in the first effect period, and at least the number of objects displayed when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period increases. The control start setting process (step S3501) for the increased amount of objects when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S4518. Then, in step S4519, the various parameters of the other object thus grasped are calculated to update the control information relating to these other objects, and then the present calculation processing is ended.

When the arithmetic processing for the connected object is executed as described above, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list. On the other hand, the parameters of the second connected object PC 36 are set. Further, the designation information of the second effect period indicating that it is the second effect period is set in the drawing list.

If it is determined in step S4512 that it is not in the second effect period, it means that it is the third effect period, and the process proceeds to step S4520. In step S4520, the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

In subsequent step S4521, various parameters of the first connected object PC35 are calculated to update the control information related to the first connected object PC35. By the way, since this time is in the third effect period, the first connected object PC35 performs the predetermined first operation (see FIG. 77(a)) along with the progress of the third effect period. Then, in step S4521, the parameters are calculated. In step S4522, various parameters of the second connected object PC36 are calculated to update the control information related to the second connected object PC36.

In the following step S4523, the designation information of the third effect period is stored, and in step S4524, the parameter of the first linked object PC35 of the two linked objects PC35, PC36 is designated in the current drawing list. Set.

In subsequent step S4525, another object for the third effect period, which is the object to be updated this time, is grasped based on the currently set data table. Here, in the third effect period, the effect is more developed than in the second effect period, and at least the number of objects displayed when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period increases. The control start setting process (step S3501) for the object increased by the change from the second effect period to the third effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S4525. After that, in step S4526, various parameters of the above-mentioned grasped other objects are calculated to update the control information relating to these other objects, and then this calculation processing is ended.

When the arithmetic processing for the connected object is executed as described above, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing, and the objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the drawing list. On the other hand, the parameters of the first connected object PC 35 are set. Also, the designation information of the third effect period indicating that it is the third effect period is set in the drawing list.

Next, the setting process for the connected object effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 79. The setting process for the connected object effect is executed in the effect setting process of step S3603 in the drawing process (FIG. 64). Further, the setting process for the connected object effect is activated when the start designation of the connected object effect or the designation of the first effect period to the third effect period is set in the current drawing list.

First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not the start designation of the linked object effect is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S4602, the address to which the first linked object PC35 is pre-transferred in the VRAM134 is grasped based on the drawing list this time, and the first linked object PC35 is read. .. In step S4603, the address to which the second connected object PC 36 is previously transferred in the VRAM 134 is grasped based on the current drawing list, and the second connected object PC 36 is read.

In subsequent step S4604, uniform α value setting processing for the first effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC35 is set to “1” that is opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC36 is set to “0” that is completely transparent information. To do. As a result, the preset color information (including the information of the α value set to each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is to all the pixels of the first connected object PC35, whereas The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the second connected object PC36.

In the following step S4605, the parameters specified for the first connected object PC35 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of both connected objects PC35, PC36. After that, in step S4606, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

Since this time is the processing time related to the start designation of the connected object effect, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are arranged in the world coordinate system. Further, the shapes of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 are substantially the same, but the connecting portions of the respective component objects are different. Then, even if the parameters of the first connected object PC35 are applied to the second connected object PC36 as they are, there are pixels whose coordinate designations do not match, but such pixels are subjected to a predetermined adjustment on the VDP135 side. ..

In the following step S4607, other objects for the first effect period designated in the current drawing list are grasped, and in step S4608, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. Then, in step S4609, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and then the setting process for the effect of the connected object is ended.

By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, the placement of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 in the world coordinate system is started at the same time. Further, since the same parameter is applied to both connected objects PC35 and PC36, both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are arranged in an overlapping manner at the same position in the world coordinate system. However, since the processing of step S4604 is executed, the second connected object PC36 is treated as a completely transparent object at the time of rendering. Therefore, the first connected object PC35 of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 is displayed on the display screen G. Only PC35 is displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4601 that the start designation of the linked object effect is not set in the current drawing list, the process advances to step S4610. In step S4610, it is determined whether or not the designation of the first effect period is set in the drawing list this time.

If set, the process of steps S4604 to S4609 is executed, and then this setting process ends. In this case, in step S4606, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are grasped from the information of the parameters set corresponding to the first connected object PC35 in the drawing list. Update.

By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are updated, but since the process of step S4604 is executed, both connected objects are displayed on the display screen G. Of the objects PC35 and PC36, only the first connected object PC35 is displayed. In addition, since the parameter updated in step S4605 corresponds to the first connected object PC35, the first connected operation is performed on the display screen G along with the progress of the first effect period. The object PC 35 is displayed.

When it is determined in step S4610 that the designation of the first effect period is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S4611. In step S4611, it is determined whether or not the designation of the second effect period is set in the drawing list this time.

If it has been set, in step S4612 a process for setting a uniform α value for the second effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC35 is set to “0” which is completely transparent information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC36 is set to “1” which is opaque information. To do. As a result, the preset color information (including the α value information set for each pixel from the beginning) is directly applied to all the pixels of the second connected object PC36, whereas The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the connected object PC35 of 1.

In the following step S4613, the parameters specified for the second connected object PC36 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of both connected objects PC35, PC36. After that, in step S4614, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

Since this time is the processing time related to the update of the second effect period, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are set in the drawing list so as to correspond to the second connected object PC36. Check the parameter information and update it. In this case, the shapes of the two connected objects PC35 and PC36 are substantially the same, but the connecting portions of the respective component objects are different. Then, even if the parameters of the second connected object PC36 are applied to the first connected object PC35 as they are, there are pixels whose coordinate designations do not match, but such pixels are subjected to a predetermined adjustment on the VDP135 side. ..

In the following step S4615, other objects for the second effect period designated in the drawing list this time are grasped, and in step S4616, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. After that, in step S4617, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and then the setting process for the main connected object effect is finished. Here, if the current processing time is the timing related to switching from the first effect period to the second effect period, the number of objects to be displayed increases, so in step S4617, processing corresponding to that is executed. ..

By executing the setting process for the connection object effect as described above, various parameters of both connection objects PC35 and PC36 are updated, but since the process of step S4612 is executed, both connection objects are displayed on the display screen G. Of the objects PC35 and PC36, only the second connected object PC36 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S4613 corresponds to the second connected object PC36, the second connection is performed so that the second operation is performed on the display screen G as the second effect period progresses. The object PC 36 is displayed.

If it is determined in step S4611 that the designation of the second effect period is not set in the current drawing list, it means that the designation of the third effect period is set in the current drawing list. The process proceeds to step S4618.

In step S4618, uniform α value setting processing for the third effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC35 is set to “1” that is opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC36 is set to “0” that is completely transparent information. To do. As a result, the preset color information (including the information of the α value set to each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is to all the pixels of the first connected object PC35, whereas The α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the second connected object PC36.

In the following step S4619, the parameter designated for the first connected object PC35 in the current drawing list is grasped as the parameter of both connected objects PC35, PC36. After that, in step S4620, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC35 and PC36.

Since this time is the processing time related to the update of the third effect period, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 set in the world coordinate system are set in the drawing list in association with the first connected object PC35. Check the parameter information and update it.

In a succeeding step S4621, other objects for the third effect period designated in the drawing list this time are grasped, and in step S4622, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. Thereafter, in step S4623, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed for the object, and then the setting process for the main connected object effect is ended. Here, when the current processing time is the timing related to switching from the second effect period to the third effect period, the number of objects to be displayed increases, so in step S4623, a process corresponding thereto is executed. ..

By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, various parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are updated, but since the process of step S4618 is executed, both connected objects are displayed on the display screen G. Of the objects PC35 and PC36, only the first connected object PC35 is displayed. Further, since the parameter updated in step S4619 corresponds to the first connected object PC35, the first connection is performed on the display screen G so that the first operation is performed as the third effect period progresses. The object PC 35 is displayed.

Next, the content of the connected object effect will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a connected object effect. Further, FIG. 80(a) shows the first effect period, FIG. 80(b) shows the second effect period, and FIG. 80(c) shows the third effect period. 80(a-1), (b-1), and (c-1) are image diagrams of the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 80(a-2), (b-2), and (c-2) are The display screen G is shown. 80(a-2), (b-2), and (c-2), the background image and the design are omitted, but the background image is actually displayed on the back side of the image for each effect. At the same time, the design is displayed on the front side.

In the first effect period, as shown in FIG. 80(a-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the transparent processing is performed on the second connected object PC36. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80(a-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the first connected object PC35 is displayed on the display screen G, and the first motion is performed along with the progress of the first effect period. .. Characters CH13 to CH15 shown in "A" to "C" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects.

In the second effect period, as shown in FIG. 80(b-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the first connected object PC35 is subjected to the transparency processing. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80(b-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the second connected object PC36 is displayed on the display screen G, and the second motion is performed along with the progress of the second effect period. ..

Here, when comparing FIG. 80(a-2) and FIG. 80(b-2), it is shown that both characters CH12 have different shapes, but in reality, both connected objects PC35, The same texture is mapped to the PC 36, and the connecting portion (joint portion) becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even if the first effect period is switched to the second effect period, the same, substantially the same or similar image is displayed on the display screen G for the character CH12, and it is difficult for the player to recognize the change. .. However, if it is difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of switching, textures may be set individually for both connected objects PC35, PC36.

In the second effect period, the characters CH13 to CH17 shown in "A" to "E" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH13 to CH17 is greater than that in the first effect period.

In the third effect period, as shown in FIG. 80(c-1), both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set in the world coordinate system, but the second connected object PC36 is subjected to the transparency processing. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80(c-2), the character CH12 corresponding to the first connected object PC35 is displayed on the display screen G, and the first motion is performed as the third effect period progresses. .. Further, in the third effect period, the characters CH13 to CH19 shown in "A" to "G" are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH13 to CH19 is greater than that in the second effect period.

As described above, since a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set for the common character, the connected objects PC35 and PC36 to be displayed can be switched according to the type of motion using the joint portion. .. For example, if a plurality of types of operations are to be performed by a single connected object, it is necessary to set the corresponding number of connected portions and part objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the capacity of the NAND flash memory 162 that can be stored as a single image data will be exceeded. There is a concern that the processing time and the transfer time for handling will be extended. On the other hand, since the plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of motions without causing the inconvenience described above.

In addition, in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, there are many occasions in which the effects are modified, and if the entire movement of the connected object is reviewed every time the motion of the character is modified, it takes a lot of time for the design. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of connected objects PC35, PC36 according to the type of operation to be performed as described above, even if it is necessary to correct the effect, the already created connected object PC35 , It becomes unnecessary to modify all of the PC 36. Therefore, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of motions while allowing the pachinko machine 10 to be designed well.

Further, not only the switching source object but also the switching destination object before the timing at which the connected object is switched to display the character is set as the control target in the display CPU 131 and arranged in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135. To be targeted. Thus, when the switching timing comes, the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 do not execute the control start processing for the switching destination object, but execute the control update processing having a processing load smaller than that of the control start processing. Therefore, the processing load at the switching timing is reduced.

In particular, at the switching timing, the effect develops and the number of displayed objects increases, so that the processing load on the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 becomes relatively large. In this case, assuming a configuration in which the control start processing is performed on the switching destination object, there is a concern that processing omission may occur in the display CPU 131 or the VDP 135. Since it may be executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the processing omission.

Further, since both connected objects PC35 and PC36 are arranged at the same time in the world coordinate system and the uniform α value to be applied is switched between completely transparent information and non-transparent information, the display CPU 131 has a uniform α value for switching between them. Switching may be designated, and in the VDP 135, the uniform α value to be applied may be switched according to the designation. Therefore, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the complication of the processing configuration of the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135.

In addition, the display CPU 131 provides the VDP 135 with only parameter information for the connected object to be displayed of the connected objects PC35 and PC36 that are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system. As a result, the amount of data set in the drawing list can be reduced. Further, in the VDP 135, since the parameters of both connected objects PC35 and PC36 may be updated in the same manner, the processing load of the VDP 135 can be reduced.

In addition, in the switching from the first effect period to the third effect period, instead of or in addition to the increase in the number of characters, the action of the effect character different from the character in which the plurality of connected objects are prepared is performed. The configuration may be newly added, or the configuration may be such that, in addition to the character in which the plurality of connected objects are prepared, the display of the effect character having a large processing load is started.

The control start timing of the display CPU 131 of the second connected object PC 36 and the control start timing of the VDP 135 may not be the same as those of the first connected object PC 35. For example, the timing may be before the switching timing from the first effect period to the second effect period but after the control start timing of the first connected object PC35.

Further, although the processing load at the switching timing of the effect period is larger than that in the above configuration, the control of the second connected object PC 36 may be started at the switching timing. In this case, since the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are not simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, it is not necessary to uniformly control the α value and switch the display target.

In addition, for both connected objects PC35 and PC36 that are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, the display object may be switched not by uniformly adjusting the α value, but by switching the rendering object. In this case, since the connected object on the side that is not the display target is not rendered, the processing load at the time of rendering is reduced as compared with the above configuration.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the third effect period is not provided, or the effect period longer than the fourth effect period may be set. Further, three or more connected objects may be prepared for one character.

Further, the first connected object PC 35 and the second connected object PC 36 may have a configuration in which the number of connected portions is different, instead of the configuration in which the connected portions are different. In this configuration, the processing loads when the first connected object PC35 and the second connected object PC36 are arranged and controlled in the world coordinate system are different. In this case, the connected objects PC35 and PC36 are prevented from being arranged in the world coordinate system at the same time. Then, at the update timing when the processing load is small due to the relationship between the characters other than the characters represented by the connected objects PC35 and PC36 and the background image, the side of the connected objects PC35 and PC36 that has the larger processing load during control is used. On the other hand, at the update timing when the processing load is large due to the characters and the background image, it is preferable to use one of the connected objects PC35 and PC36 that has the smaller processing load for control.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

As described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70, the object can be masked by using the Z buffer 143. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform the masking operation on the program of the display CPU 131, and it is not necessary to set the mask data which is a kind of image data in the VDP 135. Therefore, the mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity required for storing the image data.

As described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 76, the drawing data for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode is separately stored, and is stored in the player's staging operation device 48 when the processing load of the VDP 135 is large. When the display mode is switched based on the operation of, the separately stored data is used. As a result, even if the display mode switching is repeatedly executed in a short time, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of processing omission.

As described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80, since a plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set for a common character, connected objects to be displayed according to the type of motion using the joint portion. The objects PC35 and PC36 can be switched. For example, if a plurality of types of operations are to be performed by a single connected object, it is necessary to set the corresponding number of connected portions and part objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data becomes large, and there is a concern that the capacity of the NAND flash memory 162 that can be stored as a single image data will be exceeded. There is a concern that the processing time and the transfer time for handling will be extended. On the other hand, since the plurality of connected objects PC35 and PC36 are set, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of motions without causing the inconvenience described above.

In addition, in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, there are many occasions in which the effects are modified, and if the entire movement of the connected object is reviewed every time the motion of the character is modified, it takes a lot of time for the design. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of connected objects PC35, PC36 according to the type of operation to be performed as described above, even if it is necessary to correct the effect, the already created connected object PC35 , It becomes unnecessary to modify all of the PC 36. Therefore, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of motions while allowing the pachinko machine 10 to be designed well.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the configuration of the display control device 190 is different from that in each of the above embodiments. FIG. 81 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the display control device 190.

As shown in FIG. 81, the display control board 191 of the display control device 190 is provided with a first display CPU 193 and a second display CPU 194 as control means for creating a drawing list and transmitting it to the VDP 192. Further, a management CPU 195 is provided to control the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194.

The management CPU 195 determines the content of the effect based on the instruction from the sound emission control device 60 received through the input port 196, and based on the determination result, one frame for each of the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194. It provides the base information for determining the content of an image. Information corresponding to different frames is provided to the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194, and the first display CPU 193 and the second display CPU 194 correspond to the image for one frame based on the received information. The drawing list is transmitted to VDP192.

The control programs of the CPUs 193 to 195 are stored in advance in the NAND flash memory of the memory module 197, and are pre-transferred to the work RAM 198 by the timing required by the CPUs 193 to 195 based on the transfer instruction from the management CPU 195. It The CPUs 193-195 execute various processes while accessing the work RAM 198. Also, image data is stored in advance in the memory module 197, and the image data is pre-transferred to the expansion buffer 202 of the VRAM 201 by the timing required by the VDP 192 based on the transfer instruction from the management CPU 195. ..

The VDP 192 is provided with a first drawing unit 203 and a second drawing unit 204 in one-to-one correspondence with the display CPUs 193 and 194. The drawing list sent from the first display CPU 193 is sent to the first drawing unit 203, and the drawing list sent from the second display CPU 194 is sent to the second drawing unit 204. Here, the drawing units 203 and 204 may be for 2D display as in the first embodiment, or may be for 3D display as in the second embodiment.

The drawing units 203 and 204 operate individually and simultaneously, and create one frame of drawing data corresponding to the received drawing list in the VRAM 201. The frame buffer 205 of the VRAM 201 is provided with a first frame area 206, a second frame area 207, and a third frame area 208, and drawing data by the drawing units 203 and 204 is stored in one of the frame areas 206 to 208. Is drawn.

The drawing units 203 and 204 and the frame regions 206 to 208 are connected to each other through the selector unit 211, and the selector unit 211 sets the drawing targets of the drawing units 203 and 204 to any of the frame regions 206 to 208. It The display unit 212 is connected to the selector unit 211 as well as the drawing units 203 and 204, and the frame regions 206 to 208 to which the display circuit 212 outputs image signals can be switched by the selector unit 211.

In the above configuration, the drawing units 203 and 204 create drawing data in the frame regions 206 to 208 by using the drawing period of two frames, and when comparing the drawing units 203 and 204, one frame The drawing data is created by shifting the drawing period by the time difference. That is, creation of drawing data is completed every drawing period for one frame. Then, at each update timing, the display circuit 212 outputs the image signal with the frame area that is not the drawing target of the drawing units 203 and 204 as the output target. By thus creating the drawing data by the triple buffer method, the image is updated at each update timing of one frame while securing the drawing period of two frames as the creation period of the drawing data of one frame. Can be made. Therefore, compared to each of the above-described embodiments, a margin is created in the drawing data creation period, and even with a configuration in which a complicated image or a large-screen image is displayed, that image can be displayed well.

In the above configuration, the first drawing unit 203 alternately creates the drawing data for one frame in the first frame area 206 and the second frame area 207 in the drawing period for one frame. The drawing data for one frame may be created in the third frame region 208 in a drawing period for a plurality of frames. In this case, basically, the drawing data can be created by the double buffer method, and the drawing data corresponding to a particularly complicated image can be created over the drawing period for a plurality of frames.

Further, the number of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit may be two, and the configuration may be such that four or more frame regions are provided, and the number of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit is three. In addition, four or more frame regions may be provided, or five or more combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit may be provided and six or more frame regions may be provided. .. That is, by providing a plurality of combinations of the display CPU and the drawing unit and by providing the number of frame regions equal to or more than the number of combinations, one frame of drawing data is created using the drawing periods of a plurality of frames. be able to.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the background arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 131 is different from that of the second embodiment. The calculation processing for this background will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S4701, the rearmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S4702, various parameters of the grasped rearmost image are calculated to update the control information. In subsequent step S4703, the background update target object is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the following step S4704, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated to update the control information.

After that, in step S4705, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not the current processing time is the processing time for creating the drawing list corresponding to the frame at the timing immediately before the development effect. ..

The development effect is at least one of an effect in which the number of effect characters is increased, an effect in which a motion of the effect character is newly added, and an effect in which an effect character having a large processing load is displayed. It is a production corresponding to. Further, in the development effect, the grasping process of the object corresponding to the development effect and the update process of the information for the control are executed in the effect calculation process (step S3504) in the task process (FIG. 62) of the display CPU 131. In addition, in the rendering setting process (step S3603) in the rendering process (FIG. 64) of the VDP 135, the geometry calculation and rendering as already described for the object corresponding to the development rendering are performed.

When it is determined in step S4705 that it is the timing immediately before the development effect, in step S4706, the separately designated execution designation information is stored, and then the present arithmetic processing ends.

When the background calculation process is executed as described above, the background image data corresponding to the timing immediately before the development effect is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, The separately designated execution designation information is set. By executing the background drawing data creation processing (FIG. 75) in the second embodiment on the drawing list in the VDP 135, the background drawing data corresponding to the timing immediately before the development effect is separately stored. To be done. In this case, in this embodiment, a separate storage buffer is provided in the VRAM 134 instead of the mode buffer 145, and the background drawing data is separately stored in the separate storage buffer.

If it is determined in step S4705 in the background calculation processing (FIG. 82) that it is not the timing immediately before the development effect, in step S4707, the development effect is under development based on the currently set data table. Or not. If it is not in the development production, this operation processing is ended as it is. In this case, by outputting the drawing list corresponding to the drawing list, the VDP 135 creates the drawing data for the background as usual using the specified rearmost image and object.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4707 that the development effect is being performed, then in step S4708 the use designation information of the separate storage data is stored, and then the present arithmetic processing is terminated.

When the calculation processing for the background is executed as described above, at least the use designation information of the separate saved data is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing. By executing the background drawing data creation processing (FIG. 75) in the second embodiment on the drawing list in the VDP 135, at least rendering of the background drawing data is not performed, The separately stored background drawing data is diverted as the background drawing data in the development effect.

According to the above configuration, the rendering of the drawing data for the background is omitted in a situation where the processing load for displaying the effect character is large. As a result, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the processing load of the VDP 135 becomes extremely large and processing drop occurs in the situation where the development effect is performed.

In addition, the separately drawn background drawing data corresponds to the background image displayed in the frame immediately before the development effect is started. As a result, even if the background image is diverted during the development effect, it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort.

If the background image is an image displayed so as to be scrolled in a predetermined direction over a display period for a plurality of frames, scroll display is performed until immediately before development effect, and scroll display is performed during development effect. It will be in a stopped state.

Further, in the above processing configuration, the display CPU 131 may not calculate and update the parameters of the background image data, and the VDP 135 may not perform geometry calculation. In this case, the processing load can be further reduced.

<Supplementary explanation>
Here, a supplementary description of the processing configuration executed by the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 in each of the above-described embodiments will be given with reference to the flowcharts.

<First processing configuration>
First, regarding the processing contents when the reading process, the game number control process, and the game state transition process, which are a part of the process necessary for advancing the game, are set dispersedly in the timer interrupt process and the normal process. explain.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. It should be noted that this processing is activated by the MPU 52 periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S4801, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various winning detection sensors are read, the states of these various winning detection sensors are determined, and the processing of saving the winning detection information is executed. When the winning detection sensor corresponding to the generation of the winning balls detects the winning of the game balls, it sets a winning ball command for instructing the payout controller 55 to pay out the winning balls.

In a succeeding step S4802, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

In a succeeding step S4803, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when they reach their maximum values, they are cleared to 0.

In a succeeding step S4804, a through winning process associated with winning in the through gate 25 is executed. In the through winning process, the value of the electric auditors release counter C4 updated in the step S4804 is reserved for the electric duty, provided that the number of the stored accessory holdings stored in the electric power holding area is less than 4. Store in area.

After that, in step S4805, the winning process for the working holes associated with the winning of the working ports 23, 24 is executed. In the winning process for the working opening, when a winning is generated in the upper working opening 23 or the lower working opening 24, the number of starting pending memories stored in the pending ball storage area 54b is the upper limit number (for example, " 4”), the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S4803 is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 54b. .. In this case, it is stored in the first holding area among the empty holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE, that is, in the holding area corresponding to the current starting holding storage number. After executing the processing of step S4805, the timer interrupt processing ends. Incidentally, the process of step S4805 corresponds to the acquisition process of the hold information described in the first embodiment.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing normal processing. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed. As an outline, the processing of steps S4901 to S4909 is executed as a processing of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S4910 and S4911 is executed in the remaining time.

In step S4901, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 55. If a predetermined effect command is set, it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

In the following step S4902, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

In a succeeding step S4903, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In this game time control processing, jackpot determination, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 31, display control of the main display unit 33, and the like are performed.

Then, in step S4904, a game state transition process for transitioning the game state is executed. In the game state transition processing, when the game times corresponding to the jackpot winning have been completed, the transition processing to the opening/closing execution mode is executed, and the opening/closing processing of the variable winning device 22 is started. It should be noted that various commands for the open/close execution mode are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 when the open/close execution mode is started, during the open/close execution mode, and when the open/close execution mode is ended. In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode ends, the shift of the win/loss lottery mode or the shift of the support mode is executed in correspondence with the jackpot type related to the game times that triggered the start of the mode.

In a succeeding step S4905, a demo display process is executed. In the demo display process, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) for demonstrating without a new game time being started after the game time is ended in a situation where the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress The determination process of whether or not it is performed is executed. In addition, since the power supply to the MPU 52 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 seconds) for starting the demo is elapsed without the game time being newly started. The determination process of whether or not it is performed is executed. When it is determined that the time has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

In a succeeding step S4906, an electric power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric power accessory 24a provided in the lower operation port 24 is executed. In the electric power support process, the information stored in the electric power holding area 54c of the RAM 54 is used to determine whether to open the electric accessory 24a, the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 24a, and the accessory use. The display of the display unit 34 is controlled.

Then, in step S4907, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 58 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 57. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

In a succeeding step S4908, it is determined whether or not the RAM 54 stores the power failure flag. The power failure flag is a flag that is stored when the occurrence of power failure is confirmed, and is erased in the next main process.

If the power interruption flag is not stored, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has ended. Therefore, in step S4909, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached, that is, It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process.

That is, in step S4910, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. In step S4911, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values, they are cleared to 0.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S4901 to S4907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and in the same manner. The fluctuation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4908 that the power failure flag is stored, it means that power shutdown has occurred, and therefore, the processing at power failure after step S4912 is executed. That is, in step S4912, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, after that, in step S4913, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored, and in step S4914, access to the RAM 54 is prohibited, and then the power is completely cut off to perform processing. Continue infinite loop until can no longer be executed.

Next, the game number control process of step S4903 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game time control process, first in step S5001, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. If it is in the open/close execution mode, this game time control processing is ended without executing the processing of step S5002 and thereafter. That is, in the open/close execution mode, the game game is not started regardless of whether or not a prize has been paid to the operating ports 23, 24.

If it is not in the open/close execution mode, it is determined in step S5002 whether or not the main display unit 33 is in the variable display. If the main display portion 33 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the game number starting process of steps S5003 to S5005.

In the game game starting process, first, in step S5003, it is determined whether or not the number N of balls to be reserved for starting is "0". The case where the number N of starting reserved balls is "0" means that the reserved information is not stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b. Therefore, this game time control processing is ended as it is.

If the number N of starting reserved balls is not "0", a data setting process for setting the data stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved ball storage area 54b for variable display is executed in step S5004. Specifically, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. After that, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. After that, after the variation start processing is executed in step S5005, this game time control processing is ended.

Here, the fluctuation start process of step S5005 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S5101, a win/loss determination process for determining whether or not the pending information corresponding to the current variation start process corresponds to the jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won by referring to the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 among the holding information shifted to the execution area AE and the hit/loss table corresponding to the current win/loss lottery mode. judge. Incidentally, the process of step S5101 corresponds to the winning/winning lottery process described in the first embodiment.

In a succeeding step S5102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won. If the jackpot is won, type determination processing is executed in step S5103. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified by referring to the numerical information relating to the jackpot type counter C2 of the pending information shifted to the execution area AE and the distribution table.

In a succeeding step S5104, a stop result setting process corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, in the game time related to the current fluctuation start, the information of the mode of the picture finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 53, The specified information is stored in the RAM 54. In the jackpot result stop result table, the types of the patterns of the symbols stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 are set to be different for each jackpot result type, and in step S5104, it is specified in step S5103. The RAM 54 stores information on the form of the pattern according to the type of the jackpot result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5102 that the jackpot has not been won, in step S5105, a stop result setting process for out-of-range is executed. Specifically, the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 in the game time related to the start of fluctuation is specified from the stop result table for the time of dislocation stored in the ROM 53 in advance, The specified information is stored in the RAM 54. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After the processing of step S5104 or step S5105 is executed, the variable display time setting processing is executed in step S5106.

In this process, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 54a of the RAM 54 is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated on the symbol display device 31 at the current game time. Specifically, when the number of game times related to the variation start this time is a big hit result, it is determined that the reach display is generated. Further, even when the result is not the big hit result, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the numerical value information regarding the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical value information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach.

When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the reach display variable display time table stored in the ROM 53 is referred to, the change display time information corresponding to the value of the present change type counter CS is acquired, and the change is obtained. The display time information is set in the variable display time counter provided in the RAM 54. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variable display time information corresponding to the current value of the variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach display table for reach non-occurrence stored in the ROM 53. Then, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter. Incidentally, the fluctuation display time that can be acquired by referring to the reach display variable display time table is different from the fluctuation display time that can be acquired by referring to the reach generation fluctuation display time table.

The variable display time information when the reach is not generated is set so that the variable display time becomes shorter as the number N of starting pending balls increases. In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, compared with the case where the support frequency is the low-frequency support mode, the reach non-reach time is selected so that a shorter variable display time is selected, compared with the case where the number of hold information is the same. The variable display time table for generation is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the variable display time does not vary according to the number N of start-up holding balls or the support mode may be adopted, and the above relationship may be reversed. Further, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when the reach occurs. Further, the variable display time table may be set individually for each of the various jackpot results, the case of the out-reach, and the case of the non-reach occurrence.

After the variable display time setting process is executed in step S5106, the variable command and the type command are set in step S5107. The variation command includes information on the variation display time. As described above, the fluctuation display time acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table is different from the fluctuation display time acquired by referring to the reach occurrence variable display time table. Even if the use command does not include the information about the presence or absence of the reach occurrence, the voice emission control device 60 which is the sub-side control device can identify the presence or absence of the reach occurrence from the information of the variable display time. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. It should be noted that the variation command may include information directly indicating whether or not the reach has occurred.

Further, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes, as the game result information, any one of the normal jackpot result information, the explicit 2R certainty variation jackpot result information, the 15R certainty variation jackpot result information, and the outlier result information.

The variation command and the type command set in step S5107 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in step S4901 in the normal process (FIG. 84). After executing the processing of step S5107, variable display of the pattern is started on the main display unit 33 in step S5108. Then, this fluctuation start process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the game time control process (FIG. 85 ), if the main display portion 33 is in the variable display, the processes of steps S5006 to S5009 are executed. In the process, first, in step S5006, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game time has elapsed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S5007. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 33 is changed. Then, this game time control processing is ended.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S5008. In the fluctuation ending process, the information stored in the RAM 54 in the process of step S5104 or step S5105 is specified, and the main display unit 33 is displayed so that the pattern mode corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 33. Display control.

In a succeeding step S5009, a fluctuation end command is set. The variation end command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in step S4901 in the normal process (FIG. 84). The sound emission control device 60 ends the effect in the game time based on the received variation end command. Further, a command corresponding thereto is transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 to the display control device 70, and the display control device 70 finalizes and displays the final stop symbol combination in the game time (final stop display). Then, this game time control processing is ended.

<Second processing configuration>
Next, a description will be given of the processing contents when the reading processing, the game number control processing, and the game state transition processing, which are a part of the processing necessary for advancing the game, are integrated into the timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by MPU 52 of main controller 50 when the supply of operating power is started.

First, in step S5201, a startup process associated with power-on is executed. In subsequent step S5202, access to RAM 54 is permitted. Thereafter, in step S5203, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply and firing control device 57 is turned on, and in the following step S5204, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is stored in the RAM 54. Further, in step S5205, a RAM determination value is calculated, and in subsequent step S5206, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, that is, the validity of the stored and held data.

If the RAM erase switch is not turned on, and the power failure flag is stored and the RAM determination value is normal, the power failure flag is erased from the RAM 54 in step S5207 and the RAM is processed in step S5208. Delete the judgment value. After that, the interrupt permission is set in step S5209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S5210, and the fluctuation type counter CS is updated in step S5211. Then, after executing the processes of steps S5209 to S5211, the process returns to step S5209 to repeat the processes of steps S5209 to S5211.

Note that the interrupt prohibition setting may be performed immediately after the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S5209. In this case, the timer interrupt processing described later may be configured to wait for execution until the next interrupt enable setting is made when the start timing comes in a situation where the interrupt disable setting is made. ..

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to steps S5212 to S5213. Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the abnormality of the data stored and held is confirmed by the RAM determination value, the process similarly proceeds to steps S5212 to S5213.

In step S5212, the used area of the RAM 54 is cleared to “0”, and in step S5213, the RAM 54 is initialized. Then, the process proceeds to steps S5209 to S5211.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 52 of main controller 50.

In the timer interrupt processing, in steps S5301 to S5305, the same processing as steps S4801 to S4805 of the first processing configuration is executed.

After that, in step S5306, the variation type counter CS is updated, in step S5307, game number control processing is executed, in step S5308, game state transition processing is executed, and in step S5309, demo display processing. Then, in step S5310, electric power combination support processing is executed, in step S5311 game ball launch control processing is executed, and in step S5312 external output processing is executed. After that, this timer interrupt processing ends. The detailed contents of each of these processes are the same as in the case of the first processing configuration.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied to the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments independently, or may be applied to the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments in a predetermined combination. In addition, each of the following configurations may be applied to an embodiment not illustrated as an application target of the configuration.

(1) For the purpose of improving the data read speed in the display CPUs 72, 131 and VDPs 76, 135, the NAND flash memories 102, 162 are not used as the memory modules 74, 133, but NOR A configuration in which data is pre-transferred or boot data is read from the boot memories 119 and 179 may be applied to a configuration in which a randomly accessible memory such as a flash memory is used.

(2) Focusing on the effect that the initialization process can proceed smoothly, the boot memories 119 and 179 are not provided, and the boot data is stored in the NAND flash memories 102 and 162. The boot data may be pre-transferred to the work RAMs 73 and 132 before the setting process is started. In this case, it is preferable that the wait processing is executed in the display CPUs 72 and 131 until the transfer of the boot data to the work RAMs 73 and 132 is completed. In the case of the above configuration, the time from the power supply start timing to the display CPUs 72, 131 to the substantial start timing of the initial setting process is longer than that in each of the above embodiments, but the initial setting process does not proceed smoothly. It will be possible.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the program data may be stored in advance in another randomly accessible memory provided separately from the NAND flash memories 102 and 162. Further, a part or all of the image data may be stored in advance in another randomly accessible memory provided separately from the NAND flash memories 102 and 162.

(4) The boot memories 119 and 179 may be provided separately from the memory modules 74 and 133. In this case, the signal path between the boot memories 119 and 179 and the display CPUs 72 and 131 is the signal path between the memory modules 74 and 133 and the display CPUs 72 and 131, and the memory modules 74 and 133 and the RAMs 73 and 75. , 132, and 134, the data can be transferred from the memory modules 74 and 133 to the work RAMs 73 and 132 and the VRAMs 75 and 134 by utilizing the period in which the boot data is read into the display CPUs 72 and 131. It will be possible.

(5) The program data of the initial setting process (FIG. 10) may be configured only by the boot data without requiring the data of the latter half portion. In this case, it is necessary to increase the storage capacity required in the boot memories 119 and 179 as compared with the above-described embodiments, but it is not necessary to transfer the program data for the initial setting process during the initial setting process. By the way, in this configuration, it is necessary to set the program data for instructing the transfer of the regular program data and the regular image data in the boot data.

(6) In addition to the memory modules 74 and 133, a memory may be provided to store image data in advance. Regarding this configuration, specifically, a NOR flash memory is provided as the above-mentioned other memory, and the normal image data is stored in the NOR flash memory. Then, by connecting the NOR type flash memory to the VDPs 76 and 135, when displaying an image corresponding to the normal image data, the normal image data may be read from the NOR type flash memory. According to this configuration, it is necessary to provide a plurality of types of memories for storing image data in advance, but it is possible to handle the regular image data without transferring the regular image data when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The displayed image can be displayed well. Even in this configuration, the NOR flash memory stores only the regular image data, and the memory modules 74 and 133 store the change image data whose data capacity tends to increase due to the diversification of effects. With the configuration, since a NOR flash memory having a small storage capacity may be used, it is possible to achieve the above effect while reducing the cost. Further, the above configuration may be applied to regular program data.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, when backup power is not supplied to the RAMs of the display control devices 70 and 130 and the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the data groups stored in the RAMs are Instead of the structure in which the RAM is destroyed or erased, backup power may be supplied to the RAM.

As a means for supplying the backup power, the power supply and firing control device 57 may also be used as a power supply unit for power cut that supplies backup power to the RAM 54 of the main control device 50 or the like. An intermediate power source unit may be provided.

(8) The storage unit to which the program data and the image data are transferred in advance is a volatile storage unit such as a RAM if the data read speed is higher than that of the NAND flash memories 102 and 162 and overwrite is possible. Not limited.

(9) The configuration of pre-transfer of program data and image data and the configuration of reading boot data from the boot memories 119 and 179 may be applied to control devices other than the display control devices 70 and 130. For example, it may be applied to the sound emission control device 60. Further, it may be applied to the main control device 50, the payout control device 55 or the power supply and firing control device 57. In addition, in the configuration in which a movable object for game play operation is provided instead of the symbol display device 31, the above configuration may be applied to a control device that drives and controls this movable object.

(10) With respect to an image displayed so as to perform a predetermined operation over a display period for a plurality of frames, after the operations in a predetermined order are reproduced in the forward direction, the image may be reversely reproduced. .. In this case, since it is not necessary for the first operation and the last operation to have continuity, it is possible to facilitate the creation of image data at the designing stage as compared with the case of loop reproduction.

(11) At the timing when the processing load on the display CPUs 72, 131 and VDPs 76, 135 increases, such as when the effect character makes a complicated motion or when the effect character increases, the character is used as a background character. The character on the side not paid attention may continue to be displayed, but the motion may not be updated. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

(12) A plurality of image data for displaying a predetermined character may be simultaneously set in the frame areas 82a and 82b. This makes it possible to display a plurality of characters while suppressing the number of image data stored in advance. Further, in this case, the image data may be set by horizontally reversing it, and when performing an effect of passing a predetermined position, the coordinates may be set so that the timing of passing the position is different.

(13) The image data in which a plurality of effect images are combined may be stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, the visual effect of the effect image can be enhanced while suppressing an increase in processing load.

(14) In the second embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data set in the world coordinate system. However, instead of this, all cameras set in the world coordinate system are set. A single camera may be commonly set for image data.

(15) In the second embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is configured to be projected in the unit of the background image, the effect image, and the design image, but is summarized in the unit of the background image and the effect image. The effect image and the pattern image may be collectively projected, or all of them may be collectively projected.

(16) In the second embodiment, when the texture mapping process is performed, the texture may be attached only to the projected surface of a single object. In this case, the rendering processing load can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of performing the texture mapping before the projection, the texture mapping may be performed after the projection.

(17) In the second embodiment, the display of the symbol may be performed based on arranging the data in which the two-dimensional image data is attached to the plate polygon in the world coordinate system. In this case, the vertex colors of the four corners of the plate polygon may be changed in order to display the pattern as if it were illuminated by light.

(18) In the second embodiment, by combining the camera work in the world coordinate system and the enlargement/reduction of the object, a predetermined character is displayed in a certain size and the distance the character is moving is displayed. You may perform the display production which makes it look long.

(19) When focusing on the characteristic configuration related to display control using image data in each of the above-described embodiments, the NAND flash memories 102 and 162 are used as a storage unit that stores program data and image data in advance. The configuration and the configuration that is pre-transferred to the read RAMs 73, 75, 132, and 134 are arbitrary, and a randomly accessible storage unit such as a NOR flash memory is used as the storage unit that stores the program data and the image data in advance. The above-mentioned characteristic configuration relating to display control may be applied to the existing configuration or the configuration in which there is no prior transfer to the RAMs 73, 75, 132, and 134.

(20) Withholding information relating to winning in the upper working opening 23 and holding information relating to winning in the lower working opening 24 are stored separately, and withholding information relating to winning in the lower working opening 24 takes precedence. A configuration in which the digestion is exhausted may be applied, or conversely, a configuration in which the reservation information related to winning in the upper operation port 23 is preferentially digested may be applied.

Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not arranged side by side in the vertical direction, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 23 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 24 are provided on the left and right. The structure may be arranged in parallel, or both of these working ports may be arranged obliquely in parallel. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 41, both operation ports may be arranged apart from each other so that only the first operation port or only the second operation port can be won.

Further, in the above-mentioned configuration, the main display portion 33 displays the first display area for displaying the result of the judgment of the holding information acquired based on the winning of the upper working opening 23 and the winning of the lower working opening 24. It is also possible to provide a second display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the held information is held. In this case, the variable information of the pattern is displayed in the first display area based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper working opening 23 is the target of the hit determination or the hit determination. Is started and the stop result corresponding to the win/fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display for one game is ended. In addition, based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning of the lower working opening 24 is the target of the hit determination or the hit determination is performed, the variable display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area. At the same time as the start, the result of stop corresponding to the win/no judgment is displayed, and the variation display of the one game is ended.

(21) Depending on whether the hold information related to winning in the upper working opening 23 is the target of the winning/disabling judgment, or the holding information related to winning in the lower working opening 24 is the target of the winning/failing judgment. The profits obtained may be different. Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operating ports are provided as in each of the above-described embodiments, the number of operating ports is not limited to two and may be three or more. Further, the configuration may be such that only one operating port is provided.

(22) Instead of the configuration in which the display control devices 70 and 130 are controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on the command output from the main control device 50, based on the command output from the main control device 50, The display control devices 70 and 130 may control the sound emission control device 60. In this case, the display control devices 70 and 130 may determine the content of the effect based on the command output from the main control device 50. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as one control device. In this case, the integrated control device may determine the content of the effect based on the command output from the main control device 50.

Further, one of the functions of the sound emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 may be integrated in the main control device 50, or both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 50. Good. The configuration of the command output from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 is also arbitrary.

Further, the target to which the performance operation device 48 is electrically connected is not limited to the sound emission control device 60, and may be, for example, the main control device 50 or the display control devices 70 and 130. It may have been done. However, since the operation of the effect operation device 48 is performed when selecting an effect, it is preferable to be connected to a control device that determines the content of the effect. For example, in the configuration in which the display control devices 70 and 130 control the sound emission control device 60 as described above, it is preferable that the effect operation device 48 is connected to the display control devices 70 and 130. Further, in a configuration in which one control device in which the functions of the sound emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 are integrated is provided, the content of the effect is determined by the control device. It is preferable that the performance operation device 48 is connected to the control device.

Further, in a control device that executes a predetermined process such as selection of an effect according to an operation state of the effect operation device 48, when the operation of the effect operation device 48 is performed a plurality of times during a unit period, the operation is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a filter means for reducing the number of times of recognizing is. For example, when the effect operation device 48 is operated once, the operation of the effect operation device 48 may be invalidated for a predetermined invalid period from the timing when the operation is recognized. ..

(23) A configuration including a display CPU and a VDP having both the function of displaying a two-dimensional image as in the first embodiment and the function of displaying a three-dimensional image as in the second embodiment Alternatively, the device may have both of the above functions and an element in which the functions of the display CPU and the VDP are integrated. In this case, the effect using the two-dimensional image as in the first embodiment and the effect using the three-dimensional image as in the second embodiment can be switched according to the progress of the game. It will be possible.

(24) In each of the above-described embodiments, each time the image of the display screen G is updated, signals are output to all the dots of the display screen G, and the image setting for one frame is repeated. Without being limited thereto, signal output is performed for dots in a part of the range at a predetermined update timing (for example, 2 msec), setting of a part of the image is repeated, and the predetermined update timing is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which signal output is performed for dots in another range at different update timings (for example, 4 msec), and the settings of the remaining images are repeated.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, the image data for displaying a specific type of character or a specific type of background image includes the first image data, which has a relatively high processing load in use, and the processing load, which is used in use. The second image data, which is relatively small, is set, and the specific type of individual image is displayed at the update timing when the processing load is small due to the relationship of individual images other than the specific type of individual image corresponding to the image data. While the first image data is used for the second image data, the second image data is used for displaying the specific type of individual image at the update timing when the processing load is large due to the relationship of the individual images other than the specific type of individual image. .. For example, when high-resolution image data is set as the first image data and low-resolution image data is set as the second image data, the processing load for displaying an image for one frame is increased. At a small update timing, a specific type of individual image can be displayed as a high-resolution image to improve the appearance of the specific type of individual image, while processing load for displaying one frame of image. When the update timing is large, the appearance of the specific type of individual image is deteriorated, but the effect can be made flashy due to the relationship of other individual images.

(26) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a big hit is generated, a pachinko machine provided with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball.

In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-ball type, for example, is equipped with a plurality of reels as a plurality of revolving bodies provided with a plurality of types of symbols in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and stops. After the reel is stopped by operating the switch, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, a slot that gives the player benefits such as payout of medals The present invention can be applied to a machine. In this case, the present invention can be applied to various controls of the slot machine, and in a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in addition to the reels, the present invention can be applied to control related to image display in the display control device. Can be applied.

In addition, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that include a take-in device and start rotation of a reel by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in a storage section have been taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which

<Regarding invention groups extracted from the above-described embodiment>
The features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. Note that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. First storage means (NAND flash memory 102, 162) that stores information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72, 131) that executes specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with,
When the information read out from the first storage means is stored and the comparison is performed by reading out information of the same capacity, the second storage means (in which the period required for reading the information is shorter than when reading from the first storage means) Work RAM 73, 132),
A transfer unit that reads the specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage unit and stores the specific information in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit. (Controller 101, 161),
In the case where the initial starting information used when executing the initial starting process in the control means on the basis of the predetermined initial starting state is stored in advance, and the information of the same capacity is read and compared. A third storage means (boot memories 119 and 179) in which a period required for reading information is shorter than that in the case of reading from the first storage means,
Equipped with
The control means is
Specific control execution means (a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) that reads out the specific information stored in the second storage means and executes the specific control;
Initial execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the initial startup information stored in the third storage means and executing the initial startup processing;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic A1, the specific information is stored in the second storage unit in which the period required to read the information is shorter than that in the case of reading from the first storage unit, at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit. The control means is configured to read the specific information stored in the second storage means and execute the specific control. Therefore, the time required for the control means to read the specific information can be shortened, and the specific control can be smoothly performed.

In addition, the initial starting information used when executing the initial starting process is not stored in the first storing unit in advance, but in the third storing unit in which the period required to read the information is shorter than when reading from the first storing unit. Has been done. Then, the initial starting process is executed by reading the initial starting information from the third storage means. As a result, when executing the initial starting process, there is no waiting time for transferring the initial starting information to the second storage means, and therefore, until the initial starting process is started from the initial starting state. The time can be shortened.

As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a high processing speed for executing the control.

The "first storage means" is a storage means used only for reading information when the control is executed by the control means, or stores and retains information even when operating power is not supplied from the outside. Means for storing is included. This also applies to the following independent features.

Feature A2. First storage means (NAND flash memory 102, 162) that stores information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72, 131) that executes specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with,
The first storage means has a NAND flash memory,
Further, the second storage, which stores the information read from the first storage means and has a shorter period required to read the information when compared with the information read of the same capacity, than when reading from the first storage means Means (work RAM 73, 132),
A transfer unit that reads the specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage unit and stores the specific information in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit. (Controller 101, 161),
In the case where the initial starting information used when executing the initial starting process in the control means on the basis of the predetermined initial starting state is stored in advance, and the information of the same capacity is read and compared. A third storage means (boot memories 119 and 179) in which a period required for reading information is shorter than that in the case of reading from the first storage means,
Equipped with
The control means is
Specific control execution means (a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) that reads out the specific information stored in the second storage means and executes the specific control;
Initial execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S302 to S306 in the display CPUs 72 and 131) for reading the initial startup information stored in the third storage means and executing the initial startup processing;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to Feature A2, since the NAND flash memory is used as the first storage unit, it is easier to increase the capacity as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Further, the specific information is stored in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means in the second storage means, which requires a shorter period of time for reading the information from the first storage means. The specific control is executed by using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory, which requires a relatively long period for reading, is used as the first storage unit, the control unit can shorten the time required for reading the specific information and smoothly perform the specific control. be able to.

In addition, the initial starting information used when executing the initial starting process is not stored in the first storing unit in advance, but in the third storing unit in which the period required to read the information is shorter than when reading from the first storing unit. Has been done. Then, the initial starting process is executed by reading the initial starting information from the third storage means. As a result, when executing the initial starting process, there is no waiting time for transferring the initial starting information to the second storage means, and therefore, until the initial starting process is started from the initial starting state. The time can be shortened.

As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a high processing speed for executing the control.

Features A3. The specific control execution means starts the specific control after the execution of the initial activation process is completed,
Further, the initial activation information includes reference information for specific information indicating that the specific information should be read from the first storage unit and transferred to the second storage unit,
The initial execution unit refers to the reference information for the specific information as at least a part of the processing for initial startup, and thereby transfers the specific information to the transfer unit to the second storage unit. The gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2, which executes a process (a process of step S312 in the display CPUs 72 and 131).

According to the characteristic A3, since the information for transferring the specific information is set in the initial starting information, the transfer of the specific information necessary for performing the subsequent specific control during the execution of the initial starting process. Instructions are given. As a result, the specific control can be started well.

Features A4. The control means reads out the post-startup information transferred to the second storage means, and executes the post-startup processing after the initial start-up processing (steps S307 to step in the display CPU 72, 131). A function of executing the processing of S316),
The initial activation information includes reference information for post-activation information indicating that the post-activation information should be read from the first storage unit and transferred to the second storage unit,
The initial execution means transfers the post-startup information to the second storage means by referring to the reference information for the post-startup information, as at least a part of the processing for initial start-up. Is executed (the processing of step S304 in the display CPUs 72 and 131).
Further, the execution of the initial starting process and the post-starting process is completed, whereby the initial starting setting based on the fact that the initial starting state is set in the control means is completed, and the specific control execution is performed. The means starts the specific control upon completion of execution of the initial activation process and the post-activation process, the gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2.

According to the characteristic A4, the information used for executing and completing the initial start-up setting in the control means is set separately for the initial start-up information and the post-startup information. The initial activation information to be used is stored in advance in the third storage means, and the post-activation information to be used later is stored in advance in the first storage means. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the third storage unit, as compared with the configuration in which the initial startup information and the post-startup information are collectively stored in the third storage unit in advance.

Even with this configuration, since information for transferring post-startup information is set in the initial start-up information, it is possible to perform subsequent post-startup processing during execution of the initial start-up processing. After the necessary start-up, a transfer instruction of information is issued. As a result, the post-startup processing can be favorably started.

Features A5. The initial activation information includes reference information for specific information indicating that the specific information should be read from the first storage unit and transferred to the second storage unit,
The post-startup execution unit refers to the reference information for the specific information as at least a part of the post-startup processing to transfer the specific information to the second storage unit by the transfer unit. The gaming machine according to feature A4, which is for performing a process to be performed (a process of step S312 in the display CPUs 72 and 131).

According to the characteristic A5, since the information for transferring the specific information is set in the initial starting information, the transfer of the specific information necessary for performing the subsequent specific control while the post-startup processing is being executed. Instructions are given. As a result, the specific control can be started well.

Features A6. The transfer means selects a storage area corresponding to the transfer instruction information from a large number of storage areas included in the first storage means based on the transfer instruction information transmitted by the control means, and the selected storage area. A management unit (controller CPUs 113 and 173) for reading out information stored in advance in the area is provided,
When the control means reads the initial activation information from the third storage means, the corresponding transfer instruction information is transmitted to the management means, and the information is read from the third storage means based on the transmission instruction information. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A5.

According to the characteristic A6, since the management unit is provided, the information transfer from the first storage unit is favorably performed in response to the transfer instruction from the control unit. In this case, the control unit may transmit the transfer instruction information to the management unit even when reading the information from the third storage unit. As a result, the transfer destinations of the transfer instruction information from the control means are aggregated, and the configuration relating to the transfer instruction can be simplified.

Features A7. The management unit, the first storage unit, and the third storage unit are provided as a storage module (memory module 74, 133) having a common port unit (I/F 111, 171) for the control unit. The gaming machine described in Characteristic A6.

According to the characteristic A7, the control unit is the common port of the storage module in both cases of instructing the transfer from the first storage unit to the second storage unit and reading the information from the third storage unit. The transfer instruction information may be transmitted to the department. As a result, the transfer destinations of the transfer instruction information from the control means are aggregated, and the configuration relating to the transfer instruction can be simplified.

Feature A8. The first storage means is a NAND flash memory,
The transfer means is
Management information storage means (control ROM 114, 174) for storing management information in which information on a physical address of the first storage means is associated with information on a logical address transmitted by the control means,
By referring to the management information, a physical address specifying process for specifying a physical address corresponding to the information on the logical address transmitted by the control means is executed, and at the same time, a large number of storage areas included in the first storage means are stored. Of these, management means (controller CPUs 113 and 173) that executes a reading process for reading information from the storage area of the physical address specified by the physical address specifying process,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic A8, a defective block may occur in the NAND flash memory, but since the management unit specifies the physical address with respect to the logical address transmitted from the control unit, the information from the NAND flash memory is Good reading is performed.

Feature A9. The transfer unit stores the information read from the storage area of the first storage unit corresponding to the information of the logical address, and the period required for the information read is the same when the information read of the same capacity is compared. A storage unit (cache memories 117 and 177) shorter than that for reading from the first storage unit is provided, and when the information corresponding to the information of the logical address is transferred to the transfer destination, the information is stored in the storage unit and then transferred. Configuration,
When the management unit reads the information corresponding to the information on the logical address transmitted from the control unit from the first storage unit and stores the information in the storage unit, the management unit corresponds to the logical address associated with the logical address. The game according to feature A8, which is provided with a prediction starting means (a function of executing the processing of step S107 in the controller CPUs 113 and 173) for starting the transfer of information from the storage area of the physical address to the storage means. Machine.

According to the characteristic A9, when the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means, the information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage means to the storage means and transferred from the storage means to the transfer destination. Instead, the logical address associated with the received logical address is predicted to be the logical address related to the next transfer instruction, and the information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage means. As a result, when the information corresponding to each of the plurality of associated logical addresses is read, for the information corresponding to the logical address on the rear side in the reading order, the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means. Reading can be started in advance without waiting, and the time required to read such information can be shortened.

However, in the above configuration, the reading of the information corresponding to the first logical address greatly depends on the reading speed of the NAND flash memory. On the other hand, since the initial activation information is stored in advance in the third storage means, not in the first storage means, having the configuration of the above characteristic A1, the initial activation process is started after the initial activation state is reached. It is possible to reduce the time required to reach the end.

Feature A10. A display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) is provided,
The specific control execution means is a configuration for performing display control of an image displayed on the display screen as the specific control,
As the initial activation process, the initial execution unit displays a process (initial image) for the previous stage in which the image display based on the specific control is started (steps S313 and S314 in the display CPUs 72 and 131). The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, which is characterized by performing a process.

According to the characteristic A10, the display of the image for the previous stage is started on the display screen based on the execution of the initial activation process. Therefore, the image on the display screen is displayed until the display of the image based on the specific control is started. It is possible to start displaying an image on the display screen at an earlier timing than a configuration in which is not displayed at all.

Features A11. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) is provided, and the control means is configured to perform display control of an image displayed on the display screen,
The first storage means stores in advance control program data used when executing various processes in the control means, and image data used when displaying an image on the display screen,
The control unit adjusts the timing of information transfer so that the period during which the control program data is being transferred and the period during which the image data is being transferred do not overlap, and the transfer unit causes the transfer unit to perform the transfer. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, which is provided with means (a function of executing step S306, step S311, step S315, etc. in the display CPUs 72, 131).

According to the characteristic A11, since both the control program data and the image data are stored in advance in the first storage means, the storage destinations of these information can be integrated. Further, in the configuration, the timing of information transfer is adjusted so that the period during which the control program data is transferred and the period during which the image data is transferred do not overlap, so that the hardware configuration related to the transfer of each information is It is possible to favorably transfer each information while suppressing complication.

Feature A12. A plurality of types of the control program data are stored, and the type of image data required in displaying an image based on the processing using the control program data is different depending on the type of the control program data,
The transfer adjusting unit transfers the control program data corresponding to the image data with priority over the transfer of the image data, and does not use the image data in the process using the control program data. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the image data is transferred while the process is being executed.

According to the characteristic A12, the control program data corresponding to the image data is transferred with priority over the transfer of the image data, so that the occurrence of processing waiting can be suppressed. Further, in the process using the control program data, the image data is transferred while the process not using the image data is being executed, so that the display of the image using the image data is not hindered. It becomes possible to

Features A13. The initial execution means performs, as the initial activation process, a process for displaying an image (initial image) for a previous stage in which image display is started based on the specific control (steps S313 and steps in the display CPUs 72 and 131). The process of S314) is executed,
The transfer adjusting means is an image corresponding to the image for the previous stage after the transfer of the initial activation information is completed and before the transfer of the control program data used in the specific control is started. The game machine according to feature A12, characterized in that data is transferred.

According to the characteristic A13, the display of the image for the previous stage is started on the display screen based on the execution of the initial activation process. Therefore, the image on the display screen is displayed until the image display based on the specific control is started. It is possible to start displaying an image on the display screen at an earlier timing than a configuration in which is not displayed at all.

Features A14. The control unit is a downstream control unit that performs the specific control according to instruction information transmitted based on execution of upstream processing in the upstream control unit (main controller 50),
Further, the first storage means is a NAND flash memory, and the upstream storage means (ROM 53) that stores in advance control program data used when the upstream control means performs the upstream processing is random. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, which is an accessible memory.

According to the characteristic A14, the upstream control means can be randomly accessed for reading the control program data, so that the configuration related to the reading of the control program data can be simplified and the downstream control means can be large. It is possible to adopt a configuration that emphasizes capacity.

Feature A15. First storage means (NAND flash memory 102, 162) that stores information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72, 131) that executes specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with,
The first storage means has a NAND flash memory,
Further, the second storage, which stores the information read from the first storage means and has a shorter period required to read the information when compared with the information read of the same capacity, than when reading from the first storage means Means (work RAM 73, 132),
A transfer unit that reads the specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage unit and stores the specific information in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit. (Controller 101, 161),
Equipped with
The control means is
Specific control execution means (a function of executing V interrupt processing in the display CPUs 72 and 131) that reads out the specific information stored in the second storage means and executes the specific control;
An initial startup process is executed based on a predetermined initial startup state, and it is necessary to read out information when the information transferred to the second storage means or read out with the same capacity is compared. Initial execution means (steps S302 to step in the display CPU 72, 131) for reading the initial startup information stored in advance in another storage means whose period is shorter than that for reading from the first storage means and executing the initial startup processing. A function of executing the process of S306),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to Feature A15, since the NAND flash memory is used as the first storage means, it is easier to increase the capacity as compared with the configuration using the NOR flash memory. Further, the specific information is stored in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means in the second storage means, which requires a shorter period of time for reading the information from the first storage means. The specific control is executed by using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory, which requires a relatively long period for reading, is used as the first storage unit, the control unit can shorten the time required for reading the specific information and smoothly perform the specific control. be able to.

Further, the initial starting information used when executing the initial starting process is read after being transferred to the second storage means, or the period required for reading the information is shorter than that when reading from the first storage means. Read out from the storage means. As a result, the initial activation process can be executed well.

As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a high processing speed for executing the control.

Feature A16. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G), first storage means (NAND flash memory 102, 162) in which information is stored in advance, and stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine provided with display control means (display CPUs 72, 131, VDPs 76, 135) for performing display control of an image displayed on the display screen based on the stored information,
The first storage unit stores in advance control program data used when executing various processes in the display control unit, and image data used when displaying an image on the display screen,
When the information read out from the first storage means is stored and the information read out of the same capacity is compared, the second storage means (in which the period required for reading the information is shorter than that in the case where the information is read out from the first storage means) Work RAM 73, 132, VRAM 75, 134),
Transfer means (controllers 101, 161) for reading out the necessary information from the first storage means and storing it in the second storage means at a timing before the timing required by the display control means,
Equipped with
The display control means is configured to execute processing using the control program data transferred to the second storage means and display an image using the image data transferred to the second storage means. ,
Further, transfer adjusting means (display) for causing the transfer means to perform transfer while adjusting the timing of information transfer so that the period during which the control program data is being transferred and the period during which the image data is being transferred do not overlap. (A function of executing steps S306, S311, S315, etc. in the CPUs 72, 131),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic A16, the information is stored in the second storage means at a timing earlier than the timing required by the display control means in the second storage means, which requires a shorter period for reading the information than when the information is read from the first storage means. The control means performs processing using the information stored in the second storage means and displays an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the information in the display control means can be shortened, and the image can be displayed smoothly.

Further, since both the control program data and the image data are stored in advance in the first storage means, the storage destinations of these information can be aggregated. Further, in the configuration, the timing of information transfer is adjusted so that the period during which the control program data is transferred and the period during which the image data is transferred do not overlap, so that the hardware configuration related to the transfer of each information is It is possible to favorably transfer each information while suppressing complication.

As described above, it is possible to satisfactorily realize a high processing speed for executing the control.

Feature A17. First storage means (NAND flash memory 102, 162) that stores information in advance, and control means (display CPUs 72, 131) that executes specific control based on the information stored in the first storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with,
The first storage means has a NAND flash memory,
Further, the second storage, which stores the information read from the first storage means and has a shorter period required to read the information when compared with the information read of the same capacity, than when reading from the first storage means Means (work RAM 73, 132),
A transfer unit that reads the specific information used when executing the specific control from the first storage unit and stores the specific information in the second storage unit at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control unit. (Controller 101, 161),
Equipped with
The transfer means is
Management information storage means (control ROM 114, 174) for storing management information in which information on a physical address of the first storage means is associated with information on a logical address transmitted by the control means,
By referring to the management information, a physical address specifying process for specifying a physical address corresponding to the information on the logical address transmitted by the control means is executed, and at the same time, a large number of storage areas included in the first storage means are stored. Of these, management means (controller CPUs 113 and 173) that executes a reading process for reading information from the storage area of the physical address specified by the physical address specifying process,
Storage means (cache memories 117 and 177) for storing the information read from the storage area of the first storage means corresponding to the information of the logical address;
When the information corresponding to the information of the logical address is transferred to the transfer destination, the information is stored in the storage means and then transferred.
When the management unit reads the information corresponding to the information on the logical address transmitted from the control unit from the first storage unit and stores the information in the storage unit, the management unit corresponds to the logical address associated with the logical address. A gaming machine provided with a prediction starting means (a function of executing the processing of step S107 in the controller CPUs 113 and 173) for starting the transfer of information from the storage area of the physical address to the storage means.

According to Feature A17, since the NAND flash memory is used as the first storage means, it is easier to increase the capacity as compared with the configuration in which the NOR flash memory is used. Further, the specific information is stored in the second storage means at a timing before the specific control is executed by the control means in the second storage means, which requires a shorter period of time for reading the information from the first storage means. The specific control is executed by using the specific information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory, which requires a relatively long period for reading, is used as the first storage unit, the control unit can shorten the time required for reading the specific information and smoothly perform the specific control. be able to.

Further, although a defective block may occur in the NAND flash memory, since the management means specifies the physical address with respect to the logical address transmitted from the control means, it is possible to read information from the NAND flash memory well. Done.

Further, when the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means, not only the information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage means to the storage means and transferred from the storage means to the transfer destination. The logical address associated with the received logical address is predicted to be the logical address related to the next transfer instruction, and the information corresponding to the logical address is read from the first storage means. As a result, when the information corresponding to each of the plurality of associated logical addresses is read, for the information corresponding to the logical address on the rear side in the reading order, the information of the logical address is transmitted from the control means. Reading can be started in advance without waiting, and the time required to read such information can be shortened.

The invention of the characteristic group A is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. .. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory. Further, in recent years, by diversifying the manner of presentation by images and by using complex moving images and live-action images as images, it is attempted to increase the degree of attention to the image and accordingly the degree of attention to the game. Attempts are being made.

Here, when an image drawing instruction is issued, it is preferable that the image is displayed earlier. As a method of displaying an image at an early stage, a method of increasing the reading speed of a memory for image data can be considered. Further, as another method, a method of increasing the processing speed of the CPU that performs image processing can be considered. However, in the former case, the degree of freedom in selecting a memory is reduced in the game machine design stage, and in the latter case, the cost increases as the processing speed increases.

Note that the above problem is not limited to the configuration related to the display of images, and occurs similarly in the configurations related to other controls.

By the way, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above characteristics A1 to A17, the following characteristics B1 to B13, the following characteristics C1 to C10, the following characteristics C′1, the following characteristics D1 to D10, the following characteristics E1 to E8, and the following characteristics F1. To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. Alternatively, the configuration limited to 1 may be applied. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data stored in the display storage means and updating the content of the image at a predetermined update timing. When,
In a gaming machine equipped with
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that the plurality of individual images are overlapped in the depth direction of the display screen (a function of executing a writing process in the VDP 76, step S1901, step S1905 in the VDP 76) S2001, step S2005, a function of executing the processing of step S2101 to step S2104),
When the plurality of individual images are displayed so as to overlap each other in the depth direction of the display screen, the transparency value set in a part of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side corresponds to the individual image on the back side. By setting the overlapping portion of the image data to be the display target, the transparent value adjusting means (a function for executing the processing of step S1904, step S2004, step S2107 in the VDP 76) for performing partial display of the individual image on the front side. )When,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, by adjusting the transparency value of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side, the partial display of the individual image is performed. Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to separately prepare the image data for partial display and the image data for whole display, so that the storage capacity of the display storage means can be suppressed.

Feature B2. The image data has a large number of unit image data (pixels) associated with color information,
The display storage means stores transparency value adjustment data (partial α data PD22 to PD25, partial α data PD30 to PD33, α palette data) in which a transparent value is set corresponding to each unit image data of the image data. , Partial α data PD37, PD38) are stored in advance,
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the transparency value adjusting means applies the transparency value adjusting data to the image data corresponding to the front side individual image to perform the partial display. ..

According to the feature B2, the transparent value adjustment data is read out from the display storage means and applied to the image data to perform the partial display, which complicates the processing configuration for performing the partial display. Can be suppressed.

Feature B3. The transparency value adjustment data is higher in transparency of the contour portion than the adjacent portion inside the unit image data corresponding to the contour portion of the region partially displayed in the front side individual image. The transparent value is set so that
Further, the individual image displayed as the individual image on the front side includes the first individual image on the front side and the second individual image on the front side, and each of the individual images on the front side has a one-to-one correspondence. The game machine according to feature B2, wherein the transparent value adjustment data is provided correspondingly.

According to the feature B3, the transparency value adjustment data is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the first front side individual image and the second front side individual image, so partial display is performed for these individual images. You can In addition, since the transparency value of each transparent value adjustment data is set so that the transparency of the outline portion of the corresponding individual image is higher than that of the adjacent portion inside thereof, the transparency value adjustment is performed to perform partial display. When the application data is applied, at the same time, it is possible to reduce jaggies in the image displayed in the part.

Feature B4. The individual image displayed as the front individual image includes a first front individual image (an individual image corresponding to the pattern sprite data PD26) and a second front individual image (an individual image corresponding to the pattern sprite data PD27). Image) is included,
The transparency value adjusting means is common in both the case where the partial display of the first front side individual image is performed and the case where the partial display of the second front side individual image is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the game data (partial α data PD30 to PD33) is applied.

According to the feature B4, partial display can be performed for each of the first front side individual image and the second front side individual image while suppressing the storage capacity required to store the transparency value adjustment data. it can.

Feature B5. The transparent value adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to the large number of unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the front side, and transparent value information is set in each unit adjustment area. Cage,
The transparency value adjusting means applies the transparency value information included in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjusting data to color information associated with corresponding unit image data in the image data, thereby The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4 characterized by displaying.

According to the feature B5, when partial display is performed, the transparency value information set in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjustment data is applied to the color information associated with each corresponding unit image data. Since it is good, it is possible to suppress the complication of the processing related to the application.

Feature B6. The image data setting means is configured to display an image based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and when the image data is set in the setting storage means In the configuration, the coordinate information in the setting storage unit for a part of the large number of unit image data included in the image data is specified, and the image data is set at a position according to the coordinate information.
Further, the transparent value adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to a large number of the unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the front side, and the transparent value information is set in each unit adjustment area. Has been done,
The transparency value adjusting means applies the transparency value information included in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjusting data to color information associated with corresponding unit image data in the image data, thereby The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B4 characterized by displaying.

According to the feature B6, when the image data is set in the setting storage unit, it is not necessary to specify the coordinate information for all the unit image data of the image data, so that the processing configuration related to the specification can be prevented from becoming complicated.

In this configuration, the transparent value adjustment data has a large number of unit adjustment areas corresponding to a large number of unit image data included in the image data of the individual image on the front side, and the transparent value information is set in each unit adjustment area. The data structure is As a result, even if the coordinate information is not individually specified for all the unit image data of the image data, the transparency value information set in each unit adjustment area of the transparency value adjustment data is converted into the corresponding unit. It can be applied to color information associated with image data.

Feature B7. The image data setting means is configured to display an image based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and when the image data is set in the setting storage means A configuration in which parameter information including information on coordinates of the image data in the setting storage means is specified, and the image data is set according to the specification result,
When the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side is set in the setting storage unit, the transparency value adjusting unit is configured to set the image data according to the specified parameter information. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the transparent value adjustment data is applied to the image data at a previous timing.

According to the feature B7, the predetermined parameter is applied to the image data to which the transparent value adjustment data is applied, and the data of the application result is set in the setting storage means. Accordingly, it is not necessary to specify the parameter for setting the transparent value adjustment data in the setting storage unit, and thus the processing load for specifying the parameter can be suppressed.

Feature B8. Identification information is set individually for each unit image data,
In the transparent value adjusting data, a combination of color information and transparent value information of the unit image data in which the identifying information is set is set in association with the identifying information. The gaming machine according to any one of B2 to B4.

According to the feature B8, the transparency value for partial display can be applied in addition to setting the color information in each unit image data.

Feature B9. The transparency value adjusting means adjusts the transparency value so that the transparency of the contour part of the region partially displayed in the front individual image is higher than that of the adjacent part inside thereof. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

According to the feature B9, when the transparency value is adjusted to perform the partial display, the jaggies of the image displayed in the partial can be reduced together with the adjustment.

Feature B10. The transparency value adjusting unit switches the range in which the transparency value is set, in which the overlapping portion of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side is displayed, thereby changing the area of the partial display in the individual image on the front side. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B9, characterized in that

According to the feature B10, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the region that is partially displayed in the front individual image is transitioned by simply switching the transparent value to be applied.

Feature B11. A partition area control unit (a function of the display CPU 72 that executes the process of step S1806) that controls the display unit so that a partition area (partial display area PL5) in which a part of the display screen is partitioned is displayed. Prepare,
The individual image on the front side is an individual image used to be displayed in the partitioned area, and the individual image on the back side is an individual image used to be displayed in a peripheral area including the periphery of the partitioned area. Image,
The transparency value adjusting means, when the front side individual image is displayed so that a part of the boundary of the divided area is overlapped, the front side individual image does not overflow into the surrounding area. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10, wherein the individual image on the front side is partially displayed.

According to the feature B11, the display effect in which the individual image is displayed within the range of the divided area can be performed only by adjusting the transparency value.

Feature B12. A character color change control unit (a character transition process in the VDP 76) that displays a plurality of character images arranged in a specific direction on the display screen and controls the display unit so that the colors of the plurality of character images are sequentially changed. Function to execute
The individual image on the front side is an individual image including the plurality of character images,
The individual image on the back side is an individual image including the plurality of character images and the color of each character image is set to be different from the individual image on the front side,
The image data setting means is configured to display an image based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and a display effect in which the color of the character image is sequentially changed. When performed, the image data corresponding to the individual image on the front side is set in front of the image data corresponding to the individual image on the back side,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the transparent value adjusting means is for partially displaying the individual image on the front side when the display effect is performed.

According to the feature B12, the display effect in which the color of the character image is sequentially changed can be performed only by adjusting the transparency value.

Feature B13. Pattern determining means (a function of the display CPU 72 for executing the process of step S403) for determining display effect pattern information composed of images for a plurality of update timings based on the satisfaction of a predetermined pattern determining condition;
Derivation means for deriving the parameter information when the image data corresponding to the individual image displayed at each update timing is used based on the determined display effect pattern information (function of executing task processing in the display CPU 72). )When,
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12, wherein the image data setting means sets the image data in a state in which the parameter information derived by the deriving means is applied. .

According to the feature B13, the parameter information of the image data corresponding to each update timing is derived based on the previously determined display effect pattern information, and the image data is set with the parameter information applied. By doing so, in the configuration in which the images for each update timing are displayed, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described in the above feature B1 and the like.

The invention of the characteristic group B is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

The case where an image is displayed using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying characters and characters. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or a character in front of the background is created in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or characters are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

In addition, for example, when displaying an image as if a character or a character is moving in a predetermined manner in front of the background, each time the display device is updated, the coordinates corresponding to the predetermined movement or Drawing data in which the character or character data is set in the form is created.

Here, as a display effect on the display device, the present inventor transits from a state in which the entire character or character is displayed to a state in which only a part of the character or character is displayed in the process of movement of the character or character. I devised a display effect to make it.

However, it is not preferable that the capacity of the memory for the image data extremely increases in order to perform the display effect, and it is necessary to perform the display effect while suppressing the increase in the capacity to some extent. ..

By the way, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above characteristics B1 to B13, the above characteristics A1 to A17, the following characteristics C1 to C10, the following characteristics C′1, the following characteristics D1 to D10, the following characteristics E1 to E8, and the following characteristics F1. To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. Alternatively, the configuration limited to 1 may be applied. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
The image is displayed on the display screen based on the setting of the image data in the predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b), and the predetermined update timing is reached, so that the predetermined range is reached. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for updating the contents of the image,
In a gaming machine equipped with
A plurality of divided image data (divided part data PD2 to PD10, divided data groups PD12 to PD15) are stored in advance in the display storage means,
The display control means arranges and sets the plurality of divided image data side by side in the setting storage means according to a predetermined relative position, so that the same type of display mode corresponds to each divided image data. A group setting means for displaying a series of images that will straddle the boundaries of the individual images for division (a function for executing arithmetic processing for scroll background in the display CPU 72 or a function for executing arithmetic processing for displacement background in the display CPU 72, A game machine having a function of executing a setting process of divided part data in the VDP 76).

According to the characteristic C1, the image data for displaying a series of images is divided and stored as a plurality of divided image data. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data unit when individually setting in the setting storage means, and it is possible to reduce the processing load when handling a single image data.

Feature C2. In the case where the first divided image data (divided part data PD5) and the second divided image data (divided part data PD6) having the adjacent positional relationship are set in the setting storage means, The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein an overlapping area (overlapping area PA1) of both pieces of data is generated over the entire boundary portion of the divided image data.

According to the characteristic C2, in the configuration in which each divided image data is individually set in the setting storage unit, a gap may occur between the divided image data depending on the individual size adjustment condition of each divided image data. To be done. On the other hand, since both data are set in the setting storage means so that an overlapping area is generated, the above-mentioned gap does not occur and the effect obtained by storing each divided image data is good. Can be demonstrated.

Feature C3. The game according to feature C2, wherein color information that is the same as each other is associated with the portions that form the overlapping area in the first divided image data and the second divided image data. Machine.

According to the characteristic C3, since the same color information is associated with the portions forming the overlapping area in both divided image data, the same magnification is applied to each divided image data, for example. Even if the size is individually adjusted and the width of the overlapping area is slightly deviated, it is expected that the color information to be displayed as the overlapping area is reflected in the deviated portion. Therefore, even if each divided image data is an image obtained as a result of being individually set in the setting storage unit, a good display mode can be obtained.

Feature C4. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with color information,
The game machine according to feature C2 or C3, wherein the overlapping region is configured by unit image data for one column in each of the first divided image data and the second divided image data. ..

According to the characteristic C4, it is possible to obtain the effect that each divided image data is set so that the overlapping area is generated while suppressing the data capacity allocated to generate the overlapping area as much as possible.

Feature C5. Each of the divided image data, when all of each of the divided image data is set in a predetermined scale, the series of images formed thereby is created so as to exceed the size corresponding to the display screen. In addition, at least at a specific update timing of the update timings to be set on the predetermined scale, a part of the divided image data is not included in the predetermined range. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, which is characterized in that

According to the characteristic C5, since the series of images generated by setting all the divided image data exceeds the size corresponding to the display screen, the images are set within the range exceeding the size of the display screen. It is possible for the player to recognize that the image is being played, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the image. In this case, at least at a specific update timing, a part of each divided image data is not included in the predetermined range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the divided image data that is not included in the predetermined range from being set in the setting storage unit at the specific update timing, compared to the configuration in which all the divided image data are always set. The load can be reduced.

Feature C6. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with color information,
When setting the image data in the setting storage unit, the display control unit executes the predetermined drawing process for each unit image data of the image data to thereby obtain the color information of the unit image data. Even when the unit image data of the image data set as the setting target in the setting storage unit is set to the setting storage unit and the unit image data is out of the setting storage unit, the color information of the unit image data is Although not set in the setting storage unit, the drawing process is executed,
Each of the divided image data, when all of the respective divided image data is set in a predetermined scale, the series of images formed thereby is created so as to exceed the size corresponding to the display screen. In addition, at least at a specific update timing of the update timings to be set on the predetermined scale, a part of each of the divided image data is not included in the predetermined range. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4, which is characterized in that

According to the characteristic C6, when the image data is set in the setting storage means in the display control means, even if the unit image data protruding from the setting storage means exists in the image data, The same drawing process is executed for the same. As a result, the display control unit does not need to execute a dedicated process for the unit image data that extends from the setting storage unit.

In addition, the series of images generated by setting all the divided image data is configured to exceed the size corresponding to the display screen, so that the images are set within the range exceeding the size of the display screen. Can be recognized by the player, and the degree of attention to the image can be increased. However, as described above, in the configuration in which the similar drawing process is executed for the unit image data that extends from the setting storage means, the image data forming the series of images is provided as a single image data. As a result, the frequency of unnecessary execution of the drawing process is increased, and the processing load is increased.

On the other hand, at least at a specific update timing, a part of each divided image data is not included in the predetermined range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the divided image data that is not included in the predetermined range from being set in the setting storage unit at the specific update timing, compared to the configuration in which all the divided image data are always set. The load can be reduced.

Feature C7. The set setting means,
Of the divided image data, a dividing image grasping unit (a function of executing arithmetic processing for a scroll background in the display CPU 72) that grasps a part of the divided image data included in the predetermined range to be updated,
Dividing image setting means (a function for executing setting processing of divided part data in the VDP 76) for setting the divided image data grasped by the dividing image grasping means in the setting storing means,
The gaming machine according to the feature C5 or C6, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic C7, at least at the specific update timing, the divided image data not included in the predetermined range is not set in the setting storage unit. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which all divided image data are always set.

Feature C8. A parameter information specifying unit (a function for executing arithmetic processing for a scroll background in the display CPU 72) for specifying parameter information including coordinate information of the image data in the setting storage unit;
The display control means is a configuration for setting the image data in the setting storage means in a state in which the parameter information according to the identification result of the parameter information identification means is applied.
When the parameter information specifying unit specifies the parameter information with respect to image data forming an image of the predetermined range corresponding to at least the specific update timing, the image of the predetermined range also includes a partial area. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C7, wherein the parameter information is not specified for the divided image data corresponding to the individual image for division.

According to the characteristic C8, at least at the specific update timing, the parameter information is not specified for the divided image data not included in the predetermined range. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the parameter information is always specified for all the divided image data.

Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the series of images are images scroll-displayed in a predetermined direction over a plurality of update timing image display periods.

According to the feature C9, a series of images can be scroll-displayed, and the scroll display can be favorably performed because the configuration of the feature C1 and the like is provided.

Feature C10. The divided image data is created so that each of the divided individual images includes a plurality of unit images, and the display mode of the plurality of unit images is sequentially changed over a plurality of update timings. A plurality of divided image data are provided corresponding to each divided position so that display can be performed.
At each of the division positions where the division individual images are displayed side by side, the setting storage unit is set so that the display mode of the plurality of unit images sequentially changes over the display period of a plurality of update timings. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C9, which is provided with an image switching means (a function of executing a calculation process for a displacement background in the display CPU 72) for switching each divided image data.

According to the characteristic C10, instead of individually setting the image data corresponding to each of the plurality of unit images in the setting storage unit, the display of the plurality of unit images is collectively controlled in units of the divided image data. Thus, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the display modes of the plurality of unit images are sequentially changed. As a result, in addition to the excellent effect described in the characteristic C1, it is possible to execute the display effect in which the display modes of the plurality of unit images are sequentially changed while reducing the processing load.

The invention of the characteristic group C is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

The case where an image is displayed using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. ing. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Here, a large size image has a large amount of image data. For example, a background image that is scroll-displayed and in which only a part of the area is displayed on the display screen for each frame is a character image that is entirely displayed on the display screen in a size that is initially set. The capacity of image data becomes larger than that of.

In this case, it is assumed that one unit of image data cannot be stored in advance in the memory for image data depending on its capacity. Further, even if it can be stored, if there are many areas that are not actually displayed on the display screen, the amount of calculation for display for each frame increases, and the processing load increases. On the other hand, in the case of a large image as described above, a configuration may be considered in which the image data at the time of initial setting is always enlarged and displayed, but if this is done, the image quality will deteriorate.

By the way, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above features C1 to C10, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B13, the following features C′1, the following features D1 to D10, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1. To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. Alternatively, the configuration limited to 1 may be applied. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic C'>
Feature C'1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
The image is displayed on the display screen based on the setting of the image data in the predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b), and the predetermined update timing is reached, so that the predetermined range is reached. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for updating the contents of the image,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores in advance aggregated image data (divided data groups PD12 to PD15) used to collectively display a plurality of unit images, and a plurality of display modes of the plurality of unit images are stored. A plurality of the aggregated image data are stored so that it is possible to perform a display that sequentially changes over the update timing of
Further, an aggregate image switching unit (displacement in the display CPU 72) for switching aggregate image data set in the setting storage unit so that the display modes of the plurality of unit images are sequentially changed over the display periods corresponding to the plurality of update timings. A game machine having a function of executing a background calculation process).

According to the characteristic C′1, instead of individually setting the image data corresponding to each of the plurality of unit images in the setting storage unit, the display of the plurality of unit images is collected in units of divided image data. By controlling, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the display modes of the plurality of unit images are sequentially changed. Accordingly, it is possible to execute the display effect in which the display modes of the plurality of unit images are sequentially changed while reducing the processing load.

The invention according to the above feature C'1 is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

The case where an image is displayed using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. ing. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Here, the processing load for each frame increases as the number of unit images included in the image for one frame increases. On the other hand, if the number of unit images included in the image for one frame is reduced, there is a concern that the degree of attention to the image may decrease.

Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the above characteristics C′1, the above characteristics A1 to A17, the above characteristics B1 to B13, the above characteristics C1 to C10, the following characteristics D1 to D10, the following characteristics E1 to E8, and the following characteristics F1. To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. Alternatively, the configuration limited to 1 may be applied. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data;
In a gaming machine equipped with
As image data of an operation individual image (sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed so that at least a part moves in a specific direction, at least a part of the image data is moved by less than 1 dot in the specific direction. The configuration is such that a plurality of corresponding operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) can be acquired,
The display control means, when at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, displays the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image a plurality of times. It is provided with an operation image switching unit (a function of executing a calculation process for smooth movement in the display CPU 72, a function of executing a setting process for smooth movement in the VDP 76) for sequentially switching over the image update timing. And the gaming machine.

According to the characteristic D1, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to a state of moving by less than 1 dot is sequentially switched as a use target, so that at least a part of the operation individual image moves in a specific direction. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the moving individual image as if it were moving in units of less than one dot, and it is possible to smooth the movement of the individual motion image.

Feature D2. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data;
In a gaming machine equipped with
At least a part of the display storage means is 1 in the specific direction as image data of an operation individual image (sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed so that at least a part moves in a specific direction. It stores a plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to a state of moving by less than a dot,
The display control means, when at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, displays the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image a plurality of times. It is provided with an operation image switching unit (a function of executing a calculation process for smooth movement in the display CPU 72, a function of executing a setting process for smooth movement in the VDP 76) for sequentially switching over the image update timing. And the gaming machine.

According to the feature D2, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to a state of moving by less than 1 dot is sequentially switched as a use target, so that at least a part of the operation individual image moves in a specific direction. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the moving individual image as if it were moving in units of less than one dot, and it is possible to smooth the movement of the individual motion image.

Further, in the present configuration, since it is only necessary to sequentially switch the plurality of operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load. From the above, it is possible to favorably realize smoothing of the movement of the individual motion image.

Feature D3. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
In addition to setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, outputting an image signal corresponding to the data set in each unit setting area to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen based on the above;
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the image data of the operation individual image (sprite CH5 for smooth movement) at least a part of which is displayed so as to move in a specific direction, the at least a part of the unit setting area is one in the specific direction. The configuration is such that it is possible to acquire a plurality of operation image data (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to a state in which they move in a small size.
The display control means, when at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, displays the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image a plurality of times. It is provided with an operation image switching unit (a function of executing a calculation process for smooth movement in the display CPU 72, a function of executing a setting process for smooth movement in the VDP 76) for sequentially switching over the image update timing. And the gaming machine.

According to the feature D3, at least one of the individual images for operation is switched by sequentially switching the plurality of pieces of operation image data corresponding to the mutually moved state by the size smaller than one unit setting area. The parts are displayed as if they were moving in a specific direction. As a result, it is possible to display as if moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area, and it is possible to smooth the movement of the operation individual image.

Feature D4. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a plurality of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
In addition to setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, outputting an image signal corresponding to the data set in each unit setting area to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen based on the above;
In a gaming machine equipped with
At least a part of the display storage means is image data of an operation individual image (sprite CH5 for smooth movement) displayed so that at least a part moves in a specific direction. A plurality of image data for operation (sprite data PD48, PD49) corresponding to the mutually moved state are stored by a size smaller than the unit setting area of
The display control means, when at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction, displays the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image a plurality of times. It is provided with an operation image switching unit (a function of executing a calculation process for smooth movement in the display CPU 72, a function of executing a setting process for smooth movement in the VDP 76) for sequentially switching over the image update timing. And the gaming machine.

According to the characteristic D4, at least one of the individual images for operation is switched by sequentially switching the plurality of pieces of operation image data corresponding to the mutually moved state by the size smaller than one unit setting area. The parts are displayed as if they were moving in a specific direction. As a result, it is possible to display as if moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area, and it is possible to smooth the movement of the operation individual image.

Further, in the present configuration, since it is only necessary to sequentially switch the plurality of operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load. From the above, it is possible to favorably realize smoothing of the movement of the individual motion image.

Feature D5. The display control means determines coordinate information when each of the plurality of operation image data is individually set in the setting storage means (coordinate information determination means (steps S2405, S2411, step in the display CPU 72). Function for executing the processing of S2416),
When the operation image data used for displaying the operation individual image is sequentially switched over the specific plurality of times of the update timing, the coordinate information determination unit applies to all of the operation image data. The gaming machine described in the feature D3 or D4, characterized in that information of the same coordinates is applied.

According to the characteristic D5, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to the mutually moved state by a size smaller than one unit setting area is sequentially set for the same coordinate, and It is possible to display the motion individual image as if it is moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than the unit setting area, and it is possible to smooth the motion of the motion individual image.

Feature D6. The display control means determines coordinate information when each of the plurality of operation image data is individually set in the setting storage means (coordinate information determination means (steps S2405, S2411, step in the display CPU 72). Function for executing the processing of S2416),
The coordinate information determining means updates the information of the next coordinate after the information of the same coordinate is applied to all of the plurality of operation image data, and the information of the next coordinate is not updated. The game machine according to the feature D3 or D4, wherein the unit is set to one unit setting area from the coordinate and updated so that the coordinate information is shifted to the side corresponding to the movement in the specific direction.

According to the characteristic D6, a plurality of operation image data corresponding to the mutually moved state by a size smaller than one unit setting area is sequentially set to the same coordinate, thereby It is possible to display the motion individual image as if it is moving in a unit corresponding to a size smaller than the unit setting area, and it is possible to smooth the motion of the motion individual image.

Further, after the information of the same coordinate is applied to all of the plurality of operation image data, the information of the next coordinate is updated, and in the information of the next coordinate, the coordinate of the one before the update is changed. The unit setting area is updated so that the coordinate information is shifted to the side corresponding to the movement in the specific direction. As a result, the state in which the motion individual image moves in units corresponding to a size smaller than one unit setting area is repeated. Therefore, it becomes possible to smooth the movement of the individual motion image.

Feature D7. The display control means updates the content of the image at a predetermined update timing,
The operation image switching unit displays the plurality of operation image data when at least a part of the operation individual image is displayed so as to move in the specific direction over a plurality of update timing display periods. The game machine according to any one of the features D3 to D6, wherein is repeatedly set in the setting storage means in a predetermined order.

According to the characteristic D7, since it is sufficient to execute the process of repeatedly switching the operation image data set in the setting storage means in a predetermined order, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature D8. The at least a part of the plurality of operation image data is specified by changing the transparency value indicating the transmission ratio of the image data that overlaps on the back side at the position forming the edge portion of the corresponding operation individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of the features D3 to D7, which corresponds to a state of moving by a smaller amount than one unit setting area in the direction of.

According to the characteristic D8, by a simple method of making the transparent values of the portions forming the edge portion different, for a plurality of movements corresponding to the state of mutual movement by a size smaller than one unit setting area. Image data can be provided.

Feature D9. The plurality of operation image data are stored in advance in the display storage means, and the first operation image data (first sprite data PD48) and the first operation image data are stored more than the first operation image data. At least a part of the second operation image data (second sprite data PD49) corresponds to a state of moving in the specific direction by a size smaller than one unit setting area. The gaming machine described in any one of the features D3 to D8.

According to the feature D9, only the first motion image data and the second motion image data are stored in advance in the display storage means as the motion image data for smoothing the motion of the motion individual image. Since it suffices to keep it in advance, it is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while suppressing the storage capacity required for storing the operation image data in the display storage means.

Feature D10. The second operation image data corresponds to a state in which the at least a part of the second operation image data has moved in the specific direction by a size that is half or approximately half of one unit setting area. The gaming machine described in Feature D9.

According to the characteristic D10, the setting target in the setting storage means is switched from the first operation image data to the second operation image data, and when the second operation image data is changed to the first operation. It is possible to make the movement amount of the operation individual image the same or substantially the same as when the image data is switched to the special image data.

The configuration limited to any one of the features D5 to D10 may be applied to the features D1 or D2. In this case, the configuration defined based on "one unit setting area" may be applied as the configuration defined based on "one dot".

The invention of the characteristic group D is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, those provided with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In such a gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

The case where an image is displayed using 2D image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. ing. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Further, for example, when displaying an image as if a character or the like is performing a predetermined motion in front of the background, each time the display device is updated, the coordinates or form corresponding to the predetermined motion is displayed. The drawing data in which the data such as the above character is set is created. Then, each time the drawing data is created, a new signal is output to the display device, and the image on the display screen is updated so that the character or the like makes a predetermined movement.

Here, when a character or the like is to be moved in a predetermined direction on a display screen configured by arranging a large number of dots, the minimum movement unit that can be set at one update timing is limited to one dot. It Then, even if an attempt is made to smoothly move the character or the like in a predetermined direction, a limitation occurs. This is also the same as when a character or the like tries to perform a predetermined motion. In order to solve this, a measure to increase the number of dots included in a unit area can be considered, but the cost of the display device increases as the number of dots increases.

By the way, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features D1 to D10, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the following features E1 to E8, and the following features F1. To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. Alternatively, the configuration limited to 1 may be applied. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory module 133) that stores image data in advance;
By setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame areas 142a, 142b), drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for displaying an image on the display screen based on the above;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
For a plurality of individual images displayed so as to overlap each other in the depth direction of the display screen, a depth information determination unit that determines information in the depth direction of the image data corresponding to each individual image (processing of steps S3503 to S3505 in the display CPU 131) Function to execute)
The image data corresponding to each individual image is set in the setting storage unit by applying the information in the depth direction determined by the depth information determination unit, so that each individual image is displayed in the depth direction on the display screen. Image data setting means (a function for executing hidden surface processing using a Z buffer in the VDP 135) so as to be displayed so as to be overlapped with
Partial display of the specific individual image is performed by allowing the information in the depth direction applied to a part of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image to be determined as information for partial display. Partial display setting means (function of executing arithmetic processing for mask in the display CPU 131),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature E1, the partial display of the individual image is performed by adjusting the information in the depth direction of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image. Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to separately prepare the image data for partial display and the image data for whole display, so that the storage capacity of the display storage means can be suppressed.

Feature E2. The partial display setting means may switch the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image by switching the range in which the information in the depth direction is determined as the information for partial display in the specific image data. The gaming machine described in the characteristic feature E1.

According to the feature E2, the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image is switched by using the single specific image data. Thereby, it is possible to perform a display effect in which the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image is switched while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage unit.

Feature E3. The partial display setting means displays the specific individual image for a plurality of update timings by stepwise switching the range in which the information in the depth direction is determined as the information for partial display in the specific image data. The gaming machine described in the feature E1 or E2, which is characterized by gradually erasing or gradually appearing over a period.

According to the feature E3, since the display effect in which the specific individual image is gradually erased or gradually appears over the display periods corresponding to the plurality of update timings is performed, the attention to the image can be increased. In this case, the display mode of the specific individual image increases in accordance with the number of update timings in the process of gradually deleting or gradually appearing, but switching of the display mode is performed in the depth direction of the specific image data. It is performed by adjusting the information of 1., and it is not necessary to prepare specific image data according to each display mode. Therefore, it is possible to perform the above-described display effect while suppressing the storage capacity of the display storage means.

Feature E4. Image data of an object is arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space, the image data is projected onto a projection plane set based on the line of sight from a given viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, and projected onto the projection plane. Storage means (frame areas 142a, 142b) for storing generation data (drawing data) generated based on the data,
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
Arrangement means for arranging the image data of the object in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S3602 to S3604 in the VDP 135),
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the process of step S3605 in the VDP 135);
Distance information determining means for determining distance information corresponding to a relative distance from the viewpoint in the direction in which the viewpoint faces (function of executing steps S3503 to S3505 in the display CPU 131);
The generated data is generated using projection data created by projecting the image data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and a plurality of the image data are arranged in the direction in which the viewpoint faces. In this case, drawing distance setting means for comparing the distance information in each of the parts arranged side by side and preferentially reflecting the part having the smaller relative distance in the generated data (the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer in the VDP135 is executed. Function)
By setting the distance information determined by the distance information determination means to be information for partial display for a part of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image, Partial display setting means for performing partial display (function of executing arithmetic processing for mask in the display CPU 131),
A game machine displaying the image generated by the display means.

According to the feature E4, the partial information of the individual image is displayed by adjusting the distance information of the specific image data corresponding to the specific individual image. Thereby, for example, it is not necessary to separately prepare the image data for partial display and the image data for whole display, so that the storage capacity can be suppressed. Particularly, according to this configuration, the above-described excellent effect can be obtained by utilizing the hidden surface removal configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image.

Feature E5. The partial display setting means generates such that the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image is switched by switching the range in which the distance information is determined as the information for the partial display in the specific image data. The gaming machine according to feature E4, which generates data.

According to the feature E5, the range in which the partial display is performed in the specific individual image is switched using the single specific image data. As a result, it is possible to perform a display effect that switches the range in which partial display is performed in a specific individual image while suppressing the storage capacity.

Feature E6. The partial display setting means switches the range in which the distance information is determined to be the information for partial display in the specific image data stepwise, thereby displaying the specific individual image in a display period for a plurality of update timings. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, characterized in that it generates generated data that is gradually erased or gradually emerges.

According to the feature E6, a display effect in which a specific individual image is gradually erased or gradually appears over a display period corresponding to a plurality of update timings is performed, so that the attention to the image can be increased. In this case, the display mode of the specific individual image increases in accordance with the number of update timings in the process of gradually deleting or gradually appearing, but switching of the display mode is performed in the depth direction of the specific image data. It is performed by adjusting the information of 1., and it is not necessary to prepare specific image data according to each display mode. Therefore, the display effect as described above can be performed while suppressing the storage capacity.

Feature E7. The information for partial display is set as distance information corresponding to the fact that the relative distance is farther than the back image data forming the back image, according to any one of features E4 to E6. Amusement machine.

Since the back image is an image that always constitutes the back, it serves as an absolute reference as a position in the depth direction. In this case, according to the feature E7, the partial display information is set as the distance information corresponding to the fact that the relative distance is longer than the rear image data, so that the partial display of the specific individual image is performed. In this case, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the setting of the information for partial display.

Feature E8. The display screen of the display means is composed of a large number of dots arranged vertically and horizontally, and the generated data has a large number of unit generated data,
The display control unit outputs an image signal corresponding to each unit generation data in the generation data to the display unit, so that an image output corresponding to each unit generation data is output to each dot corresponding to each unit generation data. Is done by
The distance information determining means determines the distance information in association with each of a plurality of unit image data forming the image data,
Further, when the generated data is generated, a plurality of comparison areas are provided corresponding to the plurality of unit generation data, and the distance information referred to by the drawing setting means is stored in each of the comparison areas. The storage means (Z buffer 143) is used,
The drawing setting means,
When a plurality of the image data are arranged in the direction in which the viewpoint is directed, the distance information is individually compared in correspondence with each of the unit generation data,
When performing individual comparison, if the distance information referred to at a later timing is closer to the relative distance than the distance information previously referenced and stored in the corresponding comparison area, then, The distance information referred to at the timing is overwritten on the comparison area, and the unit image data whose distance information is determined is reflected on the unit generation data corresponding to the comparison area. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristic features E4 to E7.

According to the feature E8, the excellent effect as described in the feature E4 and the like can be obtained by utilizing the hidden surface erasing configuration using the comparison storage means.

The invention of the characteristic group E is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, those provided with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In such a gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon to which a texture is attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, the present inventor, when causing an individual image individually defined such as a character or a character to appear or be erased on the display screen, displays the entire display and partial display of the individual image. We devised a display effect that switches between display and display.

However, if a plurality of types of image data are required for the same type of individual image in order to perform the display effect, the mode of switching between the overall display and the partial display becomes multi-stage. The number of types of image data stored in advance increases. This undesirably increases the storage capacity required in the image data memory.

Note that the above problem is not limited to the display of a three-dimensional image, but occurs similarly when a two-dimensional image is displayed.

Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features E1 to E8, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the following features F1. To F15, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. Alternatively, the configuration limited to 1 may be applied. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory modules 74, 133) that stores image data in advance;
The image is displayed on the display screen based on the setting of the image data in the predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a and 82b, frame areas 142a and 142b), and the update timing is set in advance. Display control means (display CPUs 72, 131, VDPs 76, 135) for updating the contents of the image,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores in advance a plurality of types of image data corresponding to different individual images,
The display control means,
Grouping means for grouping a plurality of types of image data (a function of executing the process of step S1705 in the VDP 76, a function of executing the process of step S2306 in the VDP 76, a function of executing the process of step S4404 in the VDP 135),
Grouping data setting means for setting the grouped data formed by grouping in the setting storage means (a function of executing the processing of step S1706 in the VDP 76, a function of executing the processing of step S505 in the VDP 76, and the VDP 135). A function of executing the processing of step S4405),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, by grouping a plurality of types of image data, it is possible to handle a plurality of types of image data as a single data. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which image data is always handled individually. Further, since the plurality of types of image data are individually stored in the display storage means, it is possible to handle the image data independently. This allows the image data to be handled flexibly. Furthermore, the storage capacity required in the display storage means can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the data in which the plurality of types of image data are grouped is stored in the display storage means in advance.

As described above, when a plurality of individual images are displayed at the same time, it is possible to reduce the processing load for displaying them.

Feature F2. A grouping storage area (composite data area 81c, mode buffer 145) for storing the grouped data grouped by the grouping means,
The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the grouping data setting means sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in the setting storage means.

According to the feature F2, the grouped data is stored in the grouping storage area, and is read from the grouping storage area and set in the setting storage means as needed. Thereby, the grouped data can be used over a plurality of update timings.

Feature F3. When a plurality of types of image data to be grouped are set to the setting storage unit, the grouping unit performs grouping on the plurality of types of image data, and after the grouping, The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein image data is stored in the storage area for grouping as the grouping data.

According to the feature F3, when a plurality of types of image data to be grouped are set in the setting storage unit, the plurality of types of image data are grouped and are set as grouped data. It is stored in the grouping storage area. This eliminates the need to independently set the processing timing for grouping.

Feature F4. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of update timings, a first display effect and the number of individual images displayed on the display screen are increased more than the first display effect, or the setting storage means. And a second display effect in which the processing load of the display control unit when setting image data is larger than the individual image displayed in the first display effect is displayed. ,
The grouping unit performs the grouping in a period in which a process for displaying an image at an update timing included in the first display effect is performed, and the grouped image data is the grouped data. Stored in the grouping storage area as
The grouping data setting means sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in a period in which a process for displaying an image at an update timing included in the second display effect is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature F2 or F3, which is set in the setting storage means.

According to the feature F4, grouping data is created in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively small, and the grouping data is used in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively large. Thereby, the processing load of the display control means can be distributed by using the grouped data.

Feature F5. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of update timings, a first display effect and a second display that increases the processing load of the display control unit when setting the image data in the setting storage unit. The production and are set,
The grouping unit performs the grouping in a period in which a process for displaying an image at an update timing included in the first display effect is performed, and the grouped image data is the grouped data. Stored in the grouping storage area as
The grouping data setting means sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in a period in which a process for displaying an image at an update timing included in the second display effect is executed. The gaming machine according to the feature F2 or F3, which is set in the setting storage means.

According to the feature F5, grouping data is created in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively small, and the grouping data is used in a situation where the processing load of the display control means is relatively large. Thereby, the processing load of the display control means can be distributed by using the grouped data.

Feature F6. The display control unit creates the drawing data in the setting storage unit by setting the image data, and outputs the image signal according to the drawing data to the display unit to set a predetermined image on the display screen. It is a configuration that displays images for a range,
The image of at least the predetermined range of the start timing in the second display effect includes a plurality of types of common individual images displayed in the image of the predetermined range of the end timing in the first display effect. Is
When the drawing data corresponding to the end timing is created based on the image data corresponding to the common individual images being set in the setting storage unit, the grouping unit sets the common individual images. Image data corresponding to images are grouped and stored in the grouping storage area as the grouping data,
The grouping data setting means sets the grouping data stored in the grouping storage area in the setting storage means when the drawing data corresponding to the start timing is created. The gaming machine described in F4 or F5.

According to the feature F6, even if a plurality of types of common individual images are displayed using the grouping data at the start timing in the second display effect, the grouping data is based on the end timing in the first display effect. Since it was created in, the display between both timings will correspond. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to Feature F6, wherein the plurality of types of common individual images are individual images that form an image for a background.

According to the feature F7, since the grouped data is applied to the background image, even if a common individual image used at different update timings is displayed, it becomes unnoticeable and the player feels strange. It is possible to obtain the excellent effect as already described while suppressing the holding of the body.

Feature F8. The display control means creates drawing data in the setting storage means by setting the image data, and outputs an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means to display an image on the display screen. Is displayed,
A plurality of types of display modes in which display modes of images on the display screen are different from each other are set,
An operation receiving means (production operation device 48) for receiving an operation by a player,
A display mode switching unit (a function of executing a process corresponding to an operation generation command in the display CPU 131) that sequentially switches the display modes based on the operation being received by the operation receiving unit;
Equipped with
The grouping unit, for at least a specific display mode of the plurality of types of display modes, groups the plurality of types of image data used to display an image for one update timing included in the display mode. The image data after the grouping is stored in the storage area for grouping as the grouping data,
The grouping data setting means is stored in the grouping storage area when the drawing data corresponding to the update timing immediately after the switching is switched to the specific display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F7, characterized in that the grouped data corresponding to the specific display mode is set in the setting storage means.

According to the feature F8, since a plurality of types of display modes in which the display modes of the images on the display screen are different from each other are set, the display modes can be diversified. In this case, the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode is created, and when the switching to the specific display mode is performed and the drawing data corresponding to the update timing immediately after the switching is created, the grouping is performed. The data is used. As a result, even if the switching to the specific display mode is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the operation of the operation receiving unit at an arbitrary timing, the processing load at that time can be reduced.

Feature F9. In each of the plurality of types of display modes, a display effect in which the variation individual image is variably displayed in front of the background image is set over a plurality of update timing periods.
The plurality of types of display modes are set so that at least the types of the background images are different from each other,
The gaming machine according to Feature F8, wherein the grouped data corresponding to the specific display mode is a group of a plurality of types of image data for displaying a background image of the specific display mode.

According to the feature F9, even if the switching to the specific display mode is performed at any timing based on the operation at any timing on the operation receiving unit, by using the grouped data for the background image, The processing load at that time can be reduced. In addition, even if the switching to the specific display mode occurs while the variable individual image is being displayed in a variable manner, the grouping data corresponds to the background image as described above, and therefore the variation of the individual image for fluctuation is changed. It is possible to switch only the background image while maintaining the display and reducing the processing load.

Feature F10. The plurality of types of display modes are set so that at least the types of the background images are different from each other, and the types of the variation individual images are also different from each other,
Further, in the variation display mode of the variation individual image, after the variation individual image is variably displayed in a low identification mode that is relatively difficult to identify, the variation individual image is highly identifiable relatively easily. The mode that is variably displayed in the mode is included,
In the case where the changing individual image is changed and displayed in the low identification mode and is switched to the specific display mode, and when the drawing data corresponding to the update timing immediately after the change is created, Adjustment means immediately after mode switching for setting the grouping data corresponding to the specific display mode stored in the grouping storage area in the setting storage means without changing the type of the changing individual image ( A game machine according to Feature F9, which is provided with a function of executing display mode background calculation processing and symbol calculation processing in the display CPU 131.

According to the feature F10, when the changing individual image is changed to the specific display mode in the state of being changed and displayed in the low identification mode, the grouping data is used for the background image and the changing individual image up to that time is used. The data set in the display mode is used. As a result, the processing load when switching to the specific display mode can be reduced. Further, in a situation where the variable individual image is variably displayed in the low identification mode, the type of the variable individual image is changed to the one corresponding to the specific display mode as described above, because the variable individual image has low identification. Even if there is not, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature F11. The individual image, when displayed on the display screen, includes an effect image displayed in a state in which the color information of the individual image overlapping on the back side thereof is reflected,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, wherein the plurality of types of image data grouped by the grouping unit includes image data corresponding to the effect image.

According to the feature F11, a plurality of types of effect images can be used individually, and a plurality of types of effect images can be used in a grouped state.

Feature F12. When the plurality of types of image data are grouped, the grouping unit sets a part of the plurality of types of image data as reference image data and the rest as subordinate image data to perform the grouping, thereby grouping data. Create
When the grouped data setting means sets the grouped data in the setting storage means, the grouped data setting means sets the parameter information designated for the reference image data to the reference image data and the dependent images dependent on the reference image data. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F11, which is set in the setting storage means in a state of being applied to data.

According to the feature F12, when a plurality of types of image data are handled, if the parameter information is set in the reference image data, the parameter information is also applied to the subordinate image data, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Feature F13. A plurality of types of front side image data (image data PD39 to PD42) used to display the front side image included in the image for one update timing and the one update timing are stored in the display storage unit. Of a plurality of types of rear side image data (image data PD43 to PD45) used for displaying the rear side image included in the image for the update timing after the image of
The grouping unit creates grouped data by performing grouping on the plurality of types of front side image data,
The grouping data setting means,
The plurality of types of rear side image data are set in the setting storage unit, and the grouping data to which the parameter information is applied so that a part of the front side image is hidden is set to the plurality of types of rear side image data. Duplication setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2305 in the VDP 76) that is set to overlap before the side image data,
Switching means (a function of executing the processing of step S2308 in the VDP 76) for performing the setting by the duplication setting means so that the non-display range becomes wider over the display period for a plurality of update timings;
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F12, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F13, the wipe effect can be performed while reducing the processing load.

Feature F14. The display control means,
Setting object grasping means (a function for executing the processing of step S1702 in the VDP 76) for grasping the image data to be set in the setting storage means,
With respect to the image data grasped by the setting object grasping means, derivation means for deriving parameter information that determines a setting mode when setting the image data in the setting storage means (the processing of step S1603 in the display CPU 72 is executed. Function),
Image data setting means for setting the image data grasped by the setting object grasping means in the setting storage means in a state where the parameter information derived by the deriving means is applied (function of executing the process of step S505 in the VDP 76). )When,
Equipped with
The game according to any one of features F1 to F13, wherein the grouping unit groups a plurality of types of image data in a state in which the parameter information derived by the deriving unit is applied. Machine.

According to the feature F14, the parameter information has already been applied to the plurality of types of image data in the grouped state. Therefore, when using the grouped data, the plurality of types of image data included in the grouped data are individually It is not necessary to apply parameter information. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature F15. The image data includes image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information for displaying an image,
The display control means,
Arranging means for arranging the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S3602 to S3604 in the VDP 135);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function of executing the process of step S3605 in the VDP 135);
Drawing setting means for setting the drawing data in the setting storage means using projection data created by projecting the image data on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint (steps S3610 to VDP135) Function for executing the processing of S3613),
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F14, wherein the grouping unit groups the data after the plurality of types of image data are projected on the projection plane.

According to the feature F15, when using grouped data, it is not necessary to perform geometry calculation or rendering for a plurality of types of image data included therein. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

The invention of the characteristic group F is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

The case in which an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon to which a texture is attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, the image displayed on the display screen is configured to be updated at a predetermined update cycle, and one frame of drawing data is created and the display device displays it in time for the update cycle. Signal output needs to be done. For example, in the configuration in which only one frame buffer is set for the VRAM in which drawing data is created, the drawing data is created within the range of one update cycle and the signal output based on the drawing data is performed. Need to be completed. Further, for example, in a configuration in which a plurality of frame buffers are set, in the situation where a signal is output based on drawing data created in one frame buffer, it corresponds to the next update cycle for other frame buffers. It is necessary to create drawing data.

In any of the above configurations, in order to simultaneously display individually specified individual images on the display screen, the coordinates and size of each individual image are specified, and further drawing of all of these individual images in the frame buffer is performed. If it is necessary to do so, the processing load required to create one frame of drawing data increases. When the processing load exceeds the update cycle, processing omission occurs.

Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features F1 to F15, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the following features G1 to G9, the following features G'1 to G'2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. Alternatively, the configuration limited to 1 may be applied. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature G group>
Features G1. Arrangement means for arranging the image data of the object in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing of steps S3602 to S3604 in the VDP 135) and viewpoint setting means for setting the viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (step S3605 in the VDP135). And a drawing setting means (in the VDP135) for projecting the image data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generating generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane. A function of executing the processing of steps S3610 to S3613), and storage means (frame areas 142a and 142b) for storing the generated data (drawing data) generated by
Display control means (display CPU 131, VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The object includes a connected object that has a plurality of partial objects sandwiching a predetermined connected portion between them, and that is capable of displacing the relative positions of the partial objects with reference to the connected portion. ,
The connection objects used when displaying the same type of special characters include a plurality of types of special connection objects (connection objects PC35, PC36) having different positions at which the connection portions are set.
The display control means switches the connected object used for displaying the special character to any one of the plurality of types of special connected objects (step S4507, step S4516, step S4523 in the display CPU 131). (A function of executing the processing of step 1), an image corresponding to the generated data generated by using the display means is displayed on the display means.

According to the feature G1, one of a plurality of types of special connection objects is used to display the same type of special character. Then, the plurality of types of special connection objects have different positions at which the connection portions are set. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of a single special-purpose linked object as compared to a configuration in which a single special-purpose linked object in which those linked parts are collectively set is provided, and one special-purpose linked object can be read out. Can be satisfactorily performed. Further, by providing a plurality of types of special connection objects as described above in the development stage of the gaming machine, it becomes easy to adjust the movement of the special character when developing the gaming machine.

As described above, it is possible to handle the connected object well.

Features G2. The plurality of types of special connection objects include a first connection object (first connection object PC35) and a second connection object (second connection object PC36),
The connected object switching means is configured to switch the object for displaying the special character from the first connected object to the second connected object at a specific display switching timing,
The arranging means arranges the second connected object together with the first connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space in a situation where the first connected object is set as an object for displaying the special character. , An overlapping arrangement means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4602 and S4603 in the VDP 135) for arranging the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing. The gaming machine described in the feature G1.

According to the feature G2, at the specific display switching timing, the object for displaying the special character is switched from the first connected object to the second connected object, and the movement of the special character changes. In this case, the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space at a timing before the specific display switching timing. As a result, at a specific display switching timing, it is not necessary to execute the process for starting the placement of the second linked object in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the parameter information of the already placed second linked object can be updated. Just go. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which both the arrangement process and the update process of the second connected object are performed at a specific display switching timing.

Features G3. Parameter updating means for updating parameter information including at least information on coordinates and angles of objects arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space in order to change the display content of the image (processing of steps S4605, S4613, and S4619 in VDP135). Is used to generate the generated data,
The processing load for updating the parameter information of the object is smaller than the processing load for starting the placement of the object in the virtual three-dimensional space,
Further, the plurality of types of special connection objects include a first connection object (first connection object PC35) and a second connection object (second connection object PC36),
The connected object switching means is configured to switch the object for displaying the special character from the first connected object to the second connected object at a specific display switching timing,
The arranging means arranges the second connected object together with the first connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space in a situation where the first connected object is set as an object for displaying the special character. , An overlapping arrangement means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4602 and S4603 in the VDP 135) for arranging the second connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing. The gaming machine described in the feature G1.

According to the feature G3, the object for displaying the special character is switched from the first connected object to the second connected object at the specific display switching timing, and the movement of the special character changes. In this case, the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space at a timing before the specific display switching timing. As a result, at a specific display switching timing, it is not necessary to execute the process for starting the placement of the second linked object in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the parameter information of the already placed second linked object can be updated. Just go. Therefore, the processing load at a specific display switching timing can be reduced.

Features G4. The parameter updating means is in a situation where both the first connected object and the second connected object are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, and at a timing before the specific display switching timing, the first The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein not only the connected object but also the parameter information of the second connected object is updated.

According to the feature G4, not only the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space but also the parameter information of the second connected object is updated before the specific display switching timing. This makes it possible to use the parameter information that has been updated up to that point when the specific display switching timing has come, and to reduce the processing load at that timing.

Features G5. The derivation means (the function of executing arithmetic processing for the connected object in the display CPU 131) that derives the parameter information of the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space according to the display content of the image to be updated is the generated data. Used in the generation of
The parameter updating unit updates the parameter information derived by the deriving unit as parameter information of an object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the first connected object and the first connected object in the virtual three-dimensional space. The parameter information determined by the deriving unit for the first connected object is set to the first connected object at a timing before the specific display switching timing when both of the two connected objects are arranged. And the gaming machine according to feature G4, which is updated as parameter information of both the second connected object.

According to the feature G5, the parameter information of the first connected object is used as the parameter information for the second connected object in the configuration in which the parameter information of the second connected object is updated even before the specific display switching timing. To be done. Accordingly, compared to a configuration in which the parameter information is individually applied to each of the first connected object and the second connected object at a timing before the specific display switching timing, the parameter information before the specific display switching timing can be set. The processing load at the timing can be reduced.

Features G6. The features G2 to G5 are characterized in that the overlapping arrangement means arranges the second connected object so that the second connected object is arranged at the same coordinates as the coordinates at which the first connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the characteristic G6, in the configuration in which the second connected object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space before the specific display switching timing, the second connected object is arranged at the same coordinates as the first connected object. , The processing load can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which coordinates are individually specified for the second connected object.

Features G7. By adjusting the transparency value information applied to the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, the transparency value setting means (in the VDP 135) for setting the object to be displayed or hidden on the display screen. The function of executing the processing of step S4604, step S4612, and step S4618) is used in the generation of the generated data,
The linked object switching means sets the transparent value information in which the first linked object is the display target and the second linked object is the non-display target to the linked objects at a timing before the specific display switching timing. The transparent value information in which the first linked object is the non-display target and the second linked object is the display mode after the specific display switching timing is set in the linked objects. The gaming machine according to any one of the features G2 to G6.

According to the characteristic G7, in the configuration in which the second connected object is arranged before the specific display switching timing, the switching of the connected object to be displayed before and after the specific display switching timing is applied to each connected object. It is performed only by switching the transparent value information to be performed. As a result, the processing load associated with switching the connected object to be displayed can be reduced.

Features G8. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of update timings, a first specific display effect (first effect period) and the number of individual images displayed on the display screen are larger than those of the first specific display effect. Or a second specific display effect (second effect period) in which an individual image whose processing load when displaying an image is larger than the individual image displayed in the first specific display effect is displayed. Is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G7, wherein the specific display switching timing is a timing at which the first specific display effect is switched to the second specific display effect.

According to the characteristic G8, since the first specific display effect is switched to the second specific display effect at the specific display switching timing, there is a concern that the processing load at the timing is extremely increased. Since the G2 or the like is provided, the processing load can be reduced.

Features G9. As a display effect over a display period for a plurality of update timings, a first specific display effect (first effect period) and a second specific display effect (second effect period) in which a processing load when displaying an image is large. ), and are set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G7, wherein the specific display switching timing is a timing at which the first specific display effect is switched to the second specific display effect.

According to the characteristic G9, since the first specific display effect is switched to the second specific display effect at the specific display switching timing, there is a concern that the processing load at the timing is extremely increased. Since the G2 or the like is provided, the processing load can be reduced.

The invention of the characteristic group G is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, those provided with a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In such a gaming machine, a memory in which image data is stored in advance is installed, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen using the image data read from the memory.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When the display is performed, an object that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as characters and patterns is attached to the object. Drawing data is created by projecting the object with the texture pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, as a character object, a connected object having a plurality of partial objects sandwiching a predetermined connecting portion between them and capable of displacing the relative positions of these partial objects with reference to the connecting portion is set. By setting it in advance, the movement of the character can be made smooth. However, in connection with the connection object having the connection portion as described above, the creation in the game machine development stage is complicated as compared with the object having no connection portion. Under such circumstances, if it is desired to change the movement of the character in the course of game machine development, if the linked object is recreated from the beginning, the development period will be prolonged. On the other hand, if the connection part is set so as to correspond to all movements from the beginning, the data capacity of the connection object will increase accordingly.

Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features G1 to G9, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the above features F1 to F15, the following features G′1 to G′2, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. Alternatively, the configuration limited to 1 may be applied. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature G'group>
Feature G'1. Display means having a display screen,
Display storage means for storing image data in advance,
Display control means for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data, and updating the content of the image for one frame at a predetermined update timing;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores specific image data used when a specific image is displayed as a specific type of individual image,
The display control means,
First display control means for displaying the specific image by using the specific image data,
Second display control means for displaying, as the specific type of individual image, a simple image that requires a smaller processing load for displaying the image than the case of displaying the specific image using the specific image data;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G'1, when displaying a specific type of individual image, it is possible to select specific image data to be used according to the processing load at the update timing at which the display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable display according to the processing load.

Feature G'2. Display means having a display screen,
Display storage means for storing image data in advance,
Display control means for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data, and updating the content of the image at a predetermined update timing,
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the image data used when displaying a specific type of individual image in the display storage means, the first specific image data and the processing load required to display the image are different from those of the first specific image data. And the second specific image data,
The display control means,
First display control means for displaying the specific type of individual image by using the first specific image data;
Second display control means for displaying the specific type of individual image by using the second specific image data;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G'2, when displaying a specific type of individual image, it is possible to select the specific image data to be used according to the processing load of the update timing at which the display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a suitable display according to the processing load.

The invention of the characteristic G'group is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

The case in which an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Here, the image displayed on the display screen is configured to be updated at a predetermined update cycle, and one frame of drawing data is created and the display device displays it in time for the update cycle. Signal output needs to be done. In addition, when creating the drawing data, an operation for specifying the coordinates and sizes of the individual images simultaneously displayed on the display screen is performed, and the drawing data is created based on the operation result.

In the above configuration, the processing load increases as the number of individual images to be calculated increases at the same time. Then, when the processing load locally increases, there is a concern that a processing drop may occur.

By the way, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features G′1 to G′2, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the feature C′1, and the features D1 to D10. Any of the above features E1 to E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the following features H1 to H11, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. Alternatively, the configuration limited to 1 may be applied. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature H group>
Features H1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a large number of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
By setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b) having a large number of unit setting areas, drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is generated. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen based on output to the display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that the plurality of individual images are overlapped in the depth direction of the display screen (a function of executing steps S1104 to S1105 in the VDP 76, step S1403 in the VDP 76). A function of executing the processing of step S1404),
Regarding the data of the unit setting area in which the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the image data of the overlapping position of the back side individual image is reflected in the image data of the overlapping position of the front side individual image. Overlapping reflection means (a function of executing the first effect addition processing in the VDP 76, a function of executing the second effect addition processing in the VDP 76) for bringing the state into the established state,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature H1, when a plurality of individual images are overlapped in the depth direction, a function of displaying the image data of the overlapping portion of the back side individual image is reflected in the image data of the overlapping portion of the front side individual image have. As a result, when the front side individual image is displayed, it is possible to display it in a state in which the color of the back side individual image is reflected, and it is possible to display a visually preferable image.

Features H2. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information,
The duplicate reflection means is
Arithmetic processing executing means for executing a predetermined arithmetic processing by using the numerical information of the unit image data which are mutually overlapped in the plurality of individual images (a function of executing the processing of step S1204 in the VDP 76, a step S1506 of the VDP 76). Function to execute processing),
Setting processing execution means for setting the data of the calculation result of the calculation processing in the unit setting area corresponding to the mutually overlapping unit image data in the setting storage means (a function of executing step S1205 of VDP76, VDP76 Function for executing the process of step S1507 in step S1),
The gaming machine according to the feature H1, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic H2, by performing the arithmetic processing using the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the overlapping portion in the depth direction, the excellent effect as described in the characteristic H1 can be obtained.

Features H3. Each of the unit setting areas has a configuration capable of setting numerical information within a range up to a limit numerical value, and the display control means corresponds to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical information. A configuration for outputting the image signal so that a bright color is displayed in the dots,
The feature H2 is characterized in that the arithmetic processing execution means executes, as the predetermined arithmetic processing, an addition processing for adding numerical information of unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images. Amusement machine.

According to the feature H3, when the image is displayed based on the drawing data set in the setting storage unit, the dot corresponding to the unit setting area in which numerical information of large numerical value is set is displayed in brighter color. Because of the configuration, complication of display control of the dot can be suppressed. In the configuration, the unit setting area in which the result of adding the numerical information of the unit image data corresponding to the overlapping portion in the depth direction is set has a numerical value larger than that of the image data of the front individual image. Numerical information is set. Therefore, it is possible to display an image reflecting the color and brightness of the back-side individual image at the overlapping portion. As a result, the relationship between the numerical value information set in the unit setting area and the image display for the numerical value information is used, and further, the relatively simple arithmetic processing of the addition processing is used, as described in the characteristic H1. It is possible to exert an excellent effect.

Features H4. When the image data of the overlapping portion of the back side individual image is reflected to the image data of the overlapping portion of the front side individual image by the overlap reflecting means, the ratio of the reflection of the back side image data is reduced. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, which is provided with a reflection reducing unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S1502 to S1504 in the VDP 76).

According to the feature H4, it is possible to reflect the image data of the front side individual image in a state where the ratio of the image data of the back side individual image reflected is reduced. Thus, for example, when the image data of the back side individual image is reflected as it is, when the front side individual image cannot be displayed well, the ratio of reflecting the image data of the back side individual image is reduced to It is possible to favorably display the front side individual image in a state in which the side individual image is reflected.

Features H5. The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information,
The duplication setting means,
Arithmetic processing execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S1506 in the VDP 76) that executes a predetermined arithmetic processing using the numerical information of the unit image data that mutually overlap in the plurality of individual images;
Setting processing execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S1507 in the VDP 76) for setting the data of the calculation result of the calculation processing in the setting storage means in the unit setting area corresponding to the mutually overlapping unit image data; ,
A reflection reducing unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S1502 to S1504 in the VDP 76) that reduces the numerical information of the back-side individual image among the unit image data to be calculated by the calculation process.
The gaming machine according to the feature H1, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic H5, by performing the arithmetic processing using the numerical information of each unit image data corresponding to the overlapping portion in the depth direction, the excellent effect as described in the characteristic H1 can be obtained.

Further, it is possible to reflect the image data of the front side individual image in a state where the ratio of the image data of the back side individual image reflected is reduced. Thus, for example, when the image data of the back side individual image is reflected as it is, when the front side individual image cannot be displayed well, the ratio of reflecting the image data of the back side individual image is reduced, and the back side individual image is reduced. It is possible to favorably display the front side individual image in a state in which the individual image is reflected.

In particular, since the target for which numerical information is reduced in arithmetic processing is not the front side individual image but the back side individual image, it is possible to suppress the color tone of the front side individual image that is positively added in front of the back side individual image. , The back side individual image can be reflected.

Features H6. Each of the unit setting areas has a configuration capable of setting numerical information within a range up to a limit numerical value, and the display control means corresponds to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical information. A configuration for outputting the image signal so that a bright color is displayed in the dots,
The arithmetic processing execution means is configured to execute, as the predetermined arithmetic processing, an addition processing for adding numerical information of the unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images,
The gaming machine according to Feature H5, wherein the reflection reducing unit reduces the numerical value information of the back-side individual image in each unit image data to be added in the addition process at a predetermined rate.

According to the characteristic H6, when the image is displayed based on the drawing data set in the setting storage unit, the brighter color is displayed for the dot corresponding to the unit setting area in which the numerical information of large numerical value is set. Because of the configuration, complication of display control of the dot can be suppressed. In the configuration, the unit setting area in which the result of adding the numerical information of the unit image data corresponding to the overlapping portion in the depth direction is set has a numerical value larger than that of the image data of the front individual image. Numerical information is set. Therefore, it is possible to display an image reflecting the color and brightness of the back-side individual image at the overlapping portion. As a result, the relationship between the numerical value information set in the unit setting area and the image display for the numerical value information is used, and further, the relatively simple arithmetic processing of the addition processing is used, as described in the characteristic H1. It is possible to exert an excellent effect.

However, in the configuration in which the addition process of the numerical information is executed as described above, it is assumed that the numerical information of the result of the addition process exceeds the limit numerical value of the unit setting area, and then the front side individual image is displayed. You will not be able to do well. On the other hand, it is possible to reflect the numerical information of the unit image data of the back side individual image in the image data of the front side individual image in a state of being reduced at a predetermined rate. As a result, it is possible to prevent the numerical information of the result of the addition process from exceeding the limit numerical value of the unit setting area, and it is possible to favorably display the front side individual image in which the back side individual image is reflected. Become.

Features H7. The display storage unit stores in advance transparent value adjustment data (partial addition data PD19) in which a transparent value is set corresponding to each unit image data of the front side individual image,
The reflection reducing means is set in the transparency value adjustment data for each of the image data of the front side individual image and the unit image data for which the arithmetic processing is executed in the image data of the back side individual image. The game machine according to the feature H5 or H6, wherein each of the transparent values is applied.

According to the feature H7, in order to reduce the ratio of reflecting the back-side individual image, the transparency value adjustment data may be read from the display storage means and applied to the image data of the back-side individual image. The complication of the processing for reducing the ratio can be suppressed.

Features H8. Coordinate specifying means (function of executing arithmetic processing for the second effect effect in the display CPU 72) for specifying coordinates when setting the image data in the setting storage means,
The reflection reducing means is set in the transparency value adjustment data for each of the image data of the front side individual image and the unit image data for which the arithmetic processing is executed in the image data of the back side individual image. The transparency value adjusting data is set to the coordinates specified in the front side individual image by the coordinate specifying means so that each transparency value is applied. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic H8, when the ratio of reflecting the back side individual image is reduced, the transparency value adjustment data is read from the display storage means, and the transparency value adjustment data is further read as the image data of the front side individual image. Since it is only necessary to set the same coordinates as the coordinates to be set, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the processing for reducing the ratio.

Features H9. The front side individual image has an effect image (effect image CH2) having a large number of unit image data in which numerical information defining color information is associated as image data and a transparent value applied to the numerical information is set. ) The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8.

According to the feature H9, the effect image can be displayed well.

Feature H10. The effect image is used to produce a visual effect on a predetermined base image (character CH1),
The game data according to Feature H9, wherein the display storage unit stores image data of the base image (sprite data PD16) and image data of the effect image (effect data PD17) separately. Machine.

According to the feature H10, when the base image is displayed, it is possible to display the base image alone and also to display the effect image applied to the base image.

Feature H11. The unit image data is configured to be associated with numerical information that defines color information and to set a transparent value applied to the numerical information,
In the case where the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the image data setting unit corresponds to the transparent portion corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the unit image data of the front individual image corresponding to the overlapping portion. When the value is not set, the unit image area of the setting destination, set the unit image data of the front side individual image in a state of not reflecting the unit image data of the back side individual image,
In the case where the plurality of individual images overlap each other in the depth direction of the display screen, the overlap reflection unit corresponds to the overlapping portion, and the transparency value corresponding to the information to be transmitted to the unit image data of the front individual image. Is set, the unit image data of the rear side individual image to the unit image data of the front side individual image in a state where the transparent value is applied to the numerical information, for the unit setting area of the setting destination. The game machine according to any one of the features H1 to H10, characterized in that the data in a state in which is reflected is set.

According to the feature H11, whether to reflect the image data of the back side individual image can be determined based on the setting status of the transparency value for the unit image data of the front side individual image, and the process related to the determination. The complexity of the configuration is suppressed.

The invention of the characteristic H group is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

The case in which an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon to which a texture is attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, as a kind of display effect, a smoke screen may be displayed to represent a state in which an explosion has occurred. In addition, clouds may be displayed to indicate that the weather is cloudy, and rain may be displayed to indicate that it is raining. These individual images are displayed auxiliary in front of the background and the character. In this case, if the individual image is displayed regardless of the background and the color tone of the character, the player feels uncomfortable and is not preferable.

By the way, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features H1 to H11, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the above features G′1 to G′2, the following features I1 to I10, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. Alternatively, the configuration limited to 1 may be applied. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature group I>
Feature I1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory module 74) in which image data is stored in advance corresponding to individual images individually displayed on the display screen;
Setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b) in which drawing data is set using the image data;
Derivation means for deriving parameter information including coordinate information of the setting destination of the image data in the setting storage means (function for executing task processing in the display CPU 72);
Creating the drawing data by setting the image data in the setting storage means according to the parameter information derived by the deriving means, and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means. Display control means (VDP76) for displaying an image on the display screen based on
In a gaming machine equipped with
The derivation means,
When there is image data for which the derivation of the parameter information is to be newly started, a derivation starting process (in the display CPU 72, for executing derivation start processing for newly starting the derivation of the parameter information for the image data). A function of executing the processing of steps S612 to S614),
For the image data for which the derivation start process has already been completed, an update derivation unit that executes an update process for updating the parameter information in accordance with a change in the display content of the image (in steps S615 to S617 of the display CPU 72). Function to execute processing),
It is not included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start process, but may be included in the display target on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. Advance derivation means for performing the derivation start process on the image data corresponding to the individual image (a function of the display CPU 72 for performing the processes of steps S607 to S611);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic I1, the drawing data is created by setting the image data in the setting storage means according to the parameter information derived by the deriving means, and the image signal is output to the display means according to the drawing data. By doing so, the image is displayed on the display screen.

In the above configuration, the derivation unit starts the derivation of the parameter information by executing the derivation start process for the image data when the image data for which the derivation of the parameter information is to be newly started exists, and then At the image update timing of, the parameter information having started the derivation may be updated. Thereby, when a predetermined individual image is displayed over a display period for a plurality of update timings, the process of newly setting the parameter information does not need to be repeatedly performed on the image data of the individual image, It is sufficient to repeatedly update the parameter information that has already been set.

Further, although it is not included in the display target on the display screen at the update timing of the image corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start process, it may be included in the display target on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. The derivation start process may be executed on the image data corresponding to the image. This makes it possible to complete the derivation start process for individual images outside the display screen in advance, and, for example, when there are many individual images to be displayed on the display screen, those individual images It is possible to disperse the execution timing of the derivation start process so as to avoid the derivation start process from being executed simultaneously for the image data.

As described above, the processing load for displaying an image can be reduced.

Feature I2. The preliminary derivation unit is included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing of executing the derivation start process, but the derivation start process is not yet completed. Priority within the display range that causes the derivation start processing to be executed for the image data corresponding to the image at a higher priority than the individual image that is not included in the display target on the display screen at the update timing. The gaming machine according to feature I1, which is provided with means (a function of the display CPU 72 for executing the processing of steps S609 to S610).

According to the characteristic I2, in the configuration including the characteristic I1 and capable of executing the derivation start process for the image data of the individual image outside the display screen in advance, the display target on the display screen is more than the image data. However, the derivation start process is preferentially executed for the image data corresponding to the individual image that is included in, but has not yet completed the derivation start process. As a result, in the configuration in which the execution timings of the derivation start processing are dispersed as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the individual image that should be displayed is not displayed.

Feature I3. The preliminary derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing at which the derivation start process is executed, but is displayed on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. When the derivation start process is executed for image data corresponding to individual images that may be included in the target, the image data of the individual image whose display target on the display screen is earlier is given priority. The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or I2, which is provided with a priority means (a function of the display CPU 72 that executes the process of step S611) outside the display range so that the derivation start process is executed. ..

According to the characteristic I3, when there are a plurality of individual images that are outside the display screen but may be included in the display target at the subsequent update timing, the timing of the display target on the display screen is earlier. Since the derivation start processing is executed with priority from the image data of the individual image, the processing load can be favorably distributed.

Feature I4. The deriving unit outputs, to the display control unit, drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information specifying image data of an individual image included in an image for one update timing and parameter information derived for the image data. A drawing instruction means (function of executing the processing of step S408 in the display CPU 72)
The display control means is configured to set the image data in the setting storage means according to the information instructed by the drawing instruction information, and create the drawing data for the update timing corresponding to the drawing instruction information. Yes,
Further, when the drawing instruction means outputs the drawing instruction information corresponding to the image for one update timing, the image data of the individual image not included in the display target on the display screen at the update timing is described above. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the drawing instruction information is output so as not to include information corresponding to the image data even if the derivation start process is completed.

According to the characteristic I4, even if the derivation unit starts derivation of the parameter information in advance, only the image data of the individual image in the display screen is provided to the drawing instruction information output to the display control unit. , Information corresponding to the image data of the individual image outside the display screen is not provided. This makes it possible to suppress the amount of drawing instruction information output to the display control means. Further, the display control unit does not need to determine whether the specified individual image is within the display screen, and even if the determination is not performed, display control of the individual image outside the display screen is unnecessarily performed. You don't have to.

Feature I5. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed at a predetermined position in the range of the rear image before the rear image, and the update timing of 1 as the rear image. Includes a wide range rear image set wider than the minute display range,
The wide-range rear image is provided with display changing means (a function of executing the process of step S604 in the display CPU 72) for changing the display range of the one update timing to a position different from the display range at the previous update timing. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I4.

According to the feature I5, since the display range for one update timing may be changed, it is possible to suppress the uniformization of the display effect and increase the degree of attention to the image. In this case, since the derivation start process is executed in advance for the individual image outside the display screen as well, even if the display range for one update timing is switched, On the other hand, it becomes possible to favorably derive the parameter information of each individual image.

Feature I6. An operation receiving unit (production operation device 48) for receiving an operation by a player is provided,
The gaming machine according to Feature I5, wherein the display changing unit changes the display range corresponding to the one update timing based on the operation received by the operation receiving unit.

According to Feature I6, the display range for one update timing may be changed based on the player's operation on the operation accepting unit, so that the uniformization of the display effect is suppressed and the attention degree to the image is increased. It is possible to raise it. However, in the configuration in which the display range for one update timing is changed based on the operation on the operation receiving unit, it is difficult to predict the timing when the change occurs. In this case, since the derivation start process is executed in advance for the individual image outside the display screen as well, even if the display range for one update timing is switched, On the other hand, it becomes possible to favorably derive the parameter information of each individual image.

Feature I7. The preliminary derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing at which the derivation start process is executed, but is displayed on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. The gaming machine according to feature I5 or I6, characterized in that whether or not there is an individual image that may be included in the target is determined based on the display range at that time.

According to the feature I7, the individual image that is a target for starting the derivation of the parameter information is grasped with reference to the set display range. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the display range is switched, the distribution of the execution timing of the derivation start processing is performed according to the currently set display range, and the distribution can be favorably performed.

Feature I8. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed in front of the rear image,
Further, an operation receiving means (production operation device 48) for receiving an operation by a player,
Display changing means (function of executing the process of step S604 in the display CPU 72) for changing the content of the back image based on the operation being accepted by the operation accepting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I4, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature I8, the contents of the rear image may be changed based on the operation of the operation receiving unit by the player, so that the uniform display effect can be suppressed and the attention to the image can be increased. Becomes However, in the configuration in which the content of the rear image is changed based on the operation on the operation receiving unit, it is difficult to predict the timing of the change. In this case, since the derivation start process is performed in advance for the individual image outside the display screen, the derivation start process is executed in advance for the individual image outside the display screen. It is possible to favorably derive the parameter information of the individual image.

Feature I9. The preliminary derivation means is not included in the display target on the display screen at the image update timing corresponding to the timing at which the derivation start process is executed, but is displayed on the display screen at the subsequent update timing. The gaming machine according to feature I8, wherein whether or not there is an individual image that may be included in the target is determined based on the content of the back image at that time.

According to the feature I9, the individual image that is the start target of the derivation of the parameter information is grasped on the basis of the content of the set back image. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the content of the back image is switched, the distribution of the execution timing of the derivation start process is performed according to the content of the back image that is currently set, and the distribution can be performed well.

Feature I10. Derivation storage means (work RAM 73) used when deriving the parameter information in the derivation means,
As the derivation start processing, the derivation means for derivation uses the derivation to be used for deriving the parameter information of the image data when there is image data for which derivation of the parameter information should be newly started. At least a search process (step S612 in the display CPU 72) for searching the region in the storage unit for storage and a region initialization process (step S613 in the display CPU 72) for initializing the region secured based on the search result. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9.

According to the characteristic I10, in the derivation start process, not only the process of setting the parameter information but also the process of searching the region used for deriving the parameter information and the region secured based on the search result are initialized. The processing load is larger than that of the update processing. On the other hand, since it is possible to disperse the execution timing of the derivation start processing by providing the configuration of the above characteristic I1, it is possible to disperse the processing load.

The invention of the characteristic group I is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

The case in which an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon to which a texture is attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, the image displayed on the display screen is configured to be updated at a predetermined update cycle, and one frame of drawing data is created and the display device displays it in time for the update cycle. Signal output needs to be done. In addition, when creating the drawing data, an operation for specifying the coordinates and sizes of the individual images simultaneously displayed on the display screen is performed, and the drawing data is created based on the operation result.

In the above configuration, the processing load increases as the number of individual images to be calculated increases at the same time. Then, when the processing load locally increases, there is a concern that a processing drop may occur.

Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features I1 to I10, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the above features G′1 to G′2, the above features H1 to H11, the following features J1 to J13, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. Alternatively, the configuration limited to 1 may be applied. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature J group>
Features J1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G) in which a large number of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally,
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Drawing data creating means for creating drawing data in the setting storage means using the image data (a function for executing the process of step S505 in the VDP 76),
Image signal output means (display circuit 94) for displaying an image on the display screen based on outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
A data adjusting unit (scaler) that adjusts the data size of the drawing data created in the setting storage unit to create adjusted data and causes the image signal output unit to output an image signal according to the adjusted data. 97),
Change effect executing means (a setting process for zoom-in effect in the VDP 76 that causes a size change effect that is at least one of enlargement and reduction of the individual image displayed on the display screen by changing the adjustment magnification of the data adjusting means. Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature J1, the size change effect of the individual image displayed on the display screen is performed by adjusting the data size of the drawing data and changing the adjustment magnification when creating the adjusted data. As a result, the size change effect can be performed while reducing the processing load, as compared with the configuration in which the magnification is individually adjusted for each of the image data set in the setting storage unit. As described above, the size change effect can be favorably executed.

Features J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein when the drawing data is created in the setting storage unit, the drawing data creating unit creates the drawing data in the same size regardless of the adjustment ratio.

According to the feature J2, the drawing data creating means only needs to create drawing data of a certain size regardless of the presence or absence of the size change effect and the content thereof, so that while suppressing complication of the processing related to the creation of the drawing data, A size change effect can be performed.

Features J3. An initial adjustment magnification is set as the adjustment magnification of the data adjusting means,
In the situation where the initial adjustment magnification is set, the data adjusting unit is configured to perform the adjustment after the adjustment so that an image corresponding to the entire drawing data is displayed in a state of being adjusted to the resolution of the display screen. The game machine according to feature J1 or J2, which is characterized by creating data.

According to the feature J3, the excellent effect as described in the feature J1 and the like can be obtained by using the configuration for performing resolution adjustment corresponding to the display screen on the created drawing data.

Features J4. The change effect executing means changes the adjustment magnification of the data adjusting means to a magnification for enlargement larger than the initial adjustment magnification, thereby performing the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement of the individual image displayed on the display screen. The gaming machine described in the feature J3, which is provided with an enlarging execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2701 in the VDP 76) to be executed.

According to the feature J4, the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement of the individual image is performed based on the initial adjustment magnification. Thereby, the drawing data creating means may create the drawing data of a fixed size regardless of the presence or absence of the size change effect and the contents. Therefore, the size change effect can be performed while suppressing the complication of the process related to the creation of the drawing data.

Features J5. The change effect executing means is smaller than the enlargement magnification within the range from the initial adjustment magnification to the enlargement magnification in a situation where the size change effect corresponding to the enlargement is being performed by the enlargement executing means. A reduction execution unit (a function for executing the process of step S2701 in the VDP 76) that performs the size change effect corresponding to the reduction of the individual image displayed on the display screen by changing the magnification is provided. Characteristic Feature The game machine according to J4.

According to the feature J5, after the adjustment magnification is set to the predetermined enlargement magnification, the adjustment magnification is returned to the initial adjustment magnification side, whereby the size change effect corresponding to the reduction of the individual image is performed. Thereby, the drawing data creating means may create the drawing data of a fixed size regardless of the presence or absence of the size change effect and the contents. Therefore, the size change effect can be performed while suppressing the complication of the process related to the creation of the drawing data.

Features J6. A power source unit (power source and launch control device 57) that is connected to an external power source and supplies operating power required in the gaming machine;
Initial setting means (a function for executing the process of step S305 in the display CPU 72) for setting the adjustment magnification of the data adjusting means to the initial adjustment magnification based on the start of the supply of the operating power from the power supply unit;
The gaming machine according to any one of the features J3 to J5, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J6, in the configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the adjustment magnification of the data adjusting means, for example, when the power ON operation of the gaming machine is performed and the supply of the operating power from the power supply unit is started. The adjustment ratio is set to the initial adjustment ratio. As a result, the initial adjustment magnification can be set satisfactorily.

Features J7. Magnification restoring means (enlargement flag in VDP 76) for returning to the initial adjustment magnification after the end of the size change effect when the adjustment magnification of the data adjusting means is changed from the initial adjustment magnification for performing the size change effect. The game machine according to any one of the features J3 to J6.

According to the feature J7, it is possible to display an image according to the resolution of the display screen after the end of the size change effect.

Features J8. The data adjusting means creates the adjusted data based on executing linear interpolation processing (processing of steps S2802 and S2806 in the display circuit 94) on the drawing data. The gaming machine according to any one of J7.

According to the feature J8, the excellent effect as described in the feature J1 and the like can be obtained by using the linear interpolation processing.

Features J9. The change effect execution means is configured such that a specific individual image among a plurality of individual images included in an image for one update timing when the size change effect is performed is included in the display screen in its entirety. Individual adjustment means for adjusting the parameter information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage means by the drawing data creation means (function of executing the processing of steps S2608 to S2612 in the display CPU 72) The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, which is characterized by comprising:

In the configuration that performs the size change effect by changing the magnification of the drawing data, it is assumed that the size of the specific individual image that you want to display in its entirety will be changed and part of it will be placed outside the display screen. To be done. On the other hand, according to the feature J9, the parameter information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage unit is adjusted such that the entire specific individual image is included in the display screen. To be done. As a result, it is possible to display the entire specific individual image on the display screen while achieving the effect described in the above feature J1 and the like.

Features J10. The change effect execution unit determines a specific individual image of the plurality of individual images included in the image for the update timing of 1 when the size change effect is performed, when the size change effect is not performed. Parameter information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage unit by the drawing data creating unit so as to be similar to at least one of the size and position displayed in the image for the update timing The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, which is provided with an individual adjustment unit (a function of the display CPU 72 that executes the processes of steps S2608 to S2612).

In the configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the magnification of the drawing data, the size change is performed even for a specific individual image that at least one of the size and the position is not changed, and the element that is not changed is changed. It is assumed that it will end up. On the other hand, according to the feature J10, the image data of the specific individual image is stored for setting so that at least one of the size and the position of the specific individual image is similar to the case where the size change effect is not performed. The parameter information when adjusted to the means is adjusted. As a result, it is possible to maintain the elements that are not desired to be changed for the specific individual image, while achieving the effects as described in the feature J1 and the like.

Feature J11. The change effect execution unit is a specific individual image among a plurality of individual images included in the image for one update timing when the size change effect is performed, the specific individual image is the update timing immediately before the size change effect is started. The size and position information when the image data of the specific individual image is set in the setting storage unit by the drawing data creating unit is adjusted so as to be similar to the size and position displayed in the image of FIG. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, which is provided with an individual adjustment unit (a function of the display CPU 72 to execute the processes of steps S2608 to S2612).

In the configuration in which the size change effect is performed by changing the magnification of the drawing data, the size and the position of the specific individual image that is similar to the image at the update timing immediately before the size change effect is started can be changed. It is expected that changes will be made. On the other hand, according to the feature J11, the image data of the specific individual image is set such that the specific individual image has the same size and position as the image at the update timing immediately before the start of the size change effect. The information of the size and the coordinates when set in the storage means is adjusted. As a result, it is possible to maintain the display mode for the specific individual image while achieving the effects described in the above feature J1 and the like.

Features J12. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which the variable individual image is variably displayed before the rear image,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J9 to J11, wherein the specific individual image is the variation individual image.

According to the feature J12, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the changing individual image from changing with the size change effect.

Features J13. As a display effect, a reach effect is included in which an image for reach is displayed in a state in which an individual image for reach is displayed in standby,
The gaming machine according to Feature J12, wherein the specific individual image is the standby individual image for the reach.

According to the feature J13, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the individual reach image from fluctuating due to the size change effect.

The invention of the characteristic J group is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

The case in which an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Further, in recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is three-dimensional image data is set in the virtual three-dimensional space, and a texture that is two-dimensional image data such as a character or a pattern is attached to the polygon. Drawing data is created by projecting a polygon to which a texture is attached onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. Then, a signal is output to the display device based on the drawing data, so that a stereoscopic image is displayed.

Here, it is conceivable that the display effect can be diversified by performing the display effect for enlarging or reducing the image for one frame. However, it is not preferable that the processing load becomes large and the processing omission occurs in order to perform the display effect. On the other hand, in order to perform the display effect, for example, the number of individual images to be displayed is intentionally reduced. If measures are taken to simplify such display contents, the attention to the display effect cannot be suitably increased.

Incidentally, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features J1 to J13, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the above features F1 to F15, the above features G1 to G9, the above features G′1 to G′2, the above features H1 to H11, the above features I1 to I10, the following features K1 to K9, and the following features L1 to L19. Alternatively, the configuration limited to 1 may be applied. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data stored in the display storage means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores a plurality of types of compressed moving image data used to reproduce a moving image,
The display control means,
A developing means (a movie decoder 93) for developing any of the moving image data in the developing area and creating still image data for a plurality of update timings for the image corresponding to the moving image data;
By using the still image data corresponding to the plurality of update timings expanded by the expanding means in the order defined in the moving image data, the moving image of the image corresponding to the moving image data corresponds to the plurality of update timings. A moving image display executing means (a function for executing a moving image setting process in the VDP 76) that is displayed over the display period of
Of the plurality of types of moving image data, the second moving image data (moving image data PD55 after branching) is displayed after the moving image based on the first moving image data (moving image data PD54 before branching) is displayed. A plurality of moving image effect executing means (function of executing arithmetic processing for moving images in the display CPU 72) for performing a group of display effects having a display period in which a moving image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic K1, a group of display effects are performed using at least the first moving image data and the second moving image data, instead of using a single moving image data. As a result, for example, the first moving image data or the second moving image data can be commonly used to perform other display effects, and the moving image data can be individually used for each display effect. The storage capacity required to store moving image data can be reduced compared to the set configuration. Further, for example, at the start of the group of display effects, the processing for expansion is executed on the first moving image data, and the second moving image is displayed during the period in which the moving image is displayed by the first moving image data. It is possible to execute a process for expanding the data. In this case, compared with a configuration in which the development of both moving image data is performed collectively, the processing load at the time of starting the group of display effects is suppressed.

As described above, it is possible to favorably perform the display effect using moving image data.

Features K2. The feature K1 is characterized in that the display control means includes means for performing a group of display effects by using one of the first moving image data and the second moving image data. Game machine.

According to the characteristic K2, one of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is commonly used to perform another display effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the moving image data, as compared with the configuration in which the moving image data is individually set for each display effect.

Features K3. The moving image based on the first moving image data corresponds to a series of display effects, and the moving image based on the second moving image data is a continuous display effect to the series of displaying effects based on the first moving image data. The gaming machine according to the feature K1 or K2, which is compatible with

According to the characteristic K3, since the first moving image data independently corresponds to the series of display effects, it is possible to perform the display effect using only the first moving image data. In this case, by separately preparing the first moving image data and the second moving image data, a single moving image data that is a combination of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is previously prepared. It is possible to perform a plurality of types of display effects while reducing the storage capacity required to store the moving image data as compared with the configuration in which the first moving image data is prepared in advance and separately prepared. Become.

Features K4. When the group of display effects are performed by the plurality of moving image effect executing units, the expanding unit performs an expanding process on the second moving image data during a period during which moving images are displayed by the first moving image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, which is characterized by being executed.

According to the characteristic K4, the expansion process is performed on the second moving image data by using the period during which the moving image is displayed by the first moving image data. As a result, the processing load when starting the display effect of the group is suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the development processing is collectively performed on both moving image data at the start of the display effect of the group.

Features K5. The plural moving image effect executing means,
A first moving image effect executing means for displaying a moving image based on the first moving image data (a function of executing steps S2913 to S2915 in the display CPU 72);
Second moving image effect executing means for displaying a moving image based on the second moving image data after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed (a function of executing steps S2917 to S2919 in the display CPU 72).
Third moving image effect executing means (step S2920 to step in display CPU 72) for displaying a moving image based on the third moving image data (moving image data PD56 for B after branching) after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed. Function for executing the processing of S2922),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K4, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic K5, it is possible to commonly use the first moving image data in each of the display effect using the second moving image data and the display effect using the third moving image data. Thereby, the single moving image data in which the first moving image data and the second moving image data are combined, and the single moving image data in which the first moving image data and the third moving image data are combined It is possible to perform the above-described plurality of types of display effects while reducing the storage capacity required to store the moving image data, as compared with a configuration in which each is separately prepared.

Features K6. An operation receiving unit (production operation device 48) for receiving an operation by a player is provided,
The plural moving image effect executing means is based on that the operation is accepted by the operation accepting means in a period during which a moving image is displayed by the first moving image data or at a timing after the moving image display is completed. And a production distribution unit (a function of executing the process of step S2908 in the display CPU 72) for setting the subsequent production execution target to the second moving image production execution unit or the third moving image production execution unit. The gaming machine described in K5.

In a configuration in which a previously executed moving image display is branched to a predetermined moving image display or a different moving image display based on an arbitrary operation by the player, since the operation itself is arbitrary, One moving image data cannot be used. On the other hand, according to the characteristic K6, the first moving image data is prepared for the moving image display executed first, and the second moving image data and the third moving image data are prepared for the moving image display executed after the branch. The moving image data of is prepared. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect in which the content of the moving image display of the development destination is changed in the middle of the moving image display based on any operation by the player.

Features K7. When the moving image based on the second moving image data or the moving image based on the third moving image data is displayed after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed, the expanding means outputs the first moving image. The characteristic K6 is characterized in that the expansion processing is executed only on the first moving image data among the first to third moving image data before the start timing of displaying the moving image by the data. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic K7, the processing load at the time of starting the group of display effects is suppressed as compared with the configuration in which the development process is collectively performed on each moving image data at the start of the group of display effects.

Features K8. The effect apportioning means is operated by the operation accepting means at a determination timing that is in the middle of displaying a moving image based on the first moving image data and is before the end timing by the update timing for determination. When it is specified that the operation is accepted, the effect execution target after the moving image display by the first moving image data is set to the second moving image effect executing means or the third moving image effect executing means. The gaming machine described in the feature K6 or K7.

According to the characteristic K8, since the moving image data of the distribution destination is determined before the timing when the moving image display by the first moving image data ends, the moving image display by the first moving image data is performed. In this period, a period for expanding the moving image data of the distribution destination is secured. As a result, a new moving image display is smoothly started after the moving image display based on the first moving image data is finished.

Features K9. When the moving image based on the second moving image data or the moving image based on the third moving image data is displayed after the moving image based on the first moving image data is displayed, the expanding means changes from the determination timing to the The game machine according to feature K8, wherein the rendering process is performed on the moving image data at the distribution destination during the period until the end timing of the moving image display based on the first moving image data.

According to the characteristic K9, the expansion process is executed only on the distribution-destination moving image data of the second moving image data and the third moving image data. As a result, the processing load of the expansion processing can be suppressed, and the storage capacity required in the expansion area can be reduced.

The invention of the characteristic group K is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

The case in which an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Further, a configuration including moving image data as image data is also known. Since moving image data has a larger data capacity than still image data, it is stored in a compressed state in a memory for image data. Therefore, when the moving image data is used, the moving image data is expanded into a predetermined memory area using a decoder to obtain a plurality of still image data, and the plurality of still image data are previously updated at each image update timing. It is necessary to use them in a defined order.

Here, since the moving image data compressed as described above needs to be decoded and used, there is a limitation in its use, and accordingly, a limitation in diversifying the display effect using the moving image display. Also occurs. On the other hand, a configuration in which it is stored as a collection of still image data without compression is conceivable, but in this case, the storage capacity of the memory for image data is extremely increased.

Further, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K9, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the features F1 to F15, the features G1 to G9, the features G'1 to G'2, the features H1 to H11, the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J13, and the features L1 to L19 described below. Alternatively, the configuration limited to 1 may be applied. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data and updating the content of the image at a predetermined update timing;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores specific image data used when a specific image is displayed as a specific type of individual image,
The display control means,
By using the specific image data at a predetermined first update timing, the specific image is displayed as a part of a plurality of types of individual images included in the image displayed on the display screen. A first display control means (a function of executing steps S504 and S505 in the VDP 76);
Second update timing in which the processing load related to the display of the individual images excluding the specific type of individual image among the various individual images included in the image displayed on the display screen is larger than the first update timing In the second display control means (step S3302 in the display CPU 72), an image having a processing load required for displaying the image is displayed as the specific type of individual image as compared with the case where the specific image is displayed using the specific image data. Or a function of executing the processing of step S3307 and the processing of steps S504 and S505 in the VDP 76),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L1, at the second update timing in which the processing load related to the display of the individual image excluding the specific type of individual image is larger than that at the first update timing, the processing required for the display is compared with the specific image. An image with a light load is displayed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load related to image display at the second update timing. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display mode such as simultaneously displaying a plurality of types of individual images while suppressing the occurrence of processing omission.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the second display control means displays a single-color image as the image with a small processing load.

According to the feature L2, a single color image is displayed on the display screen instead of the specific image. In this case, the processing load associated with displaying an image with a small processing load is reduced as compared with a configuration in which images of multiple colors are displayed, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein the color of the single-color image is set to be the same color as the base color of the specific image.

According to the feature L3, since the color of the single-color image and the color that is the basis of the specific image are the same, the player feels uncomfortable when the single-color image is displayed instead of the specific image. Hard to give. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load while reducing the discomfort felt by the player.

Feature L4. The specific image is configured to be changeable,
The second display control means changes the color of the single color image to the basic tone of the changed specific image when the color that is the basic tone of the specific image is changed by changing the specific image. The gaming machine according to feature L3, which is provided with a color changing unit (a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the display CPU 72) for changing to a different color.

According to the feature L4, since the specific image can be changed, the display modes can be diversified. Here, when the color of the specific image is changed, the color of the single-color image as an image with a small processing load is changed to the color that is the basis of the changed specific image. As a result, a single color image having the same color as the basic color of the changed specific image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the discomfort and the processing load given to the player while diversifying the display mode.

Feature L5. The display screen has a plurality of dots arranged vertically and horizontally,
The display control means controls each dot output based on the image data to display an image corresponding to the image data on the display screen,
Any of features L2 to L4, wherein the second display control means displays the single-color image on the entire display screen when a predetermined inspection condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature L5, when a predetermined inspection condition is satisfied, a single-color image is displayed on the entire display screen. Thus, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which initial setting processing is performed when the power is turned on, by displaying an image of a single color on the entire display screen when executing the initial setting processing as the inspection condition It becomes possible to do.

Feature L6. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed in front of the background image,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, wherein the specific type of individual image is the background image.

According to the feature L6, an image with a small processing load is displayed as the background image. In this case, the background image is less noticeable than other types of individual images, and thus the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's discomfort and reduce the processing load.

Feature L7. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
Display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
The image is displayed on the display screen based on the setting of the image data in the predetermined setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b), and the contents of the image are displayed each time a predetermined update timing is reached. Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for updating,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
Display execution means for displaying a predetermined base image in a display area corresponding to a storage area in which the image data is not set in the setting storage means (display CPU 72 executes V interrupt processing) Function to execute and a function to execute steps S504 and S505 in the VDP 76),
According to the content of the image displayed on the display screen, by not setting the image data in the storage area of the setting storage unit corresponding to the specific range of the image, the specific range And a base display utilizing means for displaying the base image (a function of executing the processing of step S3302 or step S3307 in the display CPU 72 and the processing of step S504 and step S505 in the VDP 76).
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L7, the base image is displayed in the display area corresponding to the storage area in which the image data is not set. Thereby, when the content of the image is updated, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the image before the update remains.

Here, according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen, the image data is not set in the storage area of the setting storage means corresponding to the specific range. As a result, the base image is displayed in the specific range. In this case, since it is not necessary to set the image data in the storage area of the setting storage unit corresponding to the specific range, the processing load can be reduced. Therefore, for example, by setting a plurality of types of image data in the setting storage unit, a plurality of types of individual images are simultaneously displayed on the display screen, while the base image is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous range within the display screen as the specific range. By displaying, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing omission while diversifying the display mode.

Further, in order to cope with a change in the display area of the base image that may occur due to a change in the image data set in the setting storage unit, the processing load amount secured for the display of the base image has a margin in advance. May have been set. In this case, by configuring the base image to be displayed in the specific range, it is possible to effectively utilize the margin.

Feature L8. The gaming machine according to feature L7, wherein the base image is set to an image of a single color.

According to the feature L8, a single-color image is displayed as the base image. In this case, the processing load related to the display of the base image is smaller than that in the configuration in which the base image is set to the image of a plurality of colors, so that the processing load can be reduced.

Feature L9. The display storage means stores specific image data used when a specific image is displayed as a specific type of individual image,
The specific range is included in the range in which the specific image is displayed,
The base display utilization means does not set the specific image data in the storage area of the setting storage means corresponding to the specific range according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. ,
The gaming machine according to feature L8, wherein the color of the base image is set to be the same as the color that is the base tone of the specific image.

According to the feature L9, the specific image data is not set in the storage area of the setting storage unit corresponding to the specific range according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. As a result, the base image is displayed in the specific range instead of the specific image.

Here, since the color of the base image is the same as the color that is the base tone of the specific image, it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when the base image is displayed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load while reducing the discomfort felt by the player.

Feature L10. The specific image is configured to be changeable,
If the base color of the specific image is changed by changing the specific image, the base display utilizing unit changes the color of the base image to the color of the basic image of the changed specific image. The gaming machine according to feature L9, which is provided with a color changing unit (a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the display CPU 72) to be changed.

According to the feature L10, since the specific image can be changed, the display modes can be diversified. Here, when the color of the specific image is changed, the color of the base image is changed to the color that is the base tone of the changed specific image. As a result, the base image of the same color as the basic color of the changed specific image is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the discomfort and the processing load given to the player while diversifying the display mode.

Feature L11. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed in front of the background image,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L7 to L10, wherein the specific range is part or all of a range in which the background image is displayed.

According to the feature L11, the base image is displayed in part or all of the range in which the background image is displayed. In this case, the background image is less noticeable than other types of individual images, and thus the player is unlikely to feel uncomfortable. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's discomfort and reduce the processing load.

Feature L12. The display mode on the display screen includes a display mode in which an individual image is displayed in front of the background image,
The specific type of individual image is the background image,
A plurality of types of display modes (first display mode, second display mode) in which colors that are the basic colors of the specific images used as the background images are different from each other are set,
The display control unit includes a display mode switching unit that sequentially switches the display modes based on a predetermined trigger (a function of executing the process of step S3202 in the operation generation command response process),
A feature L10, wherein the color changing unit changes the color of the base image to a color which is a basic tone of the specific image in the display mode after the switching, in response to the switching of the display mode. Gaming machine described in.

According to the feature L12, since a plurality of types of display modes in which the display modes of the images on the display screen are different from each other are set, the display modes can be diversified. In this case, in response to the switching of the display mode, the color of the base image is changed to the color that is the basis of the specific image used as the background image in the display mode after switching. As a result, the base image having the same color as the base color of the specific image in the display mode after switching is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the effect indicated by the feature L10 while diversifying the display mode.

It should be noted that "based on a predetermined trigger" means, for example, that "operation accepting means (production operation device 48) for accepting an operation of a player is provided, and the operation is accepted by the operation accepting means. Based on", "based on the fact that a predetermined specific effect is performed", and the like.

Feature L13. The display screen has a plurality of dots arranged vertically and horizontally,
The display control means displays an image on the display screen by controlling each dot output based on image data set in the setting storage means,
The base display utilizing means is for displaying the base image on the entire display screen when a predetermined inspection condition is satisfied, according to any one of features L7 to L12. Game machine.

According to the feature L13, the base image is displayed on the entire display screen when a predetermined inspection condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to check for missing dots by checking the base image. That is, by using the base image used when performing the inspection as a part of the display mode, it is possible to realize the diversification of the display mode and the reduction of the processing load.

Feature L14. A base information storage unit (register 92) for storing the base information corresponding to the base image in a rewritable state,
The display execution means is for displaying a base image of a color corresponding to the base information based on the base information stored in the base information storage means,
The display control means executes initialization processing (initial setting processing) when operating power is supplied,
When the initialization process is performed as the inspection condition, the base display utilizing means, based on the base information stored in the base information storage means, displays the base image of a color corresponding to the base information. It executes the inspection process to be displayed on the entire display screen,
The gaming machine according to feature L13, wherein the base information is initialized to initial base information corresponding to a predetermined inspection color at a timing prior to the execution timing of the inspection processing. ..

According to the feature L14, it is possible to cope with the color change of the base image by rewriting the base information. In the case of such a configuration, the color of the base image used for the inspection may change, and thus there is concern that the reliability of the inspection result may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the color of the base image is initially set to a predetermined inspection color before the inspection process of displaying the base image on the entire display screen. As a result, it is possible to easily deal with the color change of the base image and suppress the decrease in reliability of the inspection result.

Feature L15. The display screen has a plurality of dots arranged vertically and horizontally,
The setting storage means has, as the storage area, a plurality of unit setting areas capable of storing unit information,
The display execution means,
It has an initialization means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3402 and S3403 in the VDP 76) for initializing the setting storage means by setting the unit information of each unit setting area to predetermined initial information, In addition, after the initialization by the initialization unit, the drawing data is stored in the setting storage unit by performing an update process of updating the unit information of the unit setting area corresponding to the image data using the image data. A drawing data creating unit (a function for executing the process of step S505 in the VDP 76) is provided,
The display execution means outputs an image signal corresponding to the unit information of each unit setting area in the drawing data set in the setting storage means to the display means, and an image corresponding to the unit information of each unit setting area. By allowing the output to be performed at each dot corresponding to each unit setting area, the unit information is displayed in the display area corresponding to the unit setting area in which the unit information is the initial information. For displaying the individual image corresponding to the image data in the display area corresponding to the unit setting area where
The base display utilizing means is configured such that the drawing data creating means creates drawing data in which the unit information of the unit setting area corresponding to the specific range is not updated according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. The gaming machine according to any one of the features L7 to L14.

According to the feature L15, since the unit information of the unit setting area is updated using the image data after the initial information is set in the unit information of each unit setting area, the unit information corresponding to the unit setting area in which the unit information is updated. An image corresponding to the image data is displayed in the display area, while a base image, which is an image corresponding to the initial information, is displayed in the display area corresponding to the unit setting area that has not been updated. As a result, an image corresponding to the image data is displayed with the base image as the background.

Here, drawing data in which the unit information of the unit setting area corresponding to the specific range is not updated is created according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. When the image display is performed based on the drawing data, the base image is displayed in the specific range. In this case, since it is not necessary to update the unit information of the unit setting area corresponding to the specific range, the processing load related to the updating is reduced. As a result, the processing load required to display the image can be reduced.

Feature L16. The display storage means stores specific image data used when a specific image is displayed as a specific type of individual image,
The specific range is included in the range in which the specific type of individual image is displayed,
The display execution unit has a drawing instruction unit (a function of executing the process of step S408 in the display CPU 72) that creates drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least the information designating the image data and the parameter information of the image data. Prepare,
The drawing data creating means performs an updating process of updating the unit information of each unit setting area based on the information instructed by the drawing instructing means after the initialization by the initializing means. The drawing data is created in the setting storage means,
The base display utilizing means may generate the drawing instruction information, which does not include information of specific image data corresponding to the specific image, according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. The game machine according to feature L15, characterized in that the unit information of the unit setting area corresponding to the specific range is not updated.

According to the feature L16, the information corresponding to the specific image data is set not to be included in the drawing instruction information according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. As a result, the unit information of the unit setting area corresponding to the specific image data is not updated, so that the base image is displayed in the specific range instead of the specific image. In this case, since it is not necessary to perform the process of including the information corresponding to the specific image data in the drawing instruction information, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, in this case, since it is not necessary to grasp the display area of the base image including the specific range, it is not necessary to perform processing such as masking for grasping the display area of the base image. Therefore, the processing load required to display the base image can be reduced.

Feature L17. An initial information storage means (register 92) for storing the initial information in a rewritable state,
The initialization unit acquires the initial information stored in the initial information storage unit and initializes the setting storage unit by setting the unit information of each unit setting area to the acquired initial information. Is something
The display control means, when operating power is supplied, executes initialization processing (initial setting processing) prior to display control for displaying a game image on the display screen,
The gaming machine according to feature L16, wherein the initial information is initialized in the initialization process such that the color of the base image is the same as the color that is the base tone of the specific image. ..

According to the characteristic L17, it is possible to deal with the color change of the base image by rewriting the initial information. Thereby, the configuration of the feature L10 can be easily realized.

Here, the initial information is initialized in correspondence with the color that is the basic tone of the specific image in the initialization process. Thereby, since the specific image and the base image are associated with each other before the game is started, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game is started in the situation where the specific image is not associated. ..

In particular, according to the relationship with the feature L12, “the display mode switching unit is for initializing to a specific display mode predetermined in the initialization process, and the initial information is: It is preferable that the color of the base image is initially set to be the same as the color of the base tone of the specific image used as the background image in the specific display mode.

The "game image" includes a demo display image displayed when the game is in a standby state.

Feature L18. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display screen (display screen G),
A first display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display screen using the image data and updating the content of the image each time a predetermined update timing is reached,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The image data read from the first display storage unit is stored, and when the image data of the same capacity is read and compared, the period required to read the image data is read from the first display storage unit. A second display storage means (work RAM 73) shorter than the case,
A third data storing method for storing specific data used for displaying an image, wherein a period required for reading the specific data is shorter than a period required for reading the image data stored in the second display storage means. Storage means for display (register 92),
Equipped with
The display control means,
First display execution means for reading the image data stored in the second display storage means and executing processing for displaying an image corresponding to the image data on the display screen based on the image data.
Second display execution means for reading the specific data stored in the third display storage means and executing processing for displaying an image on the display screen based on the specific data;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature L18, the specific data used for displaying the image is stored in the third display storage means, and the period required to read the specific data is stored in the second display storage means. It is shorter than the period required to read the image data. As a result, for example, at the update timing having a relatively large processing load among the image update timings, the process of displaying the image is executed based on the specific data stored in the third display storage unit having a relatively short read period. By doing so, the processing period can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display mode such as simultaneously displaying a plurality of types of individual images while suppressing the occurrence of processing omission.

Feature L19. The image data is stored in the second display storage means as data having a large number of unit image data (pixels) associated with color information, and the specific data is the third display as common unit information. Is stored in the storage means for use,
A setting storage means (frame areas 82a, 82b) having a plurality of unit setting areas capable of storing unit information;
The first display execution means reads out the image data stored in the second display storage means, and executes a process of applying each unit image data of the image data to the unit information of the corresponding unit setting area. By which the individual image is displayed on the display screen,
The second display execution means reads the specific data stored in the third display storage means, and executes a process of uniformly applying the specific data to each unit setting area of the setting storage means. Accordingly, the gaming machine according to Feature L18, which displays an image on the display screen.

According to the feature L19, the image data stored in the second display storage means has a large number of unit image data, while the specific data stored in the third display storage means is common unit information. Has become. As a result, the data amount related to the storage of the specific data is smaller than that of the image data. Therefore, for example, even in a configuration in which a register having a storage capacity smaller than that of a memory or the like is used as the third display storage means, it is possible to easily store the specific data.

Further, in the process of uniformly applying the specific data to each unit setting area, it is not necessary to grasp the unit image data corresponding to each unit setting area. As a result, the processing load associated with image display is reduced compared to the processing in which the unit image data corresponding to each unit setting area is applied. Therefore, the processing period can be further shortened.

The invention of the characteristic L group is effective for the following problems.

As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. are known. These gaming machines are equipped with a control board on which an element such as a memory in which a control program for a game is stored is mounted, and a series of games are controlled by the control board. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control board, but are mounted on the control board in an integrated state.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is known one provided with a display device having a display screen, such as a liquid crystal display device. In such a gaming machine, a memory for image data in which image data is stored in advance is mounted, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen by using the image data read from the memory.

The case in which an image is displayed using two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been done. Further, by reading the image data, drawing data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is created in the storage means such as the VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data, an image in which a character or the like is arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display screen.

Here, the image displayed on the display screen is configured to be updated at a predetermined update cycle, and the drawing data is created and the signal is output to the display device in time for the update cycle. Needs to be done. In addition, when creating the drawing data, an operation for specifying the coordinates and sizes of the individual images simultaneously displayed on the display screen is performed, and the drawing data is created based on the operation result.

In the above configuration, the processing load increases as the number of individual images to be calculated increases at the same time. Then, when the processing load locally increases, there is a concern that a processing drop may occur.

Further, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features L1 to L19, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C10, the features C′1, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1. To E8, the features F1 to F15, the features G1 to G9, the features H1 to H11, the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J13, and the features K1 to K9. May be. In this case, it is possible to obtain further effects by applying each configuration.

Below, the basic configuration of various game machines to which the above respective features can be applied is shown.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area, and gives a bonus to the player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and caused by the operation of the stop operation means Then, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a gaming machine that gives a privilege to the player according to the stopped patterns.

10... Pachinko machine, 31... Symbol display device, 48... Operating device for production as operation receiving means, 50... Main control device as upstream control means, 53... ROM, 70... Display control device, 72... Display CPU , 73... work RAM, 74... memory module, 76... VDP, 81c... synthetic data area as grouping storage area, 82a, 82b... frame area as setting storage means, 93... moving picture decoder as expanding means , 94... Display circuit, 97... Scaler as data adjusting means, 101... Controller, 102... NAND flash memory, 111... I/F, 113... Controller CPU as managing means, 114... Control as managing information storing means ROM, 117... Cache memory as storage means, 119... Boot memory, 131... Display CPU, 132... Work RAM, 133... Memory module, 135... VDP, 142a, 142b... Frame area as setting storage means , 143... Z buffer as comparison storing means, 145... Mode buffer as grouping storage area, 155... Display circuit, 161... Controller, 162... NAND flash memory, 171... I/F, 173... Management Controller CPU as means, 174... Control ROM as management information storage means, 177... Cache memory as storage means, 179... Boot memory, CH5... Sprite for smooth movement, G... Display screen, PA1... Overlap Area, PC35, PC36... Connected object, PD2 to PD10... Divided part data, PD12 to PD15... Divided data group, PD19... Partial addition data as transparent value adjustment data, PD22 to PD25... Partial alpha data, PD26, PD27... Design sprite data, PD30 to PD33... Partial alpha data, PD37, PD38... Partial alpha data, PD48, PD49... Sprite data, PD54 to PD56... Moving image data, PPC0... Bottom image, PPC1 to PPC13... Individual image.

Here, when a plurality of individual images are displayed so as to overlap each other in the depth direction of the display screen, it is necessary to provide a configuration capable of displaying them satisfactorily, and there is still room for improvement in this respect. is there.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and when a plurality of individual images are displayed so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display screen, the display can be performed well. The purpose is to provide a machine.

The present invention is
Display means having a display screen in which a large number of dots are arranged vertically and horizontally ,
Display storage means for storing image data in advance,
The drawing data is created in the setting storage means by setting the image data in the setting storage means having a large number of unit setting areas, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to the display means. and Table示制control means Ru to display the image in Dzu-out before Symbol display screen,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The image data has a large number of unit image data associated with numerical information defining color information,
Each unit setting area has a configuration capable of setting numerical information within a range up to a limit numerical value,
The image signal is output by the display control unit so that a brighter color is displayed in a dot corresponding to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical value information,
The display control means,
Image data setting means for setting image data corresponding to the individual images so that the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display screen;
Addition processing executing means for executing addition processing for adding numerical information corresponding to respective unit image data overlapping each other in the plurality of individual images,
Setting processing execution means for setting the data of the result of the addition processing in a unit setting area corresponding to each of the unit image data overlapping each other in the setting storage means,
Of the back side individual image and the front side individual image displayed so as to be overlapped in the depth direction, numerical information of the unit image data corresponding to a portion overlapping with the front side individual image in the back side individual image is reduced, A reflection reducing unit that does not perform the reduction on the unit image data corresponding to a portion that does not overlap the front side individual image in the back side individual image,
Is equipped with
The gaming machine is
After setting the image data of the back side individual image in the setting storage means, it is possible to set the image data of the front side individual image in the setting storage means,
A means capable of executing the reduction by the reflection reducing means when the image data of the front side individual image is set in the setting storage means,
The addition processing execution means adds the numerical information of the front individual image corresponding to the overlapping portion to the numerical information of the back individual image for which the reduction is performed .

When a plurality of individual images are displayed so as to overlap each other in the depth direction of the display screen, the display can be favorably performed.

Claims (1)

Display means having a display screen,
Display storage means for storing image data in advance,
Display control means for displaying an image on the display screen based on setting the image data in a predetermined setting storage means, and updating the content of the image each time a predetermined update timing is reached,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means,
Display execution means for displaying a predetermined base image set to a single color image in a display area corresponding to a storage area in which the image data has not been set in the setting storage means; ,
According to the content of the image displayed on the display screen, by not setting the image data in the storage area of the setting storage means corresponding to the specific range of the image, the specific range A base display utilizing means for displaying the base image in
Equipped with
The display storage means stores specific image data used when a specific image is displayed as a specific type of individual image,
The specific range is included in the range in which the specific image is displayed,
The base display utilization means does not set the specific image data in the storage area of the setting storage means corresponding to the specific range according to the content of the image displayed on the display screen. ,
The color of the base image is set to the same color as the base color of the specific image,
The gaming machine characterized in that the base display utilizing means displays the base image on the entire display screen when a predetermined condition is satisfied.